JP7045083B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention includes so-called ball-type gaming machines (hereinafter, also referred to as "pachinko gaming machines" or "pachinko machines") and rotating cylinder-type gaming machines (generally also referred to as "pachislot machines" and "slot machines"). It is about a game machine.

Conventionally, a plurality of winning probabilities according to the gaming state are prepared for the jackpot winning probability, and after the end of the jackpot game by a specific jackpot winning, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal state. There is a known gaming machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-090825

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if it is controlled to an advantageous state of a high probability state, there are not a few voices who desire a gaming machine in which the production is devised in the advantageous gaming state.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the production is devised in view of the above-mentioned problems.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention uses a lottery means for executing a lottery for winning when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display means capable of displaying an image in a predetermined display area, and a design using a decorative symbol. A plurality of lottery result display control means for varying and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means by the decorative symbol, a normal gaming state, and an advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game state control means for controlling the game state to any one of the game states of the above, and a predetermined number is stored up to a predetermined number based on the fact that the game medium wins a prize at a specific starting port and the right of lottery by the lottery means is acquired. It is possible to execute a hold display means for holding and displaying on condition that the game medium is stored, and an instruction display for prompting the player to perform a specific operation on the operation means for launching the game medium. The display means is provided with an instruction display executing means, and a first effect indicating that the advantageous gaming state is provided and a second effect indicating the end of the advantageous gaming state are performed are displayed on the display means. The symbol variation is performed when the second effect of suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is displayed on the display means, and the advantageous gaming is performed. The hold display, which was not displayed while the display of the second effect in which the suggestion display suggesting the end of the state is performed, has ended the display of the second effect by the hold display means. The second effect is displayed later, and the instruction display when the first effect indicating the advantageous gaming state is displayed and the suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state are performed . This is the same as the instruction display when the hold display is displayed after the display of the effect of is finished, and is displayed in the second effect in which the suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is performed . Before the end of the predetermined display that does not suggest the result of the lottery , or without the predetermined display displayed in the second effect, the lottery is replaced with a special effect of a type different from the second effect. It is possible to suggest the result of the lottery by the means, and when the display of the second effect in which the symbol variation is performed is performed, the symbol variation is caused by the display means of the second effect. When the second effect is displayed, which is displayed in a mode corresponding to the display of the effect and the suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is performed, the advantageous gaming state is indicated. Show A gaming machine characterized in that the display area of the symbol variation displayed by the display means is reduced so that the symbol variation is less likely to be recognized than when the first effect is displayed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a devised production .

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and seen later. It is sectional drawing of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decorative unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the dish unit. It is sectional drawing which cut at the part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows the state which the front cover of a foul cover unit is removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of a ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit with the rear case removed and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front, and (D). Is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which shows that the door frame is cut at the substantially center in the vertical direction. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view seen after disassembling the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching apparatus in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which saw after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the board unit. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in a board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the lock device and looked at afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen later. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 in the vertical direction. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board housed in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the game board seen diagonally from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the rear. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the rear by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit for each main member and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view of the first unit in the attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the first unit in the attacker unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the second unit in the attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the second unit in the attacker unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the third unit in the attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the third unit in the attacker unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 4th unit in the attacker unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 4th unit in the attacker unit and looked at later. It is a front view which shows by cutting a part of an attacker unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view of the center accessory seen diagonally from the upper right front. It is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the front diagonally lower left. It is a perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main member and looked at later. It is a perspective view of the front right middle production unit of the center character as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the front right middle production unit of the center character as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect unit in the middle right of the table as seen from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect unit in the middle right of the table as seen after disassembling. It is an exploded perspective view of the second embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the effect unit in the middle right of the table, viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as viewed after being disassembled. (A) is a perspective view of the front cover and the effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from a position slightly to the left with respect to the front. (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further to the left of (b). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state when the light is off, and (c) shows a light emitting decoration mode when the blue light is on. It is explanatory drawing, and (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of red lighting. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at later. It is a perspective view which looked at the back side effect unit in the back unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back side effect unit in the back unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-horizontal effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-horizontal effect unit for each main member and looked at later. It is a perspective view of one rotating decorative body unit in the back-horizontal effect unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration unit in the back-horizontal effect unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit of the back-horizontal effect unit as seen from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit of the back-horizontal effect unit as seen after disassembling. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the production unit in the middle right of the table of the center role in the table unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right middle effect unit viewed from the front slightly above in the normal position, and (b) is the front view of the front right middle movable decoration unit in the appearance position. It is a perspective view seen from a little above. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back side effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back upper production unit and the back lower production unit in the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in the main control board. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a simplified normal state facing from the window of the center accessory, and (b) shows a back right effect unit and a back left effect unit while rotating the rotating decorative body, and a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect example which divides the display screen of a display means into three, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which stopped the rotating decoration body following (b). Unlike FIG. 163, it is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into six with respect to the appearance of the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect example which makes the rotation position of a rotating decorative body different, and appears before the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit appear. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for a jackpot, (B) is a reach determination table used for a lottery process for a reach, and (C) is a lottery process for a type of jackpot. It is a design determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms steady process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example of the decorative symbol change start processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the judgment result and the effect time in a special symbol variation pattern. It is a figure (the distribution table 1A) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. It is a figure which summarized the reliability when each winning effect appears using the distribution table 1A. It is a figure (distribution table 1B) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. It is a figure which summarized the reliability when each winning effect appears using the distribution table 1B. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the normal type of winning effect is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the winning effect of SP1 type is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the winning effect of SP2 type is executed. It is a figure (distribution table 2A) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. It is a figure (distribution table 2B) for demonstrating the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the 1st effect pattern is executed. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the 1st effect pattern is executed. It is another figure (the 1) for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the 1st effect pattern is executed. It is another figure (the 2) for demonstrating the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the 1st effect pattern is executed. It is a time chart for explaining the alternative effect by the 1st effect pattern. It is a time chart for explaining the alternative effect by the 2nd effect pattern. It is a time chart for explaining the alternative effect by the third effect pattern. It is a time chart for explaining the alternative effect by the 4th effect pattern. It is a concrete effect image (No. 1) in the liquid crystal display device when the continuous defeat effect is executed. It is a concrete effect image (No. 2) in the liquid crystal display device when the continuous defeat effect is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the game progress at the time of winning an advantageous jackpot. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect display example with the progress of the game shown in FIG. 205. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern of a high probability time saving state. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern of the forced battle based on the type of a jackpot. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect by a forced battle. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect by a special PC image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect by a special selection mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect by a special line. It is a figure for demonstrating the 2nd control example in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition from the demonstration production to the takeover production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, the main body frame, and the game board constituting the pachinko machine. , It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and the outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a player on the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4. It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and each in the left-right direction. The width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can rotate at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so that the door frame 5 is opened.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, a gaming area 1100 in which a gaming ball is driven through a substantially circular gaming window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the gaming window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 110), various winning openings, accessories, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure between the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 (B) is a perspective view of FIG. 14 (A) viewed from below. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (upper and lower) direction. It is provided with a frame plate 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively, and each frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13 is provided with the connecting member 14. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. Is provided with an engaging notch 15 that penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal profile material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12, 13 and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be supported, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The decorative cover 23 and the like are provided. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20 and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14 (A)). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but the support protrusion 20b is viewed from the front. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the above can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d and the like are provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portion 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is provided with a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The head space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to form the stopper portion 27a. The tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging lower portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, respectively. The centers are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is in contact with the tip portion. Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface is divided, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment to rotate the tip portion in the direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is constantly applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise in the figure) away from the support protrusion piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction that abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengages, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-mentioned component force F1. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, the lower support metal fitting is provided in the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support projection 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed into the drawing. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, so that the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed in the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thinner wall thickness while maintaining strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left-right direction can be widened. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fastened in close contact with the inner surface and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be a rectangular framework. Further, after connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 by the connecting member 14, when the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 10, each Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, for example). It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear right of the door frame. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back surface.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It includes a left side decorative unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decorative unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the foul cover unit 540, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. It is equipped with a glass unit 590 and a glass unit.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which shows.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. And a handle bracket 140 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 or the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, the handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and the launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194 and door frame base that are arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192 (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. The door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the board 194, and the wiring cord 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. A wiring holding member 197, which holds a part of (see 28), is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the entire door frame base unit 100 is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, The wiring code 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. is on the right side (axis) of the door frame base board 194 when viewed from the rear. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of the support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends backward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are used. It is designed to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, in the game window 101, the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge are formed in a continuous smooth curved line, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. In the door frame base main body 110, the widths of the upper side and the left and right side sides formed by the game window 101 are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and a ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle mounting for mounting the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and a tubular shape that extends forward shortly on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116, which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base main body when viewed from the rear. From the arrangement of the board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side), and the rear side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 protruding rearward and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side, and the glass unit 590 is recessed to the front side. A glass unit support step 110a to which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can abut and two locking members for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190 projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. The unit 110b and the like are further provided.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c that protrudes rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting portion 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker cover 338, respectively, at appropriate positions. It is formed.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 described later and the foul cover unit 540 are the first. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof on the upper side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and is provided with a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 that is recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole is made from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 by a thin drill or the like, which is made of metal. It can be prevented by the crime prevention member 121, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at a position of .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, thereby holding the door frame. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base board cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is vertically oriented on the rear surface on the rear side. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base board cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending laterally and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the step portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195. It is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base board cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195a of the door frame base board cover 195.

The wiring holding member 197 is bound to a predetermined binding hole 197a paired up and down with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base board cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively far apart, so wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base board cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main body frame 3 is rotatably supported on the rear surface, and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring cord 196, disconnection of connection connector, etc.) from occurring due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring holding member 197 may be formed. It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 makes it appear as if a bridge is built between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as wiring and the inability to close the door frame 5, and the main control board 4100, peripheral control unit 4140, payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side. There is a problem with the wiring 196 that connects each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. as electrical equipment. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connector. can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a which are arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and reliably prevent the wiring 196 from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring 196 is provided by the wiring holding member 197. Since the wiring 196 can be satisfactorily prevented from hanging when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the door frame 5, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side side of the door frame 5 is supported by the shaft. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction toward at least the side along which the wiring 196 is along, wiring is performed by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. The wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197 by surrounding the three sides of the 196. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to substantially the same length as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is the position on the axial center side of the door frame 5 with respect to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since a pantograph-like link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and the force applied to the wiring 196 and the like can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in the wiring 196 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compactly assembled, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 on which the wiring holding member 197 is pivotally supported is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring holding member 197 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compactly organized, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by other members and prevent problems from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held with respect to the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base board cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5 side for moving (opening / closing), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force for opening / closing the door frame 5, as described above. It is possible to surely play the effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 is provided. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size, and having a large game board 4 and strongly attracting the attention of the player. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylinder portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 141. 143 is provided with reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality of directions in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is adapted to be attached to the handle mounting portion 114 by a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the handle mounting portion 114 inclined at an angle, the handle bracket 140 is attached so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted at an angle.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open side side portion back surface of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and these are mutually fastened with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof in the vertical direction at the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be freely opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed on the lower long side edge of the long side edges thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. , A vertically bent projectile 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projectile piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch portion 162 substantially corresponding to the notch portion 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outer bending protrusion 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open side inner bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open side outer bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, it is mounted on the shaft support side. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 108), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The security cover 180 has a security function of covering the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are each provided with a security rear end projecting piece 183 that projects rearward along the shape of the end. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, the security front projection piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and the left and right outside the security front projection piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the dish. By attaching it to the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although detailed illustration is omitted, the security front projection piece 184 is adapted to fit with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and also. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component member 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

The back surface of the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball hitting guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball from colliding with the glass plate 594 that is sent or returned from the guide passage portion.

As a result, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower rear side of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are displayed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between the windows, the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, and cheating. It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety against the above.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for engaging the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In this glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decorative unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29 (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29 (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged behind the side lens 210. The decorative substrate 214 on the right side, which is arranged from the substantially center to the upper side in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and the side inner on the lower side. The lower right side decorative substrate 216 and the rear side of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, which are arranged from substantially the center to the lower side of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and have a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the side so as to cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a lens 210 and a decorative substrate cover 220 on the lower right side that is attached to the side decorative frame 202.

Further, the right side decorative unit 200 is arranged with a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, in front of the side lens 210 and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and is an abbreviation for the game window 101. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are side inner lenses. It includes an inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212, and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the upper side inner lens 206.

In the right side decorative unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. The 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a are driven by the drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light to make the right side decoration unit 200 emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. It is formed in a curved shape along the outer circumference on the right side of the door. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a that are divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 210b made of a prism surface of the above. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radial lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend above the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and are formed from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed in a state of being recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

Further, the side lens 210 is provided with a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusion lens portion 210c can widely diffuse the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is satisfactorily sent to the player side. It can be communicated.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted into the inside of the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffusely refract and diffusely reflect light by a wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to glitter the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. As the LEDs 214a and 216a, those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A lens with a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is a red and green LED in this example.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decorative unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range, and can be attached to a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and is provided on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the inner lens 206 on the upper side of the side, and is caused by noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Similar to the side inner lens 212, the front surface of the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed in a wrinkled shape, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses allow light to be diffusely refracted and diffusely reflected.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and arranged on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can produce a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decorative unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photographic mode of light emission of the left side decorative unit.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. Along with the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrically formed with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and the large window frames 242a having a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuously extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242, and a large window frame 244a. It is provided with a frame-shaped side top decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side with respect to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250. An inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and having a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. It is provided with a side inner lens 252 having a diffuser portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center to the upper side in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. It is provided with a left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 is a transparent unit that supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view and the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. It is equipped with an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the upper left side decorative board cover 258, and the lower left side decorative board cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the inner is formed. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (silver in this example). Further, the side flash lens 246 has a translucent property and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, the small windows on both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c and 244c that penetrate the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a notched state are formed on both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and the small window frames 242b and 244b are formed. The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 to be closed, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through the 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. Light is diffusely refracted by the diffuser portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by the drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of this example has a form extending in the vertical direction along the left outer circumference of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a small, substantially elliptical shape that is arranged between the large window frames 242a extending in the front-rear direction along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the large window frames 242a. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is made of synthetic resin. It is formed.

In the side lower decorative frame 242, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

Further, the side upper decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in front view extending from the upper left outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 continuously to the upper end of the side lower decorative frame 242. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the side open. The decorative frame 244 on the side has two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small window frame having a substantially elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with 244b and an opening frame 244c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

The decorative frame 244 on the side is such that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. The 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the decorative frame 244 on the side can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and visible.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side of the center on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 and the peripheral lens portion 250a are recessed to the rear side. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 250b formed on the front side and a side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radial lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 also has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and concentrically centered on the center of the game window 101 in the width direction thereof. There are multiple. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffused portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inside of each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffused portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the extending direction of the strip-shaped lens is arranged on the front side. It intersects (substantially orthogonally) with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a of the decorative member 251.

In the side inner lens 252, the diffuser portion 252a is visible from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, the light is diffusely refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffuser portion 252a, so that the diffuser portion 252a is diffused. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and the large side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are mounted. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used on the side. The LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c (radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. As 256b, a lens having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in the front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent mischief from being mischievous by the upper left speaker 262 or breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 and inserting an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to make noise than other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decorative unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decorative unit 240 has a side lens 250 having a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a forming and curved an outer surface of the left side decorative unit 240, and a side lens 250 arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a on the surface. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged behind the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. A side inner lens 252 having a diffuser portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses, a left side upper decorative substrate 254 and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be light-emitting and decorated.

By the way, the light radiated to the front (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is radiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a toward the inner decorative member 251 is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. It will be reflected to the peripheral lens portion 250a side at (front surface), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 will pass through the peripheral lens portion 250a and be irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side) converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected in a striped manner with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusing portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the direction (almost orthogonal). Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 extends in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a, which is longer than the width of the slit 251a, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped light having different shades. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminescent decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment has the upper end edges on the center side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extending frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extending frame 281c that extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decorative member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a plate-shaped diffuser lens 285 arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is arranged on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and has substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light-shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the cylinder portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287 arranged behind the light-shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the cylinder portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the above are provided with an upper central decorative substrate 288 mounted on the front surface.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of upper decorative units 280 arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and on the front surface. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and the board cover 291 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. The lower side of the mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 have a large amount of translucency and are predetermined. It is provided with a top and bottom decorative cover 294 shaped into the shape.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a whose rear end side is open in the center in the left-right direction. It includes a cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 and shaped into a predetermined shape. ..

In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 shines with light from the outside. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing into the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c facing the frame of the lower extension frame 281c are provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and the axial core of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, the light can be diffusely refracted by the plurality of prisms and band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of lenses concentric on the rear side are formed, and light can be diffusely refracted, so that the rear side is clear. It is invisible to the lens.

Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a in the upper center lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper center lens 284 can be individually illuminated and decorated. Further, in the upper side decorative substrate 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c in the front decoration member 281. It is arranged in the position corresponding to each of the frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can be decorated with light emission of the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a dish unit base 310. When the upper and rear sides of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are opened and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are covered, the front end is the front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in the visual direction, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and covers the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the center on the left and right to the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface and the substrate mounting base 320. It is provided with an upper plate decorative substrate 322 on which a plurality of LEDs 322a are mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312, and the upper side and the rear side are opened. A dish-shaped lower plate body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the bottom, and a dish-shaped lower plate body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate body 324 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later are located at a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate main body 324 and extends to the right in front view. The lower plate cover 328 having a facing lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a and the upper opening 330a coaxially with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position on the left and right center left side of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328. It includes a lower plate right side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 that extend diagonally to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326. The lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, and the protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate from the rear side to allow sound to pass through, and protection. It is provided with a frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. It is provided with a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in a disk shape that is gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge toward the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. It is designed to protect as much as possible. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface thereof. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out a game ball attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. The lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface and for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and the lower plate unit base 310 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It is equipped with a ball lending unit 360 that operates a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is prepared. A ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball-renting unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front), has a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an upper plate ball supply port 310c and an upper plate ball supply. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction to the lower side near the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and the upper plate. It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and projecting forward and having the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, and is fitted with the lower plate main body 324 and the rear end of the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular annular shape in front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is with the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball discharged from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit into the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball abuts on the game ball with the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c closed and rolls. The direction changes, and it is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in the front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the precision ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 313 is electrically grounded so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the upper end of the upper plate body 312, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction and to which the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. An operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting the operation unit 400, which will be described later, is provided in a stepped shape at the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the upper plate body 312 and further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b. There is.

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be diffusely refracted. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, in the assembled state of the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318, the portion that can be seen through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is clearly visible from the player side, whereas the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is visible. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is uncertain.

Further, the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape, similar to the portion on the right side of the front decorative member 316 of the upper plate. It is formed in an integral shape with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), so that light can be diffusely refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. There is. The upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to spread forward in a fan shape in a plan view and a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction so that the substantially center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball punching hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is provided with a plating layer which is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silvery and metallic feeling (a matte state as if sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 includes a plate-shaped portion that forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 that extends rearward from the lower end. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and are formed in the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface thereof. Further, the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface thereof, and is a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 extending rearward from the lower end. It has a plate-shaped part that forms a. The opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is made of punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in the metal plate, and prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted inside.

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface excluding the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate lower left cover 334 are closed. The bottom surface between the two is closed by the lower plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

The upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is for operating the upper plate ball removal button 341 and the upper plate ball removal button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the operating piece 342 are operably supported and the plate unit base 310. A contact piece that slides in the vertical direction due to the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346, and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 provided with 343a and arranged on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 are slidably supported in the vertical direction and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310. It is equipped with a punching base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removal button 341 so that the upper plate ball removal button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. (See 43) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. (See 44) and, after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guide flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which allows the game ball to be distributed.

In the upper plate ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 is used. Can be supplied to.

Further, in the ball pulling flow path 344c of the upper plate ball pulling base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball feeding port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and also the contact piece 343a protruding rearward. Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 enters the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, it is discharged from the ball ejection port 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the precision ball pulling slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is arranged between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left lower cover 334 of the lower plate on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324, and forms the central portion of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Rotate the plate-shaped open / close shutter 352 and the open / close shutter 352 that are rotatably supported on the upper surface of the punch base 351 and the lower dish ball punch base 351 and can open and close the lower dish ball punch hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the lower plate ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slider 353. There is.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the open / close shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower plate ball extraction base 351 and the closing portion 352a so as to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removal slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move backward, and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. Further, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position is provided for holding in the moving position.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. There is a state in which the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slides backward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closed portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move backward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole Matching with 324b, the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower plate ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slider 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of being aligned with the withdrawal hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be ejected downward even if the lower plate ball extraction button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slide 353 can be slid, and the closing portion 352a is urged in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball punching hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincided with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also has a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the dish unit 300. You can lend (pay out) into the upper plate 301, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid cards that you put in after deducting the rest of the loaned amount will be returned. There is. In addition, the remaining loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan balance display unit 363, and is arranged behind the front cover 365 to which the loan balance display unit 363 is attached and the ball rental button 361. And the ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which the switch operated by the operation of the return button 362 is mounted, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. The rear cover 367, which is attached to the rear cover 367, is provided. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

The ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball-renting unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m on which the ball-renting button 361 and the return button 362 face and the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 comprising a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the cover 365, a protrusion 310o formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward, and closing the display opening 310n. The loan balance display unit 363 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and is in front of the plate unit. It is arranged so as to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (on the player side) from the outer circumference of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his / her hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, and the ball lending button can be noticed. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be reminiscent of the machine, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model pachinko machine), the feeling of anxiety given to the player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a pressed operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that the player can rotate and operate, and the press that the player can press. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted in the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven operation unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 fixed to the lower surface. The base is mounted so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass through. It mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface while being arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed into a predetermined shape. It includes an inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427. The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass through, and the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface. A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a, which are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401, and the dial decorative substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the annulus. It includes a 432b, a pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by the substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in a ring shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked to the dial operation unit 401. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is further provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details of the protruding portion 401f will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By abutting on the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. It is an inclined surface, and the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It is provided with a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the button support cylinder 416b in the operation unit holding member 416 is provided with a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the abutting portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button main body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and the dial operation unit is on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The characters "Push" are displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the characters can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation unit holding member 416, and the annular slide that abuts on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 with the gear rail 416a. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connection locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c protruding downward from the lower end and arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are connected to each other. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotating shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotates and drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape and presses inside. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button body 416b and a locking convex portion 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d that penetrates the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction and allows the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 to pass through, and the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. A pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the opening 416e that the press detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432 that penetrates the button 432c and extends downward from the lower surface to lock and hold the button decorative substrate 432. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and is locked. It is further provided with a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b in the vertical direction, and the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an internal shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b to mount the dial drive motor 414, and the motor mounting portion 420d and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the bottom. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the outer side of the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions on the outside of the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation unit holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation unit holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof so as to be fitted with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 on the surface by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently transferred to the base member 420, and the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass through and the flange portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper portion is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer circumference of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front-back direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the lower end protrudes outward in a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. It is equipped with. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, the locking piece 422c can be engaged with the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

The upper cover 422 has a dial operation unit 401 from below with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper portion, and the outer peripheral shape has a shape substantially matching the outer peripheral shape of the upper cover 422. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424b capable of engaging with the engaging claw 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portion 424b is provided with the engaging portion 424b. By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates vertically in the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and an operation unit mounting of the dish unit 300 that extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) so that the operation unit 400 can be mounted. When the cover body 426 is elastically deformed or hit, the cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to alleviate the impact.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the operation unit 400 is attached. The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b mounted on the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential distance corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although the details of the operation unit 400 of this example will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. .. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the projecting portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, and the operation unit 400 is supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely used by the player. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, suppressing the concentration of the hitting impact and preventing the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 able to withstand a bang, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation unit 401 and 405 can be freely operated. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, when the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c can receive an impact or a load, so that the impact or the like from the operation units 401 or 405 is dispersed to prevent the impact or the like from concentrating. It is possible to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward from positions supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation unit in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 receives an impact from the operation units 401 and 405 in contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged directly under the impact, so that the operation units 401 and 405 of the base member 420 The portion that supports the plate bends due to the impact, and the base member 420 bends (elastically deforms), so that the impact from the operating units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 applies to the dish unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation unit 401 so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view, the dial is dialed. When the operation unit 401 is struck from above, even if the operation unit holding member 416 holding the dial operation unit 401 is separated from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation unit 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 that rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). As a result, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effect of the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414 to appropriately drive the dial operation unit. It is possible to make the production using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get tired of it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation shaft of 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted through the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being directly engaged with the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member. It is possible to surely prevent it from being depressed more than 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation unit 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation unit holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from the operation unit.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is used. Even if the amount of heat generated increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the above. The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. The pachinko machine 1 can withstand a high load, can fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive means 414 as described above, and entertain the player. Can be.

Further, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the above, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, which is more suitable for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensational effect, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the operation units 401 and 405 are provided with a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for light emission decoration, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be light emission decoration, so that the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 come into contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is repeatedly rotated forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range to vibrate, thereby vibrating the dial operation unit 401 via the step portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operation feeling for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move without permission, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can move freely to attract the player's attention to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. In addition to making it easier, the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are brought into contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side as well, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the circumference of the axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial in the operation unit 400. The roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and the guide to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The characters "PUSH" can be easily read from the player side without turning or being greatly tilted, and the player can be surely recognized that the pressing operation unit 405 is to perform the pressing operation. be able to.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a diameter smaller than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to each other at the upper end of the operation unit 400. The gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be obtained through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the dial operation unit 401 becoming difficult to rotate or the pressing operation unit 405 becoming difficult to press due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is formed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (pressing a position deviated to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. The rotation drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 come into contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further improved.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, it may not be inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially distributed in the outward direction in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the rotation axis, preventing the load from concentrating, and the resistance in the operation unit 400. The load resistance and impact resistance can be surely improved, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved, the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not only simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, and forward rotation and reverse rotation can be performed. It can be easily vibrated by repetition, and the operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a bang on the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the production using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish side outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. On the front of the handle base 502, which is fixed and cylindrical and whose front end bulges roundly in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the handle body 504 which is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle body 504. It is provided with a front end cover 506 that is arranged and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the rear 504 of the handle body in cooperation with the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with the 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. It is equipped with a rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is viewed clockwise from the front view via the transmission gear 511. For the auxiliary spring 514 to be urged, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the launch stop switch 518 attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate the launch stop switch 518, one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is placed in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). It is provided with a handle return spring 522 that is urged to return to the rotation end in the direction of the above.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a form having a rear end portion that is cylindrically extended rearward from a front end portion that is open on the front side and bulges rearward. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape of the above. The three grooves 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. By being locked, one end side is urged by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so that the handle body 504 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view seen from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductivity, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is driven. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the launch solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 161) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotary drive can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before operating the single-shot button 520. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the firing control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are doord like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so as to cooperate with each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the malfunction of the game ball.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a cover base communicating with the first ball entrance. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side in the front view toward the front end of the 542, and the second ball entrance 542c that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. Inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the second ball passage 542d, it is provided with a second ball entrance 542c that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c have the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage 542d by communicating with the foul ball entrance 542e, which is arranged in the upper center in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball entrance 542e. It is equipped with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing actuating piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b, which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544a to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 767 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c to pass through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball exit. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310 g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball launched by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 but becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the swing member 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. It is equipped with 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state by a spring 552. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of game balls.

In this example, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball is further discharged from the prize ball unit 700, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, at the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game balls are circulated to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770 It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 to resist the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the rocking member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. The person is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is not detected, and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. FIG. 54 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case. Further, FIG. 57A is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, FIG. 57B is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 57C is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied. The upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover having a ball feeding port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball launching device 650. With a ball pulling member 583 having a partition portion 583a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are fed one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 is provided with a ball feed member 584 and a ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. Have been placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 583 on the left side of the ball pulling port 581b when viewed from the front. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584 by partitioning the space between the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b below the entrance 581a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction around the axis. A rotating rod portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d projecting from the partition portion 583a to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. The plate unit 300 comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped cutoff portion 584a and a cutoff portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 583a of the entrance 581a and the ball removal member 583. It is provided with a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis core side, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feed member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the supply position in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 from the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feed solenoid 585, and a ball feed operating rod 586 which moves back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in a direction and rotates a ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. It is provided with a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in the above.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down in the vertical direction to transmit the ball feed member. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives one. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is adapted to be subjected to a moment such that it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the weight portion 583c. The rotation of the working rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by abutting with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, by moving the operating rod 583c downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the 381a and the ball ejection port 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball ejection port 381b to the ball ejection flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the dish unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be moved. The partition portion 583a can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner when the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is viewed from the rear. At the same time, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with an overall outer diameter in the rear view, and is on the opposite side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending to the base end side (right side side) of the above as a boundary. A V formed between the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 (rearward) so as to be away from each other. It includes a character-shaped cut portion 588d, and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 has a cut portion 588d by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed like this.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become like. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. The portion corresponding to the formed portion penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is transferred to the game area of the game board 4 by the hitting ball launching device 650. When the ball is driven into the 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the ball launcher 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in front view, and is between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempts to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting at the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move in the upper left direction (upper right direction in the rear view). Then, in order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the back view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view) at the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. In this state, friction and shearing force act on the cut portion 588d to cut the wire rod Iw (see FIG. 57 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is attenuated by the friction acting on the wire Iw, the force is attenuated between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 without invading the game area 1100. It will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent game ball I with the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged. Even if the illegal game ball I invades the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588 as described above, so that the fraudulent act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it can be prevented from invading the inside, it is possible to prevent cheating.

As described above, according to this example, after storing the game balls in the upper plate 301 and supplying the game balls to the ball feed unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hit ball launching device 650 by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball feed launcher 650, so that the game window 101 of the door frame 5 The game will be played in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized via the door frame base unit 100, and the player can be entertained. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 equipped with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the ball launching device 650 are possible. The number of game balls remaining on the ball feed member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are ejected by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 provided with the ball pulling member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game ball in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the inside of the upper plate 301 from becoming full with the game ball at an early stage by the operation. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and the plate unit 300 can be miniaturized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game can be relatively played. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to make the pachinko machine 1 that attracts the player's attention strongly.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball feeding member 583, the ball feeding member can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately by simply attaching the ball feeding unit 580. The 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and problems occur in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the one in which the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side. It is not necessary to configure the transmission mechanism (upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pulling button 341 to the ball pulling member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (as compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened. By shutting off the precision ball removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed early and malfunction or be damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. can be avoided. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be ejected from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the ejection of the game ball from the plate, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

Further, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition portion 583a as much as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed. The unit 580 can be miniaturized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably exert the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member) can be relaxed. The durability of 583) can be increased. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, it can be made difficult to repel, and the game ball can be repelled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the countersunk ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as described above. It is possible to play the action effect of.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b communicate with each other by its own weight, if a problem occurs in the partition portion 583a or the upper plate ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition portion 583a is rotated. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the gaming medium in the storage dish is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being able to do so, it is possible to make the player aware that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is interesting to move it to the pachinko machine 1 without a problem. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating rod portion 583b in the ball removing member 583, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent and the rotating rod portion is bent. By dispersing by 583b or by absorbing by bending of the rotating rod portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly under the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the left and right of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged. The movement in the direction can be minimized, the passage of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 is improved, and the game ball can be discharged satisfactorily. Further, since the ball ejection port 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a, the ejection path of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can be used as an ejection mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cut portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. By pulling the wire Iw quickly (strongly) with respect to the above, the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the momentum of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent the wire Iw from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts by the fraudulent game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 provided with the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The rear-bent upper piece 588b can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 injures the operator during assembly or the like. It can be prevented from being injured.

Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent rearward across the dividing wire 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. As a result, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. It can be suppressed from increasing.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, and is an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It comprises a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a arranged in the upper parts on both the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement piece extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a piece 592b.

The glass unit 590 engages the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to engage from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on the door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the morphological decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. On the right side of the front view of the lower plate 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. The handle device 500 is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, upper side of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged in such a manner.

The appearance of the door frame 5 on both sides of the game window 101 is significantly different, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side has a metallic sharp and artificial appearance due to the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 that can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240. It has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 has a different amount of protrusion to the front between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, which can give a different impression depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become like. That is, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the illusion of a different model of the pachinko machine can be obtained. It is possible to increase the appealing power to the pachinko machine 1 and make it a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island equipment feels flat and solid. The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different forms are arranged alternately to give a rhythmic impression and give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, etc., so that the game window 101 emits light. It is possible to decorate the door with any light emitting color so as to surround it. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254b, 256 can be turned on and off to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration in the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in a door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the window can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and have a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decorative unit 240 is formed. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the above is formed by one smooth and loosely curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214,216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radial lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is said to be an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from the light emitting LEDs 210a, 210b and the like toward the player side by the substrate, the side lens 210 and 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission brighter.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 is connected between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the left-right center side of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper center lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper center lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. It is provided with four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side of the front view is covered with the upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. The extension frame lens portion 282c in the above and the upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288 are provided. On the upper center decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually illuminated and decorated. Further, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be light-emitting and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper center decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, which is continuous with the appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In this plate unit 300, the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate front decorative member 316 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322. The right decorative member 319 on the upper plate, which decorates the right portion and the outer periphery of the front side of the upper plate ball removal button 341, can be light-emittingly decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged outside the first annular group 102 (within the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101. It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decoration. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated in a radial manner, and the ring is formed by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make the luminescent decoration so as to divide it in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is designated as a notification group 105, and the LED 214c is appropriately emitted to emit light for a game. Various information can be notified to a person, an employee of a game hall in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is said that the upper center group 106 is used to illuminate and decorate the upper center of the lens. By appropriately causing the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106 to emit light, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration that becomes a point. Further, the LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits light and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately causing the LED 290a of the upper center side group 107 to emit light, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged under the game window 101 causes the upper plate 301 to emit light and decorate. It is said to be a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 control the operation unit 400. It is said to be an operation unit group 109 for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be set. It is possible to inform the player.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a provided in the door frame 5 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204, 246 (radiant lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear and left-right directions. Further, in the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 sandwiched between the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which the 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further equipped with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, it is tripled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 288a and 430b are considered to be high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in the actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As the light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitting light with the same color or a similar color), the light is spread outward around the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential emission of the same color or similar colors). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is emitted to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LED provided in the game board 4 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. The LED of the second ring group 103, which is located outside the area, makes it possible to produce a more expressive light emission, which can attract the attention of the player and entertain the player. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, by appropriately emitting light from each system 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j, the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light moves toward the central lens 284, or the light moves along the outer circumference of the game window 101 from the upper central lens 284. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect is produced in which light is emitted radially around the game window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the game window 101 emit light almost uniformly, the radial group 104 emits light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by causing each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

Further, by making the upper center group 106 and the upper center side group 105 emit light, a chance has arrived for the player and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a probabilistic time-saving gaming state). , Etc.) can be suggested.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for decorating the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by causing light to be emitted in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation can be performed. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, the groups 102, 103, 106, 108, respectively. It is possible to produce light emission with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce rich light emission.

[1-3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. A hitting ball launching device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame and paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball unit 700 for the purpose, the flow of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 is blocked. It is equipped with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A lock device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and for opening and closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and for opening and closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned face down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be easily placed. Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part, and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front surface to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It comprises an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 is provided with a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left end portions of the upper and lower left ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602) to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and has a game board mounting portion 606 on which the game board 4 is mounted and a game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulating ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has a metal fitting mounting for mounting the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in the front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are mounted with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the front view of the fitting groove 612 are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step to the rear side from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604. A hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. In a state where the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, the left side of the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660 in the ball launching device 650, to the left and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate the lower rear wall portion 604 in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left and right center of the lower rear wall portion 604, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixing tool support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixing tool 690 for fixing the game board 4 detachably near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 on the upper side of the opening 614. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotation position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a extending in a fan shape around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the fixing piece 690a. It is provided with an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. The fixing piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting with the stopper 617, the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are lined up in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 in the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 that hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward in the above direction and allows the game ball to be distributed. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later. It is now in circulation.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the rear view, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 that rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 and diagonally upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 is appropriately positioned with mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, and the like. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted is inserted, and the front extension portion 632 hangs downward from the left end portion of the front view and rotates to the open side of the door frame 5. It is equipped with a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the edges. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. It is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion of the front view of the 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion 642a, a forward extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

In the lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state where the front extension portion 644b is separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are provided. The door is positioned coaxially with the metal fitting 642c, and the door is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Slide the door frame downward once so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap vertically, and then slide the shaft pin 155 upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hit ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feed unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. be.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, the launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. The movement trajectory of the launching solenoid 654, the hammering mallet 656 fixed rotatably to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet tip 658 fixed to the tip of the ball hammer 656, and the mallet tip 658. The tip of the hammer 656 is between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, which extends diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that the 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is equipped with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the hitting mallet 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a solenoid portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a mallet tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a sandwiched between them and can come into contact with the stopper 664. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is recessed in a V shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surface of the stoppers 664 and 668 is covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, when the hit ball launcher 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the rail 1111 and the lower end. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660, thereby driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. By turning (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. It is to be paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 receives and stores the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and the game balls attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and supplied from the island facility side. The tank rail unit 730, which is arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stores the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720, is aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 are paid out. The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the game ball. Is mainly provided with a full tank branch unit 770 capable of inducing branching to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a ground fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. It includes a 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. And is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear wall. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to pass through the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b in the front-rear direction, and the back. It is provided with a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is appropriately positioned with mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting the prize ball base 600 on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper part, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721, the outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721, and only the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side and opens downward from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. A prize ball tank formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both ends on the front side of the outer peripheral wall 722, the eaves portion 724 extending to the eaves portion 724, the rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall 722. It is provided with a mounting portion 726 for mounting the 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 in the prize ball base 710.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, so that the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and can smooth and align the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is tilted so that it is low. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. It is provided with a plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 74) that project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710.

The end of the tank rail 731 on the right side (open side) of the front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking protrusion 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap between the ball holding plate 734 and the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a fine groove that penetrates up and down so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine groove. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. By inserting it into the ball, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. The 741a, the distribution space 741b which communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined size, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are communicated with each other and bent in an abbreviated shape to form a rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the second gear 746, which meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is equipped with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side of the 747 and has a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 is a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. The counting sensor 751 for measuring the above, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 479 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753, the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 to relay the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

Further, the prize ball device 740 has a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the sensor board 753 from the rear side, and the supply passage ground capable of contacting the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the metal fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. It is equipped with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (on the left side when viewed from the rear) below the position in which the supply passage 741a bulges backward, and is located outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. The switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, the sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and the sensor mounting portion 741f below the prize ball passage 741a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball-cutting switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the gaming ball, the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball-out switch 741e. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball out switch 741e (the ball out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and the player or the hole indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. The ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and the button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 and supporting the attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching / supporting the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage ground fitting 757. Can be done.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and has a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the top of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged under the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed in the recess 748a one by one, and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 479 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball ejection switch 860b is operated. The 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is rotated. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then handed over to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is used. The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770, which will be described later, the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the plate unit 300. At the same time, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape in which the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has flowed through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward and in front of the front end. The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from a position away from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the right side of the rear view toward the front side. ), And a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end portion of the upper part of the rear end in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740. The ball ejection passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received by the ejection port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 778 are discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end of the front view. It is provided with a ball ejection outlet 779 which is opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball is configured to face and communicate with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is connected to the dish unit 300. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper end of the right side of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly under the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is above the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be discharged from the 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 767 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full tank branch unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. ..

As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically uses the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branch unit 770 branches directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, the passage of the game ball discharged at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by the 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be done. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be used for playing. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide gaming area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (first). Even if there is only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage plates without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is changed, the main body frame 3 can be dealt with without changing, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 related to the change of the door frame 5 can be dealt with. It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and provide various pachinko machines 1 at low cost.

Further, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 provided with only one storage plate. Even if it is exchanged for, the game ball discharged from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage plate via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from delivery to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the shortage of game balls for driving, and it is also possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates. ..

Further, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to concentrate the player on the operation of driving the game ball, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball is provided. Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the entrance 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball entrance 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates, the storage plate can be used. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game ball by deepening the storage plate, and the game can be played without causing the player to frequently worry about the storage amount. And it is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 equipped with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with a game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In addition, when only one storage plate is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage plate becomes full with the game ball and the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank outlet 776. Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are placed not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantially game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 which can be increased to a limited number and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of the game balls staying (reserved) in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the actual storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage plates without changing the flow path of the game ball in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the full tank branch unit 770 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At that time, the location of the ball jam can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, the defect can be solved at an early stage, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is transferred to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-shaped open / close shutter 792 that is slidably held in the shutter base 791 in the vertical direction, the open / close crank 793 that slides the open / close shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the open / close shutter 792 that rises via the open / close crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the user.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in front view and rotatably supports the opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing from the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive spring 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive spring 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the shutter base 791 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving the shutter, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game ball from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 767. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the vertical wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89A is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG.

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 mounted on the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 840 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860, the main relay terminal board 880 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side relay. It is equipped with a terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a shape that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged above the position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. The board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view, and the board mounting portion 813 on the left side of the front view in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction. A tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). The rear surface of the upper portion is provided with a box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in front view. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, so that the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 is inverted and the front is reversed. It is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deeper bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening port 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening port 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power board box 830 is detached from above in a housing recess opened upward formed by a box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing portion 844 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. It is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the lower surface. As a result, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b has the accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , The accommodating space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is the heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power supply board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, for each firing power supply board box 830.

Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is performed. By doing so easily, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared to the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. This makes it possible to prevent the electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

Further, since the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the gaming board holding port 601 that holds the gaming board 4, the capacitance is increased in order to change the hitting characteristics. Even if you try to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. By making it difficult to commit fraud, it is possible to suppress fraud that intentionally changes the driving strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the firing power supply board 831. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to prevent a player who is frustrated from developing into fraud such as cheating.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 is removable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is fraudulent, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the fraud is fraudulent. It can be resolved, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to prevent a person's interest in the game from diminishing.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change, etc., the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing it with a firing power supply board 831 equipped with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 that can realize driving characteristics and a DC / DC converter 831a, the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 that has been previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be replaced with a new game. It can be considered to match the board 4. Therefore, since the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 for the island equipment such as the game hall when replacing the launch power supply board 831. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for replacement, and it is possible to replace in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) is removable and replaceable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (payout control board 4110) is replaced. The cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the launch control unit 4120 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. It is possible to eliminate the problem, shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 to be attached and detached. Since it is necessary to remove the gaming board 4, even if a tool for performing fraudulent activity is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the gaming board 4. It is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being cheated, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high defense against cheating.

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the gaming board holding port 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the firing power supply is supported. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the board box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 tends to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the defect can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side from the left and right center in the front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4. The discharge ball receiving portion 841, the discharge passage 842 that guides the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharges the ball, and the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. The front box accommodating portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed toward the front side. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. It is formed and flows through the main body frame base ball ejection passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810, and is the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to the pachinko machine 1 and the game ball that has been discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear lower side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged to.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. It is possible to form a recess.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has a vertical wall portion 850b slightly rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be hooked on the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal from which the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855, so that the connector is routed from the wiring cord 854. It is possible to prevent the terminal 855 from being pressed against the power supply terminal 853, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b to the wiring cord 854. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be done and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction when assembled with each other are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820, and are formed on the board unit base 810. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding to the rear side from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction that disconnects from the 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. It is easy to remove the connector and maintenance such as replacement of the board can be easily performed.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending condition of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the vertical wall portion 850b is located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that the vertical wall portion 850b is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the vertical wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 850b on the power supply board 851, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board box 850 covers the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt that cause problems from adhering to the power supply board 851, and it is mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.), and to enhance the defense against fraudulent activities. It has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from the power supply board 851 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being broken to cause an energization failure, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a problem.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b to connect the wiring cord 854. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction that disconnects the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from each other. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization from occurring.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c projecting rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the vertical wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided on both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, preventing the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and surely achieves the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 is used to bring the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b toward the standing wall portion 850b, it is difficult to remove the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to ensure that the above-mentioned effects are exhibited, and the wiring cord 854 is immediately folded back at the standing wall portion 850b and then immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d. This makes it possible to perform a series of operations continuously, simplifying the work process related to assembly, and suppressing an increase in cost.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It comprises an 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and is provided at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, it cannot be separated unless the separation cutting portion 863 is cut, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

The payout control board box 860 has an error release switch 860a, a ball ejection switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 facing rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. The board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal board cover 873, which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal board 874 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873, and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection connection terminal board cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to the frequency display for displaying the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. Further, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, CR unit 6, etc. installed on the island equipment side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape having an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper portion of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. It is equipped with a locking claw 871c that locks the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer periphery of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall thereof is said to be an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side of the rear view in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged on the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending forward (on the board base 871 side) from 873a and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are held. It is provided with a pair of hook-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It is equipped with a stop claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal board cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of board holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal board 874 can be removably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal board cover 873 has a substrate by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island equipment side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal board 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the rear view of the board base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b forward from both left and right ends. It is provided with an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 so as to be openable and closable by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the board base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective impact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 88, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the above, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side wall 875c exists respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized activity against the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal board cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit mounted as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal board 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871. It is equipped with a striking wall 875c with a length that straddles between them, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the striking wall 875c. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, which makes it difficult to cheat and deters it. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrodes, and can prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are mounted from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a space or the like and the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts against the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The protrusion 871e, the outer piece portion and 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. For example, even if you try to invade an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal board Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided in the CR unit connection terminal board 874 are reliably prevented. It can be a patch panel machine 1 capable of performing.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent activity can be reliably prevented.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873. Since the board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the shaft-supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided, the board is provided. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the parts of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and an illegal tool is inserted, the illegal tool is connected by the impact wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, the board box cover 875 must be opened and then the connection terminal board cover 873 must be opened, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. It is possible to prevent the cover from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to cheat and making it highly deterrent.

Further, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870. It is not possible to insert a needle-shaped electrode from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and the security capability is high. Can be.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and the outer wall portion 873c is extended to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform fraudulent activity, the CR unit connection terminal board 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal board cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal board 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a cannot be cheated on the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such things.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an illegal tool inserted in the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal board 874 etc. replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like have been replaced with illegal ones. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activities, and it is also easier to detect fraudulent activities. can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are in a state of facing the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal board 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the door frame together with the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. The purpose is to relay the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, the front side of the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is covered with the relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 has a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90 (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as viewed from the rear side by disassembling. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed at the upper and lower parts of the left side of the main body 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. A vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 from the rear side and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking port that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted from the rear side into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 to form a main body portion 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 is a fastening member 924 that protrudes to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the engagement piece 908 can be brought into a closed state. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are in a substantially coincident state.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, so that the back cover 900 is not screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the locked guide member 923 of the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b to rotate the fastening member 924, whereby the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the front view of the connection notch 910. It is provided with a 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the front view of the main body 902.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c, the test terminal 4100f, etc. of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 are passed through the connection notch 910. Is designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the back cover 900 is for confirmation. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, it is possible to check the operation, appearance, management status, and the like of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918, which are wide and long in the vertical direction and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction, are provided at a position slightly to the left of the center when viewed from the front. These through holes 918 keep the back cover 900 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the above, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the gaming board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and the rear side of the game board 4 is maintained, etc., while the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3 in a playable manner. Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing it from falling off.

Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from falling off from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been released from the fastening in a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. , It can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is in an inclined state with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a is securely placed in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 freely with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be reliably prevented. The fastening member 924 can be movably held by the guide member 923 by the gap between the two and the elongated hole 923b.

Further, an accommodating recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover 3 of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodating recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of defects. You can do it and make it look good.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion to be screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be fastened by simply pulling it as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove because the back cover 900 cannot be released, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities can be obtained.

Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 and to move the male threaded portion 924 straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the locking port 923 along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900. Since the guide member is elastically locked to the 922, the tip side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is freely attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the heart, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, after further providing a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a at positions different from the back cover engaging holes 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 to fasten only one place, and the work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. It can enhance the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by engaging the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side (rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, simply by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As shown in the figure, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600, and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front end from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the viewing right direction (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with a front component 1110 in the game board 4. The left side portion of the front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 108).

In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character-shaped projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for performing fraudulent acts from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. (See FIG. 108). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a, and the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be well supported. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, assuming that the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the above is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the shaft support side U shape. Since the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 in contact with the door frame 5, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame 3 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, and the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost related to the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from widening even if the door frame 5 is scooped out by a simple tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly scooped out.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the entire security side plate 950 can be further increased, and the security side plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating. ..

Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and at the same time, defects such as a decrease in strength that occurs during processing are found as compared with the case where a metal plate is bent. The number can be reduced as much as possible, and the security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the lock device. Is a rear perspective view showing, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and viewed later, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the lock device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 on the open side, and is as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front right side (open side) side of the front end frame portion 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 is for a U-shaped substrate 1001 as a lock substrate formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is integrated on the substrate molded into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, and the game area can be further increased. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached so that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached. The open side of the substrate 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are attached to the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult to cheat on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and the middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of the open side side surfaces 1001a and 1001b project forward. It is provided with a locking projection 1004 and the like.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the upper vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock mounting portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door and the lock locking hole in the upper part. The lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because the structure is such that the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws while being inserted into 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side protrudes from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b which is close to the main body.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1040. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 94. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end portion of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame one by one. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021 and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is adapted to advance and retreat. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the locking device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. It is projected from the front end toward the side, and the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two places above and below for mounting with the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging project piece 1017 and the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape side hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side thereof is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. The end side is a second engaging protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the mounting holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 does not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, but illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally slide the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined diagonally above the front diagonally upper side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. It swings (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 97 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped substrate 1001 side from the diagonally rear lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Therefore, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And are bored respectively, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be rotatably connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 engages the spring locking hole 1036 with the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door sliding rod 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to the hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces of the vertically long rivet slot 1042 into which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. The lowermost end of the sliding rivet 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending motion of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation between the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and is slid for the door frame by the spring 1048. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 abuts on the inner side surface of the U-shaped substrate 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped substrate 1001. It has become like.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projectile 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotational operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projectile 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotational operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side. The door frame sliding rod 1040 obstructs the escape cutout portion 1049 so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It is equipped with. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame has a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating to the lower side of the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet slot 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to insert the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion and for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A slot 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 located below the rivet slot 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the drop engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the rear vertical side of the lower hook member 1052. It includes a joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging project piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated in the lower hook member 1052, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging in such a way. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging project piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation when the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving door 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in that state. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet slot 1042 and the rivet slot 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 while the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main body frame. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped substrate 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is passed over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the outside of the inclined portion 1024, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock mounting piece 1008 so that the tip portion of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure in the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96 (A). The closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are engaged with each other, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is engaged with the hook cover 165. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging project piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (B). The tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled to the front side to remove the main body frame 3. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 96A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 Since the upper side is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the second engaging project piece 1018 is rotated. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled toward the front side by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 96A), but the door frame is closed. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be done. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 97. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the key is rotated to cause the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise rotation direction shown around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projectile piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging project piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 97 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main body prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the sliding rod 1050 for the frame is opened illegally, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be easily opened manually after opening, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame cannot be performed.

Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. do not have. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are completely covered by being housed in the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041 and 1054, 1065, respectively. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device whose width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The position where the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) inside. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform fraudulent acts such as pulling down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. It is extremely simple because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped substrate 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed into the structure. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped substrate 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and a sliding rod for a door frame 1040 and a sliding rod for a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) and a first side wall 540. It may have a structure for accommodating the 1050, and can have the same effect as the lock device 1000 described above.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (in the front-rear direction) behind the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side and the game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 is paid out. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is substantially the same as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it is provided with a transparent back cover 900 arranged in a plane shape, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of visually recognizing the side surface and easily inspecting (visually inspecting) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. be able to.

Further, since not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be visually recognized. Even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is attached to and detached from the front side to 601, they should be removed from the outside. It can be easily found from, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an illegal device, a tool, or the like for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find a fraudulent device or the like attached to the gaming board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to install an illegal device or the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 may be covered. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is set to a position about twice as deep as the front end of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to form a flat shape. It is possible to facilitate the mounting work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it can be caught or contacted with other members in the island equipment to be installed. It can be prevented to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, it is possible to use a cushioning material having a simple shape when transporting the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) of the pachinko machine. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918 so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 or the like of the back cover 900. , It is possible to prevent the heat from being accumulated from the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the heat from causing instability in the control of the game and the deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are of a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, it is passed through the slit 916 or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the invasion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 107. FIG. 98 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. Further, FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a gaming board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, and is viewed from the front. FIG. 104 is a game in which FIG. 103 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board seen from the rear of FIG. 106. It is an exploded perspective view of.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which the game ball is driven is divided by the player operating the handle device 500, and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls a game content that is performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is equipped with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visually attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and the details will be described later. Further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 116 and the like).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular outer shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction of the front view to the diagonally upper left side of the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutment portion 1114 where the game ball that has been rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the abutment portion 1114, and the boundary portion between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is rotatable only between the closed position extending upward and the open position that rotates in the clockwise direction and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. It includes a backflow prevention member 1116, which is urged by a spring (not shown).

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 launches the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on an extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 or the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hit ball launching device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are used. Rolling downward in the opposite direction, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It will fall, and will be received by the rail ball inlet 542e of the rail cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the rail space 626, and will be discharged to the lower plate 302 in the dish unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball vigorously rolls along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. It is also possible to repel the game ball inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps with the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side when viewed from the front), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The crime prevention post-protrusion piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention post-protrusion piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a straight line, and a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and the upper side is formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the front view. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be engaged with the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, in the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110, with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is viewed from the front. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the game board fixing tool 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view on the lower side of the through hole 1123. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 having a thin shape, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 when viewed from the front and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 has a predetermined fastening band for the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame. By wrapping them around each other and fastening them together, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the board holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and the rear protrusion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting boss 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and a positioning protrusion 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount of recessing from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and opening downward on the lower end side (see FIG. 101). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is cut out so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front constituent member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, and is within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the table unit 2000 is attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110 in the state of being assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Board holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The substrate holder 1160 is formed with an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160 are It is designed to be discharged downward from the out ball discharging unit 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out-ball discharge unit 1161 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving part 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged to the rear lower side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 have their tips inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 for mounting. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion 1163 in which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear surface. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the board holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. It includes a matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the rear view left end portion of the board base 1171 and extends outward from the fixed piece 1174 that fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the rear view right end portion of the board cover 1172. It is provided with an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged vertically at the right end of the rear view, sandwiching the elastic fixing piece 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealed seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealed seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In the main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a sealing seal is affixed straddling the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated. It needs to be peeled off, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts.

Further, in the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 has high security performance. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and is a display unit 1181 that is visibly arranged from the player side on the front surface of the front constituent member 1110 and the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102 (A), the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end portion of the front view. It consists of a game status indicator 1183 consisting of one LED and two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183, and displays the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. The first special symbol lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the first special symbol storage display 1184 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101, is the first special symbol. The first special symbol display 1185, which consists of one 7-segment LED for displaying as, and the first special symbol display 1185, which are arranged diagonally to the upper right, were drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2102. From the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result as the second special symbol, and the two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186. It is provided with a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186, and holds the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate portion 2105 by the game ball. The normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for display and the normal symbol lottery result drawn by the game ball placed under the normal symbol storage display and passing through the gate 2105 are displayed as normal symbols. The normal symbol display 1189, which consists of one LED, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side on the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", a big prize opening. It is provided with a round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of 2103.

The game status display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange. Depending on the combination, various gaming states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, probability variation time saving state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

Further, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2101. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holdings is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holdings is three, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b both light when the number of holdings is four. It is designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting port 2102. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holdings is two, the second special symbol storage indicator lamp 1187a, When 1187b is lit together and the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. Both are designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first is based on the emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The result of the special lottery and the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color and lighting / blinking. Therefore, it is possible to display the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2105. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is varied for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of held (stored) ordinary symbols (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a are arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of ordinary symbols are reserved (memorized).

Further, the round display 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp is lit to make a round in a "big hit" game. The number can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, and the normal symbol storage of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the functional display board 1191 (see FIG. 162). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4, which is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1, is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to exert the same effects as described above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured to consist of eight LED groups. Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed by the function display unit 1180, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, and the movement of the game ball, It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by devoting yourself to movable production and production images.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from that of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front components 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is made of synthetic resin plates such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, and glass and metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the table unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and composed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It is equipped with. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side thereof. The engaging step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214, the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later, with respect to the openings 1215. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 115 and the like).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the above-mentioned game panel 1150 made of a wooden board (in this example, about the same thickness). It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a size of 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100 and is front and rear. It mainly has a through port 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward it and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, the plate holder 1220 is configured to extend by a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the mounting boss of the front component member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protrudes rearward, and the recessed amount (the recessed amount). Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 155, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be mounted on the main body frame 3. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion projecting forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having an inner diameter of a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in a predetermined range from the lower end of the front end of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height on the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, and are within the range. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface thereof is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device 650. However, it is designed to be guided smoothly. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the figure, by forming the lightening portion 1230, the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, there is an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a horizontally long penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. A ball passage notch 1223 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It is provided with an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front constituent member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224, the engaging piece 1225, and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged with each other. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the game panel 1200 of this example, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. At the same time, the table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure consisting of a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 to be mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of the front component]
Next, the front component 1110A having a form different from that of the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. In the game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. 103 to 105. The configuration is the same as that of the examples of FIGS. 103 to 105 except that the configuration is the same as that of FIGS. 103 to 105, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the above front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different, and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the front component 1110, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided on either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). Prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending clockwise from the out port guide surface 1115 to the abutment portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed to be the same as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the abutment portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, the area from the abutment portion 1114 to directly above the certificate stamp affixing portion 1125 on the right side arranged directly under the abuttal portion 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a straight line inclined so as to be lowered toward the out port guide surface 1115.

In the front component 1110A of this example, the game area 1100 can be secured wider than the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the wide game area 1100 can further entertain the player. You can do it.

In the examples of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 100 and 100 are shown on the rear side of the front component member 1110A. A game panel 1150 made of a single plate as shown in 101 may be attached.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is housed.

First, as shown in FIG. 108, the security structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. It is composed of a metal security side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, an aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. The side surface security plate 950 has a plate-shaped side surface piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form the side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) substantially at right angles from the front end of the side surface piece 952a. A middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the piece 952b and the front end piece 952b, and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It has been increased so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be well supported.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (shaft support side). In the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft branch portion 156 and the lower shaft branch portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is increased through the gap. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952a is supported by the shaft. It is in a state of being sandwiched between side U-shaped protrusions 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side from moving away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out, and the main body frame can be prevented from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the third.

Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame 3 are increased, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an illegal tool, so that the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if is destroyed, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot be penetrated into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and the illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side frame plate 12 so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It has become possible to fully counter the vandalism of. Further, in general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side. From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the side piece 952c from the rear end, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be used as the game board 4. It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed. In addition, since it is possible to easily find an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the illegal device, and it is possible to enhance the deterrence against fraudulent acts. ing.

Further, since the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to / from 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally right front, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the rear. It is a figure.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated by a player operating the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A that partitions the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a frame-shaped front component 1110A that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A so as to close the game area 1100 and has a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100. It comprises a plate-shaped gaming panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 114 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100.

The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of wooden plywood such as plywood.

Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back unit 3000 from the player side to the rear side. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visually attached and can display a predetermined effect image, a board holder 1160 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a rear surface of the board holder 1160. The main control board box 1170, which is attached to the main control board box 1170, is provided.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is an attacker unit 2100 arranged so as to extend from directly above the out port 1151 to the right in front view at the lower part in the game area 1100, and a pachinko machine in front of the right end of the attacker unit 2100. A function display unit 1180 that is attached to a position that can be visually recognized from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to 1, and a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status, etc., and the inner circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. It is provided with a front side unit 2200 arranged along the above, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and an opening 3010b is formed in the rear wall 3010a so that the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The back box 3010, the back horizontal effect unit 3100 arranged on the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back upper effect unit 3300 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. It is provided with a backside effect unit 3500 arranged below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 161) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described in detail later, is housed. It includes a box 1910 and an inverter board box 1920 that houses an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold-cathode tube as a backlight.

In the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 1100 is divided into left and right by the center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1150, and the game is played with the outer circumference on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The area between the inner circumference of the area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A) is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the inside of the game area 1100. It is considered to be a wide area where the game ball can sufficiently flow between the circumference (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A), and the game panel 1150 is located in the left and lower regions of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the.

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (driving with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined value), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the outer periphery of the right side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down to the guide passage member 2142, is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142, and is discharged from directly above the gate portion 2105 to the lower side, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability. There is. That is, the game ball can be easily entered into the gate portion 2105 by performing a so-called right-handed strike.

Further, although details will be described later, in this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the normal lottery result is drawn and executed in an extremely short time. Therefore, if the normal lottery result is "hit", the movable piece 2106 retracts and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2102, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 goes to the second starting port 2102. It is designed to win a prize. When the normal lottery is "missing", the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the large winning opening 2103. Therefore, by hitting right, it is possible to directly aim at the second starting opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103.

On the other hand, when the game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called left-handed), the game ball is guided toward the front side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of planted obstacle nails. It is possible to win a game ball through the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning opening 2104, and the like. Further, when the game ball is guided to the warp entrance 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500 and the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. The game ball supplied to the 2510 rolls left and right on the stage 2510, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement caused by the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When it is released, it is possible to win a prize in the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with a high probability.

As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, it is possible to play games with different impressions on the right side and the left side of the center accessory 2500, and it is possible to provide various games and make it hard to get bored. Can be done.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged so as to extend from directly above the out port 1151 to the right side at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100, and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1150. The attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100. The function display unit 1180 attached to the front of the right end of the front view, the front side unit 2200 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and the substantially central portion of the game area 1100. It is equipped with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is arranged on the right side of the game area and is supported by the game panel 1150.

The attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail later, but the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2101 and the second, in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by accepting the game balls and a predetermined special lottery result is drawn by the acceptance. The starting port 2102, the large winning opening 2103 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the special lottery and pays out a predetermined number of game balls by accepting the game balls, and the predetermined number of game balls by accepting the game balls. It is provided with a general winning opening 2104 to be paid out, and a gate portion 2105 in which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn when the game ball passes through.

The first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of this example are always capable of accepting game balls. Further, the second starting port 2102 and the large winning opening 2103 are variable winning openings that can change between a state in which the game ball can be accepted and a state in which the game ball cannot be accepted. The second starting port 2102 can be accepted according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, and the large winning opening 2103 is the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102. It is possible to accept according to the result of the special lottery that is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to.

The first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 of this example is arranged directly below the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 and on the axis (immediately above the out port 1151) passing through the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. Further, the second starting port 2102 is arranged on the lower right side of the front view with respect to the first starting port 2101. Further, the large winning opening 2103 is arranged below the second starting opening 2102 and on the right side of the front view from the first starting opening 2101 so that the left end is substantially directly below the second starting opening 2102. Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is arranged on the upper right side of the front view with respect to the first starting opening 2101. Further, the gate portion 2105 is arranged on the upper right side of the front view of the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and directly above the second starting opening 2102.

Although the details of the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described later, the three general winning openings 2201 arranged on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100 and the game are arranged on the upper left side of the front view of the general winning opening 2201. It is provided with a shelf portion 2202 capable of guiding a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 1100 to the right.

Further, although the details of the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described later, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side of the center accessory 2500 attached to the large opening 1158 formed in the substantially center of the game panel 1150 and the like. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. The center accessory 2500 includes a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502a that abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a peripheral wall portion 2503 that prevents the game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 from entering the frame. The warp inlet 2504 that opens at a predetermined position on the peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 are rolled in the left-right direction. It is provided with a stage 2510, which is later discharged into the game area 1100 and recirculated.

The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and there is a high probability that the game ball that is reflux-released from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510 into the game area 1100. It is designed to be accepted into the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 130. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each of the main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each of the main members and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 130 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit cut out.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150, and then is inserted into the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be accepted. Specifically, the first starting port 2101 arranged directly above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1150 and capable of constantly accepting the game ball, and the position on the right side and slightly lower side of the front view with respect to the first starting port 2101. The second starting port 2102 (see FIG. 130) arranged in, the large winning opening 2103 located below the second starting port 2102 and on the right side of the front view of the first starting port 2101, and the first starting port 2101. It is provided with a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly above the first starting opening 2101 between the second starting opening 2102 and the second starting opening 2102.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 includes a gate portion 2105 in which a normal lottery result is drawn by the passage of a game ball. The gate portion 2105 is arranged on the right side and slightly above the front view of the general winning opening 2104, substantially directly above the second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130).

As shown in the figure, the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where the game ball can be received at all times. Further, the second starting port 2102 has a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball and is opened upward, and a plate-shaped movable piece 2106 that can move forward and backward with respect to the opened opening is provided. I have. The second starting port 2102 is designed to be unable to accept the game ball when the movable piece 2106 moves forward, and to accept the game ball when the movable piece 2106 moves backward, and is regarded as a so-called variable winning opening. There is.

In addition, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the left-right direction of the front view is 4 to 6 times longer than the diameter of the game ball and the vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball, and faces forward. It is provided with a plate-shaped opening / closing member 2107 that can be opened / closed and the opened opening can be opened / closed. In this large winning opening 2103, the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the opening / closing member 2107 is in a substantially vertical state, it becomes impossible to accept the game ball, and the opening / closing member 2107 is substantially horizontal. When it is in a state, it is possible to accept a game ball, which is a so-called variable winning opening.

Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the gaming ball, like the first starting opening 2101, and is in a state where the gaming ball can be always accepted. ing. Further, the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed so that the game ball can be distributed in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball.

More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment has a first unit 2110 having a first starting port 2101 and a large winning opening 2103, and a second starting port 2102 and a gate portion 2105. Two units 2120, a third unit 2130 having a general winning opening 2104, a fourth unit 2140 to which a function display unit 1180 is attached, a first unit 2110, a second unit 2120, a third unit 2130, and a fourth unit. The unit base 2150 that supports the 2140 from the rear side, the attacker solenoid 2113 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2150, the start port solenoid 2124, the count sensor 2114, and the connection between the second start port sensor 2125 and the panel relay board 3025. It is equipped with an attacker unit relay board 2160 for relaying.

The first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plate-shaped first base 2111 and a first base 2111 which have a first starting port 2101 and an opening 2111a facing the big winning opening 2103 and are attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. A box-shaped first that is attached to the rear side of the first base 2111 so that the large winning opening 2103 faces from the opening, has the large winning opening 2103, and rotatably supports the opening / closing member 2107 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2103. The case 2112, the attacker solenoid 2113 supported in the first case 2112 to open and close the opening / closing member 2107, and the count sensor 2114 supporting the game ball supported in the first case 2112 and received in the large winning opening 2103. A large winning opening decorative board 2115, which is arranged on the rear side of the first case 2112 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, is provided.

Further, the first unit 2110 is arranged on the front side of the middle object detection sensor 2116 mounted on the lower side of the first starting port 2101 on the front side of the first base 2111 and on the front side of the middle object detection sensor 2116 and on the front surface of the first base 2111. A medium guide decorative member 2117 that was attached and had a predetermined decoration, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side at positions corresponding to the medium object detection sensor 2116 and the medium guide decorative member 2117 on the rear side of the first base 2111. It is equipped with a decorative substrate 2118 in the attacker. The first unit 2110 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150 via the first base 2111.

The first base 2111 of the first unit 2110 is integrally formed with a first starting port 2101 that protrudes forward (inside the game area 1100) from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and is open upward and rearward, and the rear end thereof is formed. When attached to the game panel 1150, it extends to a position that substantially coincides with the rear surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 can be guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The first case 2112 of the first unit 2110 has a box shape with the front side open, and is divided into upper and lower cases by an upper case 2112a and a lower case 2122b. Further, the first case 2112 is provided with a discharge port member 2112c which is received inside the large winning opening 2103 and discharges a game ball detected by the count sensor 2114 downward from a predetermined position. The first case 2112 is made of a translucent material, and guides the light from the large winning opening decorative substrate 2115 arranged on the rear side to the opening / closing member 2107 side to open / close the inside of the large winning opening 2103. The member 2107 can be decorated with light emission.

Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 of the first unit 2110 is supported by the first case 2112 so that the plunger moves back and forth in the left-right direction. The attacker solenoid 2113 is capable of rotating the opening / closing member 2107 by a link member 2113a connected to the tip of a plunger that moves forward and backward by energization. Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 is provided with a spring that urges the plunger to move forward (protruding), and the opening / closing member 2107 closes the large winning opening 2103 while the plunger is moved forward. It is designed to be a position. That is, in this example, when the attacker solenoid 2113 is energized, the plunger retracts (immerses) and the opening / closing member 2107 rotates from the closed position to the open position so that the game ball can be accepted into the large winning opening 2103. It has become.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the medium object detection sensor 2116 of the first unit 2110 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front of the sensor. ing. In this example, the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the medium object detection sensor 2116 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and move in the vertical direction on the front surface of the medium object detection sensor 2116 rather than an object moving in the left-right direction. It is easier to detect an object that does.

The middle guide decorative member 2117 of the first unit 2110 is decorated with a downward arrow arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward behind the front surface decoration. It is provided with a light-shielding member 2117a having a tubular frame shape. As a result, the inside and outside of the arrow can be luminescently decorated in different ways by the attacker middle decoration substrate 2118 arranged on the rear side of the middle guidance decorative member 2117.

The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the plate-shaped second base 2121 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and the front surface of the game panel 1150 attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 (inside the game area 1100). A passage forming member 2122 that protrudes to form the second starting port 2102 and the gate portion 2105, and a movable piece 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the second base 2121 and opens and closes the second starting port 2102 are slidably supported in the front-rear direction. A second case 2123 and a start port solenoid 2124 supported in the second case 2123 to open and close the movable piece 2106 are provided.

Further, the second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 has a second starting port sensor 2125 that is supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 and detects a game ball received in the second starting port 2102, and a second base. A gate sensor 2126 that is supported by 2121 and the second case 2123 and detects a game ball passing through the gate portion 2105, and a second start that is arranged behind the second base 2121 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It comprises a mouth decorative substrate 2127 and a light-shielding member 2128 arranged between the second starting port decorative substrate 2127 and the second base 2121 and having a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 constitutes a part of the function display board 1191 on which the ordinary symbol display 1189 composed of two LEDs is mounted on the front surface at a predetermined position on the front surface of the second base 2121. A normal symbol display board 1191a is attached.

In the second base 2121 of the second unit 2120, substantially the entire front surface is formed in a flat surface shape along the surface of the game panel 1150, and the game ball can be distributed to the front side in cooperation with the passage forming member 2122. It is possible to form a simple passage. Further, the second base 2121 is provided with a passage hole 2121a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the game ball can pass in the lower left corner of the front view, and a recess 2121b recessed rearward in the vicinity of the upper right corner of the front view. .. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the second base 2121 has an opening through which a plate-shaped movable piece 2106 can pass, a sensor support portion 2121b for supporting the second start port sensor 2125 and the gate sensor 2126, and ordinary. It is provided with a substrate support portion 2121d that supports the symbol display substrate 1191a, a wall portion 2121e that extends forward from the front right end of the substrate support portion 2121d and covers the right side of the ordinary symbol display 1189. The second base 2121 is made of a translucent material. Further, the second base 2121 is designed to be attached to the unit base 2150.

As shown in the figure, the passage forming member 2122 of the second unit 2120 is formed in an anti-L shape having a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending in the left direction from the lower end thereof. Has been done. The passage forming member 2122 is provided with a first passage 2122a in which the game ball can be distributed in the vertical direction and the upper end and the lower end are opened at the position of the portion extending in the vertical direction in the front view. Further, the passage forming member 2122 allows the game ball to flow in the left-right direction at a position extending in the left-right direction in the front view, and opens upward at a position where the right end side substantially faces the lower end opening of the first passage 2122a. It is provided with a second passage 2122b whose left end side is closed. The first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Further, the passage forming member 2122 is a plate-shaped wall portion 2122c connecting the lower end of the right side wall of the front view in the first passage 2122a and the right end of the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b, and the first on the upper end side of the wall portion 2122c. A right discharge port 2122d that opens on the right side surface of the front view of the passage 2122a and allows a game ball to pass through, and a right shelf portion 2122e that extends shortly from the lower end of the right discharge port 2122d toward the right side of the front view. The wall portion 2122c is formed by the lower left end of the front view of the first passage 2122a and the upper end of the second passage 2122b on the opposite side of the first passage 2122a, and the left discharge portion 2122f through which the game ball can pass and the left discharge portion. The height at which the left shelf portion 2122g, which is continuous with the lower end of the 2122f and is formed on the upper side of the second passage 2122b and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left in the front view, and the right discharge port 2122d in the first passage 2122a are formed. It is equipped with a guide wall 2122h, which protrudes rearward from the front wall at the position.

In the passage forming member 2122, the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a is the gate portion 2105, and the right end opening of the second passage 2122b is the second starting port 2102. Further, the passage forming member 2122 can support the gate sensor 2126 at a position above the right discharge port 2122d at substantially the center of the first passage 2122a in the vertical direction, and flows through the first passage 2122a. The game ball being played can be detected by the gate sensor 2126.

Further, the passage forming member 2122 is formed at a position where the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b corresponds to a movable piece 2106 that moves forward and backward from the front surface of the second base 2121 in a state of being assembled as the second unit 2120. The opening on the right end side is the second starting port 2102. Further, the passage forming member 2122 can support the second starting port sensor 2125 at a position substantially center in the left-right direction of the second passage 2122b, and circulates in the second passage 2122b (that is,). The game ball (which has passed through the second starting port 2102) can be detected by the second starting port sensor 2125.

Further, the passage forming member 2122 can cover the front side of the ordinary symbol display board 1191a attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 at a portion below the right shelf portion 2122e.

In the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122, the bottom wall located directly below the right end side opening in the front view is formed in an arc shape, and the game ball passing through the right end side opening (second starting port 2102) is smoothly formed. It can be distributed to the left. The guide wall 2122h formed in the first passage 2122a of the passage forming member 2122 is arranged at a position corresponding to the recess 2121b in the second base 2121 and is inclined in an arc shape so as to be lowered toward the rear. The game ball that has passed through the upper end opening (gate portion 2105) of the first passage 2122a can be smoothly guided into the recess 2121b of the second base 2121.

The second case 2123 of the second unit 2120 has a box shape with the front side open, and can be divided into upper and lower cases by the upper case 2123a and the lower case 2123b. The movable piece 2106 can be slidably supported in the anteroposterior direction. Further, in the second case 2123, in addition to the movable piece 2106 and the starting port solenoid 2124, a link member 2129 that transmits the movement of the plunger that advances and retreats in the vertical direction of the starting port solenoid 2124 to advance and retreat the movable piece 2106 in the front-rear direction is provided. , Supporting inside.

The start port solenoid 2124 of the second unit 2120 is supported by the second case 2123 so that the plunger moves forward and backward, and the plunger is in a state of protruding downward in a normal state (when not energized). In this normal state, the movable piece 2106 protrudes forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger in the starting port solenoid 2124, and reaches the second starting port 2102. The acceptance of the game ball is blocked. On the other hand, when the starting port solenoid 2124 is energized, the tip of the plunger rises so as to be immersed, and the movable piece 2106 is moved rearward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger. It will be retracted, and it will be possible to accept the game ball to the second starting port 2102.

The second unit 2120 is provided with a plurality of rectangular openings 2128a arranged in a row in the light-shielding member 2128 in the left-right direction, and each opening 2128a of the light-shielding member 2128 is provided on the front surface of the second starting port decorative substrate 2127. An LED is mounted so as to correspond to the light emission decoration for each opening 2128a.

When the game ball enters the first passage 2122a from the upper end opening (gate portion 2105), the second unit 2120 passes through the gate sensor 2126 and is recessed in the second base 2121 by the guide wall 2122h inclined backward. After being once sent into the 2121b, it returns from the recess 2121b into the first passage 2122a and flows down onto the second starting port 2102. In the first passage 2122a, the guide wall 2122h and the recess 2121b meander the game ball, and the flow speed of the game ball is attenuated to reduce the flow speed of the game ball, and the movable piece 2106 or the second passage arranged on the downstream side. It is possible to reduce the impact applied when it comes into contact with 2122a.

In this example, the passage of the gate portion 2105 is detected by the gate sensor 2126, and when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is performed and a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn. .. If the result of this lottery is a hit, the movable piece 2106 is retracted from the front surface of the second base 2121 by the drive of the start port solenoid 2124, the second start port 2102 is opened, and the game ball can be accepted. The game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a enters the second passage 2122b through the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball that has entered the second passage 2122b is circulated to the left in the front view by the arc-shaped bottom wall, and after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2125, is rearward from the left end portion of the second passage 2122b. It is discharged (discharged) to the rear side (rear side of the game panel 1150) of the second unit 2120 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the side. In this example, the time from when the gate sensor 2126 detects the passage of the game ball until the movable piece 2106 is slid by the drive of the start port solenoid 2124 until the game ball can be received by the second start port 2102. , For a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds to 1 second), and if the normal lottery result is a hit, the game ball that triggered the lottery is accepted into the second starting port 2102 with an extremely high probability. It has become like. Further, the start port solenoid 2124 is driven only for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds) for each hit, and when the predetermined time elapses, the start port solenoid 2124 is driven. When the drive is completed, the movable piece 2106 slides forward, and the second starting port 2102 is in a closed state.

On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is lost, the start port solenoid 2124 is not driven and the movable piece 2106 remains advanced forward, and the game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a is the movable piece 2106. This will prevent entry into the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball whose acceptance to the second starting port 2102 is blocked by the movable piece 2106 circulates from the left discharge port 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the left shelf portion 2122g, and is left. It is designed to be discharged from the left end of the shelf portion 2122 g (into the gaming area 1100 in front of the gaming panel 1150). The upper surface of the movable piece 2106 is inclined so that the left side of the front is lowered, and even if the game ball tries to stay on the movable piece 2106, the movable piece 2106 naturally rolls to the left in the front view due to the inclination and is left. It is designed to be discharged from the discharge port 2122f to the left shelf portion 2122g.

In the second unit 2120, depending on the state of the game ball flowing through the first passage 2122a, the game ball may be discharged from the right discharge port 2122d in the first passage 2122a, and is discharged from the right discharge port 2122d. The game ball is discharged from the right end of the right shelf portion 2122e into the game area 1100 through the right shelf portion 2122e.

Further, the third unit 2130 of the attacker unit 2100 has a general winning opening 2104 that can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and has a through hole 2131a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the front view of the general winning opening 2104. The third base 2131, the lens member 2132 inserted from the rear side into the through hole of the third base 2131 and attached to the third base 2131 to have translucency, and the lens member 2132 arranged on the rear side. It is equipped with a gate decorative board 2133 on which an LED is mounted on the front surface.

The third base 2131 of the third unit 2130 is integrally formed with a general winning opening 2104 that protrudes forward (inside the game area 1100) from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and is open upward and backward, and the rear end thereof is a game. When attached to the panel 1150, it extends to a position that substantially coincides with the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the third base 2131 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

The gate decoration substrate 2133 of the third unit 2130 is capable of emitting and decorating the inside of the through hole of the third base 2131 by the lens member 2132 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light in an appropriate color. .. The gate decorative substrate 2133 is attached to the unit base 2150.

The fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and the plate-shaped fourth base 2141 to which the function display board 1191 is attached to the lower rear surface, and the game panel attached to the upper front surface of the fourth base 2141. A guide passage member 2142 having a guide passage 2142a that protrudes forward from the front surface of the 1150 (inside the game area 1100) and guides the game ball in the left-right direction, and is arranged below the guide passage 2142a in the guide passage member 2142. The right object detection sensor 2143 attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141 and the right guidance decorative member 2144 attached to the guide passage member 2142 so that the front surface is exposed forward on the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and having a predetermined decoration. And, it is equipped with.

The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 has an F-shaped triangular shape in front view, and the hypotenuse at the left end has an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100. Further, the fourth base 2141 is formed with a plurality of through holes 2141a at the lower part, each of which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 face. The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

The guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 extends along the upper side extending in the left-right direction of the fourth base 2141, and the right end of the front view opens upward and the left end opens downward so that the game ball can flow through the guide passage 2142a. It is equipped with. The guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is closed on the front side and open on the rear side, and the opened rear side is closed by the front surface of the fourth base 2141. Further, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is inclined so that the left side in the front view is lowered.

Further, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is arranged so that the right end of the front view is close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in the assembled state, and flows down along the right inner circumference of the game area 1100. The game ball that has been used is designed to enter the inside through the opening on the right end side. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is bent downward on the left end side in the front view, and the left end side opening opened downward in the state of being assembled as the attacker unit 2100 is the gate portion 2106. It is formed so as to be located directly above (the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120). In the guide passage 2142a and on the front surface corresponding to the guide passage 2142a in the fourth base 2141, ridges extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction, and the game ball is moved in the front-back direction in the guide passage 2142a. It is possible to reduce the distribution speed by meandering to. Further, the left end opening of the guide passage 2142a and the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a are separated from each other by a distance slightly longer than the outer diameter of the game ball.

The right object detection sensor 2143 of the fourth unit 2140 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front of the unit. In this example, the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the right object detection sensor 2143 are arranged in a vertical direction, and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the right object detection sensor 2143 rather than an object moving in the vertical direction. It is easier to detect an object that does. Further, the fourth unit 2140 includes a sensor cover 2145 that covers the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and is attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141.

The right-guided decorative member 2144 of the fourth unit 2140 is decorated with a right-pointing arrow arranged in a circle on the front surface. On the rear side of the right-guided decorative member 2144, there is provided a tubular frame-shaped light-shielding member 2146 in which a wall along the decorative shape of the right-guided decorative member 2144 extends rearward. As a result, the inside and outside of the arrow can be light-emitting decorated in different ways by the back right lower right decorative substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the right guide decorative member 2144.

The unit base 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side open. Further, the unit base 2150 is provided with a discharge port 2150a that receives a game ball that has passed through the passage hole 2121b of the second base 2121 in the second unit 2120 and discharges the game ball from the rear surface of the unit base 2150 to the rear.

In the state where the attacker unit 2100 of this example is arranged in the game area 1100, the first start port 2101 is located substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1151 with the middle guide decorative member 2117 in between. The large winning opening 2103 is located substantially in the center in the left-right direction between the first starting opening 2101 and the inner circumference on the right side of the game area 1100.

In the attacker unit 2100, the first starting port 2101 is located directly above the out port 1151 and directly below the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2500 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. As a result, the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 can be received at the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. The game ball received in the first starting port 2101 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then sent to the middle guidance passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000, which will be described later. There is.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 supports the function display unit 1180 so as to be located on the right side of the front view of the large winning opening 2103, and the right end portion (the right end portion of the function display unit 1180) is inside the right side in the game area 1100. It is located slightly inside (on the left side) from the circumference. As a result, the game ball flowing down from above along the inner circumference on the right side of the game area 1100 falls on the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100, and the guide passage 2142a opened upward on the right end side. It is designed to enter inside. The game ball that has entered the guide passage 2142a is guided to the left in the front view by the guide passage 2142a, and is discharged downward just above the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120, that is, the gate portion 2105. ing. Then, the game ball discharged downward from the left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a enters the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability.

The game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided backward by the guide wall 2122h of the passage forming member 2122 after the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2126 arranged in the first passage 2122a, and the second It enters the recess 2121b of the base 2121. Then, the game ball that has entered the recess 2121b is guided forward at the lower end of the recess 2121b, abuts on the rear surface of the front wall of the passage forming member 2122, and flows downward. That is, in the first passage 2122a of the attacker unit 2100, the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction and flows down.

In this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is immediately performed, and the lottery normal lottery result is instantly displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. If the result of the lottery is a hit, the start port solenoid 2124 is driven to retract the movable piece 2106, and the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2102. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is accepted into the second starting port 2102 with an extremely high probability when a hit is drawn as a result of the normal lottery.

Then, the game ball received in the second starting port 2102 enters the second passage 2122b from the second starting port 2102, is sent to the left in the front view, and is detected by the second starting port sensor 2125. The course is changed backward from the left end of the second passage 2122b, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 and the discharge port 2150a of the unit base 2150. ..

If the result of the normal lottery is lost, the game ball discharged downward from the first passage 2122a abuts on the movable piece 2106 that closes the second starting port 2102, and the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b are contacted. It is discharged from the left discharge port 2122f between the two to the upper left shelf 2122g of the second passage 2122b, and after rolling the left shelf 2122g to the left in the front view, from the left end of the left shelf 2122g into the game area 1100. It is designed to be discharged to the area above the large winning opening 2103 in.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 receives a game ball in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 according to the special lottery result (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit". , Etc.), the attacker solenoid 2113 in the first unit 2110 is driven in a predetermined pattern, and the opening / closing member 2107 is rotated from an upright closed position to a substantially horizontal open position by driving the attacker solenoid 2113. It moves and it is possible to accept the game ball to the large winning opening 2103. Then, the game ball received in the large winning opening 2103 is discharged to the lower side of the attacker unit 2100 after being detected by the count sensor 2114 on the rear side of the game panel 1150.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 arranged between the first starting port 2101 and the gate portion 2105 to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then the back unit described later. It is adapted to be sent into the right guide passage from the upper opening 3061 of the back right guide member 3060 in 3000.

[2-3. Front side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150 and at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction, and is the inner circumference of the game area 1100. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface of the inner rail 1112 when viewed from the front).

As shown in the figure, the front side units 2200 of this example have a front view formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and are arranged substantially along the arc from the right end of the front view to the left. It mainly includes three general winning openings 2201 and a shelf portion 2202 that is arranged on the upper left side of the three general winning openings 2201 and is inclined so that the right end side is lower. The front end side of the three general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the rear end side extends rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and the upper side and the rear side are opened. A game ball is formed so as to be always acceptable in the game area 1100.

The shelf portion 2202 of the front side unit 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the left inner circumference of the game area 1100, and has flowed down the area on the left side of the front view of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. The game ball can be guided to the right.

Further, the front side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-shaped unit base 2210 having three general winning openings 2201, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150. A guide member 2211 having a shelf portion 2202 formed at the upper end thereof, and a left object detection sensor 2212 arranged on the right side of the front view of the guide member 2211 under the right end portion of the shelf portion 2202 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210. , The left guide decorative member 2213 attached to the guide member 2211 so that the front surface is exposed forward on the left side of the left object detection sensor 2212, and the left guide decorative member 2213 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2210 and the front side is opened. It is equipped with a shallow box-shaped and transparent unit cover 2214.

The unit base 2210 of the front side unit 2200 has a plate-shaped portion that abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a frame-shaped portion that extends rearward from the plate-shaped portion and is inserted into the corresponding opening 1158 in the game panel 1150. It is provided with a portion, and can be attached to the game panel 1150 at the plate-shaped portion. The unit base 2210 has a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface and is formed to be partially translucent.

The guide member 2211 of the front side unit 2200 has a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is a shelf portion 2202 which is linearly inclined so that the right side is lowered on the upper side. The guide member 2211 is provided with a circular through hole into which the left guide decorative member 2213 is inserted at substantially the center.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the left object detection sensor 2212 of the front side unit 2200 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front of the sensor 2212. ing. In this example, the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the left object detection sensor 2212 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the left object detection sensor 2212 rather than an object moving in the vertical direction. It is easier to detect an object that does.

The left guide decorative member 2213 of the front side unit 2200 is decorated with a left-pointing arrow arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward behind the front surface decoration. It is provided with a light-shielding member 2213a having a tubular frame shape. The rear end of the light-shielding member 2213a extends to a position slightly in front of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in the attached state. As a result, the inside and outside of the arrow can be light-emitting and decorated in different ways by the LED of the back left lower decorative substrate 3020 in the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the left guide decorative member 2213.

The unit cover 2214 of the front side unit 2200 has an outer shape substantially the same shape as the frame-shaped portion of the unit base 2210, and is formed at a depth in which the rear end is located slightly in front of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in the mounted state. ing. The unit cover 2214 has a through hole through which the light-shielding member 2213a of the left-guided decorative member 2213 can be inserted, and the rear end of the light-shielding member 2213a faces rearward.

The front side unit 2200 of the present embodiment can guide the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 to the right by the shelf portion 2202, and is on the downstream side of the shelf portion 2202. The game balls can be accepted by the three general winning openings 2201 arranged in. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and passes through the left opening 3072 of the back left guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 described later to the left guiding passage. It is supposed to be handed over.

[2-4. Center role]
Subsequently, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 144. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed diagonally from the upper right front, FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed diagonally from the lower left front, and FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. be. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the front right middle effect unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the front right center effect unit of the center accessory as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the table right middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, it is provided with a large window portion 2501 having a frame shape occupying most of the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. ing.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped unit base 2502 having a flange portion 2502a capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel 1150 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501, and a substantially center in the left-right direction that bulges forward from the unit base 2502. As a boundary, it is provided with a peripheral wall portion 2503 that guides the game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame (inside the window portion 2501). The peripheral wall portion 2503 is partially formed by the unit base 2502.

Further, the center accessory 2500 entered the warp entrance 2504 (see FIG. 112) and the warp entrance 2504, which were opened on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and allowed the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter. The warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball into the frame and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 are rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the game area 1100 above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. It is provided with a stage 2510, which is recirculated and arranged on the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and is a transparent plate-shaped partition wall member 2520 that closes the window portion 2501, and on the left side and the lower side of the window portion 2501 in front view, on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503. A unit with a decorative board under the center 2521 arranged and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a decorative board 2522 on the center arranged on the upper side of the window portion 2501 and mounted on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. An upper flange member 2523 attached to the upper left portion of the front view on the rear surface of the base 2502 to form a part of the flange portion 2502a, and a left rear decorative member 2524 attached to the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the unit base 2502 to decorate the inside of the frame. , Is equipped.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the stage 2510, and holds the number of reserved special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, and the gate portion 2105. A hold number display 2530 capable of displaying the hold number of the normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball and a hold number display 2530 are arranged and attached to the front side of the unit base 2502 to form a unit base 2502. It has a center decorative member 2540 that decorates the front surface and a predetermined logo decoration that is arranged on the peripheral wall portion 2503 above the window portion 2501 and is in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and can be luminescently decorated by the decorative substrate 2522 on the center. The front right middle production unit 2600 having the front right production unit 2550, the front right movable decoration body 2610 arranged on the right side of the front view of the window portion 2501 and movable according to the game state (special lottery result), and the front right middle The effect unit 2600 includes a front right outer effect unit 2700 arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the front right movable decorative body 2610 and having a predetermined decoration.

The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is the first stage 2511 in which the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 is supplied and can be rolled in the left-right direction, and the supplied game ball can be released forward from a predetermined position. , A game ball is supplied from the first stage 2511 on the front side of the first stage 2511 and can be rolled in the left-right direction, and the supplied game ball can be discharged from a predetermined position into the front game area 1100. The second stage 2512, the chance entrance 2513 in which the game ball can enter from a predetermined position on the second stage 2512, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2513 are placed in the game area 1100 from a position lower than the second stage 2512. It is equipped with a chance exit 2514 that can be released inward.

The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that both the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is higher. It is formed in a wavy shape. The first stage 2511 is formed in a raised portion in the center of the left-right direction and becomes lower toward the front and widens in the left-right direction. It is provided with a side discharging portion 2511b formed at a portion and becoming lower toward the front and wider in the left-right direction than the central discharging portion 2511a.

In the first stage 2511, the front ends other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b project upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b. .. Further, the first stage 2511 extends to the right so that the right end side of the front view bites into the hold number display 2530 side.

The second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so as to extend in the left-right direction so as to straddle the two side emission portions 2511b in the first stage 2511 and to lower the center in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is slightly higher in the center in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is formed at the central guide portion 2512a, which is formed at the center position in the left-right direction and becomes lower toward the rear and widens in the left-right direction, and at the lowest portions on both the left and right sides of the central guide portion 2512a. It is provided with a side discharge portion 2512b which is lowered toward the front and whose width in the left-right direction is wider than that of the central guide portion 2512a. In the second stage 2512, the front end other than the side discharging portion 2512b protrudes upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the side discharging portion 2512b.

The chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 opens forward to the vertically extending wall-shaped portion formed between the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512, and the central guide portion 2512a in the second stage 2512 a. It is located on the rear side. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 is guided backward by the central guide portion 2512a, it enters the chance entrance 2513.

The chance outlet 2514 in the stage 2510 is formed so as to open forward at a position on the lower side of the center of the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction on the flange portion 2502a. The chance exit 2514 is provided with a pair of ridges extending in the front-rear direction and separated in the left-right direction in a passage communicating with the chance entrance 2513. As a result, the game ball discharged from the chance exit 2514 is guided forward by a pair of ridges, so that the game ball is discharged into the game area 1100 in a state where the swing in the left-right direction is suppressed. There is.

In the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the chance exit 2514 is located directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 in the assembled state, and the game ball is in the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514. When it is released to, it is likely to be accepted by the first starting port 2101.

Further, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely formed of a transparent member, and can be light-emitting decorated by the decorative substrate 2521 under the center. Further, the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are integrally formed by the stage member 2515, and are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502.

Further, the hold number display 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged between the hold number display board 2531 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the hold number display board 2531 arranged in front of the hold number display board 2531. The grid-shaped light-shielding member 2532 for partitioning, the light guide member 2533 which is arranged in each grid of the light-shielding member 2532 and guides the light from the LED of the hold number display board 2531 to the front, and each light guide member 2533 forward. It is provided with a front cover 2534 having a plurality of facing openings and arranged on the front side of the light-shielding member 2532, a front cover 2534, a light-shielding member 2532, and a top surface cover 2535 that covers the upper side of the hold number display board 2531.

As shown in the figure, the upper surface cover 2535 of the hold number indicator 2530 is inclined so that the left end side in the front view is lowered, and the center in the left-right direction is formed in an arc shape protruding upward. The top cover 2535 is arranged between the stage 2510 and the front right middle effect unit 2600 (table right middle movable decorative body 2610), and the game ball deviates from the stage 2510 to the front right middle effect unit 2600 side. However, it can be returned to the stage 2510 side. The top cover 2535 is integrally formed with the unit base 2502.

Although the details of the decoration are omitted in the surface effect unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, the surface decoration member 2551 having a translucent surface with a logo formed in a shallow relief shape in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the surface decoration member 2551. A plate-shaped diffused light guide member 2552 arranged behind the decorative member 2551 on the surface and capable of diffusing light, and a logo decorative substrate 2553 arranged above the diffused light guide member 2552 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The diffusion light guide member 2552 and the surface decorative member 2551 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502. The superficial effect unit 2550 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the logo decoration substrate 2553.

The front right middle effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 has a fixed decorative body 2620 formed in a circular shape in the front view, and an annular rotating decorative body 2630 that surrounds the outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620 and is rotatable. The right middle movable decorative body 2610, the front right middle decorative board 2640 arranged behind the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the front right middle decorative board 2640 placed behind the front right middle decorative board 2640. After the unit base 2502, which supports the rotary drive mechanism 2650 that rotationally drives the rotary decorative body 2630 of the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table, the rotary drive mechanism 2650, the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table, and the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the table. It includes a base member 2660 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the side, and a rotation drive mechanism 2670 that rotates the base member 2660 within a predetermined angle range. The base member 2660 is rotatably supported by a support pin 2601 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2502.

The fixed decorative body 2620 in the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table of the front right middle effect unit 2600 has a circular outer circumference, the front surface bulges forward, and the front surface is irregularly penetrated in the front-rear direction. And the disc-shaped rear decoration body 2622, which is arranged inside the front decoration body 2621 and has a translucent front surface that bulges forward more loosely than the front surface of the front decoration body 2621 and has a predetermined character embossed on the front surface. , Is equipped. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the table at a position on the rear side of the rear decorative body 2622, so that the rear decorative body 2622 and the front decorative body 2621 can be light-emittingly decorated. There is.

Further, the fixed decorative body 2620 further includes a light-shielding member 2623 which is arranged on the outer periphery of the front decorative body 2621 and has a plurality of radially protruding section pieces 2623a in the circumferential direction. Further, the pre-decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 includes a plurality of lens portions 2621a that project radially from the outer periphery and are arranged between the sectional pieces 2623a of the light-shielding member 2623. The tip of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 is formed in a star shape. The section 26223a and the lens portion 2621a of the fixed decorative body 2620 are located inside the rotating decorative body 2630. An LED is mounted on the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the table at a position on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a, so that the tip of the lens portion 2621a formed in a star shape can be light-emitting and decorated. ..

The front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 is attached to the base member 2660 via the annular spacer member 2624 in a state where the rear decorative body 2622, the light shielding member 2623, and the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the table are sandwiched. It has become.

The rotary decoration body 2630 of the movable decoration body 2610 in the middle right of the table is formed in an annular shape, and a predetermined decoration is three-dimensionally formed on the surface thereof, so that the decorations penetrate each other in the front-rear direction. ing. Further, the rotating decorative body 2630 is formed in a state where the rear side and the inner peripheral side are open, and the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 in the fixed decorative body 2620, the light-shielding member 2623, and the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the table are formed. It is designed to be inserted inside. The rotary decorative body 2630 can rotate with respect to the base member 2660 by having the rear end extending to the rear side from the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the front and being attached to the annular actuating gear 2654 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 described later. It has come to be supported by.

The rotating decorative body 2630 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED located behind the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 in the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the table.

The rotation drive mechanism 2650 of the production unit 2600 in the middle right of the table includes the table first drive motor 2651 and the table first drive motor 2651, which are attached to the base member 2660 via the motor base 2665 at a position above the rotation decoration body 2630. The drive gear 2652 fixed to the rotating shaft, the transmission gear 2653 that meshes with the drive gear 2652 and is rotatably supported by the base member 2660, and the transmission gear 2653 that meshes with the transmission gear 2653 and is rotatably supported by the base member 2660 and also on the front surface. The annular actuating gear 2654 to which the rotary ornament 2630 is attached is provided.

The table first drive motor 2651 of the rotation drive mechanism 2650 is attached to the front side of the motor base 2665, and the rotation shaft penetrates the motor base 2665 and extends to the rear side. Further, the drive gear 2652 and the transmission gear 2653 are arranged between the motor base 2665 and the base member 2660.

The actuating gear 2654 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 has a circular guide hole 2654a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The actuating gear 2654 is arranged between the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624, and is rotatably supported in the guide hole 2654a via a bush 2656 pivotally supported by the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624. ..

Further, the rotation drive mechanism 2650 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2655 capable of detecting the rotation position of the rotation decoration body 2630. The rotation drive mechanism 2650 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 2652a extending outward to the drive gear 2652, and by detecting the detection piece 2652a with the rotation position detection sensor 2655, the rotation position of the rotation decoration body 2630 Can be detected.

The base member 2660 of the front right middle effect unit 2600 is formed so as to cover the rear side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and the rotation drive mechanism 2650. The base member 2660 has an arm portion 2661 extending upward from a portion supporting the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table, and a bearing formed at the tip of the arm portion 2661 and rotatably supported with respect to the unit base 2502. A slit 2663 formed in the arm portion 2661 between the portion 2662 and the portion supporting the bearing portion 2662 and the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table, extending long along the radiation passing through the center of the bearing portion 2661 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. And have. The base member 2660 has a support pin 2601 inserted into the bearing portion 2662 so as to extend rearward to the rear side of the unit base 2502, and is rotatably supported by the support pin 2601. It has become like.

Further, the motor base 2665 attached to the front side of the base member 2660 is provided with a guide piece 2664 extending in an arc shape centered on the bearing portion 2662 at the lower end corresponding to the lower side of the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table. .. This guide piece 2664 has a plate-shaped portion extending in the front-rear direction at the outer peripheral end centered on the bearing portion 2662, and has an arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520. It is designed to be inserted in. As a result, the guide piece 2664 suppresses the swing in the front-rear direction when the base member 2660 is rotated.

The guide piece 2664 of the effect unit 2600 in the middle right of the table is located on the extension line on the right side of the front view of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510. As a result, when the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table is rotated from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction in the front view by the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the guide piece 2664 is positioned so as to cover the upper part of the right end of the first stage 2511. (See FIG. 157), even if the game ball bounces to the right from the first stage 2511, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the rotary decoration body 2630 of the movable decoration body 2610 in the middle right of the table. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced off by the rotating decorative body 2630, thereby impairing the original movement of the game ball and giving the player a sense of distrust. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, the guide piece 2664 is inclined so that the left end side surface of the front view is lowered. As a result, when the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table is in the normal position, the left end of the guide piece 2664 and the arcuate groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520 are formed on the lower side of the rotating decorative body 2630. Since a space that can accommodate the game ball can be formed, even if the game ball deviates to the right from the right end side of the first stage 2511, the game ball is accommodated and held in the above-mentioned space and the movement of the game ball is performed. Can be stopped, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving differently from the original movement.

The game ball housed and held in the above-mentioned space is slanted at the left end of the guide piece 2664 by moving (rotating) the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction of the front view. Due to the side surface, it rolls to the left (direction of the first stage 2511) and is sent back to the stage 2510. Therefore, depending on the speed at which the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table is moved from the normal position to the appearance position, the game ball accommodated and held at the left end of the guide piece 2664 can be flown to the stage 2510 side (FIG. 158). (See), so it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which makes the player entertain the movement of the game medium and reduces the interest. It is possible to suppress the problem.

The rotation drive mechanism 2670 of the effect unit 2600 in the middle right of the table is attached to the rotation shaft of the table second drive motor 2671 and the table second drive motor 2671, which are attached to the predetermined positions of the unit base 2502 so that the rotation shaft extends in the front-rear direction. It includes a disk-shaped link wheel 2672 that is fixed, and a link pin 2673 that is supported at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the link wheel 2672 and is slidably inserted into the slit 2663 of the base member 2660.

Further, the rotation drive mechanism 2670 is provided with a rotation position detection sensor 2674 which is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 and detects the rotation position of the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table via the base member 2660. The rotation position detection sensor 2674 is mounted at a position where the right end of the guide piece 2664 of the motor base 2665 attached to the unit base 2660 can be detected.

In this rotation drive mechanism 2670, when the link wheel 2672 is rotated by the second drive motor 2671 in Table 2, the link pin 2673 revolves on the circumference of a predetermined radius, and the link pin 2673 revolves. At the same time that the link pin 2673 slides in the slit 2663, the link pin 2673 presses the inner wall of the slit 2663 in a predetermined direction, and the base member 2660 rotates about the bearing portion 2662 (support pin 2601). There is.

In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, since the link pin 2673 is arranged between the bearing portion 2662 of the base member 2660 and the movable decoration body 2610 in the middle right of the table, the movable decoration body in the middle right of the table is larger than the revolution diameter of the link pin 2673. The 2610 can be moved greatly. In the front right middle effect unit 2600 of this example, the movable decoration body 2610 in the front right middle is placed on the right side of the front view of the window portion 2501 by the rotation movement mechanism 2670, and the center side of the front view of the window portion 2501. It can be rotated between the appearance position and the appearance position located in.

The link wheel 2672 of the rotation drive mechanism 2670 is located on the front side of the partition wall member 2520, and a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof faces the window portion 2501 (see FIGS. 112 and 133). As a result, a worker such as maintenance can rotate the link wheel 2672 by touching the outer circumference of the link wheel 2672 from the front side of the center accessory 2500 (game board 4), so that the base member 2660 (movable decoration in the middle right of the table) can be rotated. Even if a problem occurs in which the body 2610) stops at a rotation position other than the predetermined position, the link wheel 2672 can be rotated from the front side to return the base member 2660 to the normal position without disassembling the center accessory 2500. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for maintenance, etc., and it is possible to shorten the time during which the game is interrupted due to the occurrence of a defect as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game. You can do it.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the support pin 2601 (bearing portion) of the center accessory 2500 when the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table is in the normal position located on the rightmost side in the front view. The support pin 2601 and the link wheel 2672 are arranged so that the vertical line passing through the center of 2662) passes between the center of the link wheel 2672 and the link pin 2673. As a result, the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table can be rotated to the left side in front view, and the appearance position of the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table is moved closer to the center to make it easier for the player to pay attention. You can do it. When the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table is returned from the appearance position to the normal position, the revolving link pin 2673 moves across the vertical line passing through the center of the support pin 2601, so that the link pin 2673 is the relevant one. During the period from reaching the vertical line to revolving to the normal position, the load from the movable decoration body 2610 in the middle right of the table acts on the link pin 2673 and the load is applied to the second drive motor 2671 in the table, and the movable decoration in the middle right of the table The body 2610 may not be able to return to its normal position, but as mentioned above, by rotating the link wheel 2672, which is partially exposed within the frame of the center accessory 2500, the link pin 2673 can be moved. It is possible to revolve and return the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table to the normal position.

The front right outer effect unit 2700 of the center accessory 2500 is a table in which the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is in the normal position and is arranged under the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 and has a decoration of predetermined characters on the front surface. The lower right middle decorative member 2710, the lower right middle decorative board 2711 arranged on the rear side of the lower right middle decorative member 2710 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the lower right middle decorative member 2710 on the front surface. The table right middle upper decorative member 2720 which has different character decorations and is placed on the upper side of the table right middle upper decorative body 2610, and the table right middle upper decorative body 2720 and the table right middle lower decorative body 2710. The arc-shaped front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 arranged so as to surround the right outer circumference of the fixed decorative body 2620 in the movable decorative body 2610 and widening upward, the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 and the front right middle upper It is provided with a front right middle outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733, which is arranged on the rear side of the decorative member 2720 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The front right middle and lower decorative member 2710 of the front right outer effect unit 2700 is formed so that the character portion has translucency, and also protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 to form a part of the peripheral wall portion 2503. Is forming. The front right middle and lower decorative member 2710 is attached to the front of the unit base 2502 at a position on the right side of the front view hold number indicator 2530 so as to sandwich the front right middle and lower decorative substrate 2711. The lower right middle decorative member 2710 on the front right can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately causing the LED of the lower middle and lower decorative substrate 2711 on the front right to emit light.

The upper middle decorative member 2720 on the right side of the table is formed in a plate shape so that the character portion has translucency, and is attached to the upper front surface of the outer peripheral decorative member 2730 on the right middle side of the table. The table right middle upper decorative member 2720 can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately causing the corresponding LED in the table right middle outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733 to emit light.

The front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 of the front right outer effect unit 2700 has a frame shape having a plurality of openings whose outer shape becomes wider as the outer shape increases upward and whose circumferential length increases as the outer shape increases upward. It includes a frame member 2731 and a translucent lens member 2732 having a block portion arranged behind the frame member 2731 and inserted into each opening of the frame member 2731. In the front right middle outer peripheral decorative body 2730, the frame member 2731 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502, and the lens member 2732 and the front right middle outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733 are sandwiched between the frame member 2731 and the unit base 2502. It is supposed to be done. In the outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733 on the right side of the table, LEDs are arranged at positions corresponding to each opening of the frame member 2731, and each opening (block portion of the lens member 2732) can be light-emitting and decorated. There is.

In the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2503 above and to the right of the substantially center in the left-right direction substantially follows the inner circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A). It has a shape, and when attached to the game panel 1150, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer circumference of the upper and right peripheral wall portions 2503 in the center accessory 2500. ing. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the gap on the outer periphery of the right side (so-called right-handed), the game ball enters the guide passage 2142a of the attacker unit 2100, and the gate has an extremely high probability. The game ball can be passed through the portion 2105.

Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery of the left side of the center accessory 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. .. As a result, when the game ball is driven so as to enter the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball flows down in the area with a complicated movement, and the game can be enjoyed by the movement of the game ball. It has become. Also, if you hit the game ball so that it flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500, you can let the game ball enter the warp entrance 2504, so you can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510. At the same time, it is possible to raise the player's expectation depending on whether or not the game ball that is refluxed and discharged from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 is accepted into the first starting port 2101 or the like, and entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[2-4A. Second embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the production unit in the middle right of the table]
Next, a second embodiment of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the effect unit 2600 in the middle right of the table of the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the second embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the effect unit in the middle right of the table, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the front cover and the effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a view of (a) from a position slightly to the left with respect to the front. It is a perspective view, and (c) is a perspective view seen from a position further to the left than (b). FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state when the light is off, and (c) is a light emitting decoration mode when the blue light is on. It is an explanatory diagram which shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of red lighting, (d) is an explanatory diagram which shows. Members having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fixed decoration body 2620A of this example can be replaced with the front decoration body 2621 and the back decoration body 2622 in the above-mentioned fixed decoration body 2620. As shown in the figure, the fixed decorative body 2620A is arranged in a transparent front cover 2625 having a circular outer circumference, a front surface bulging forward, and a shallow relief having a predetermined shape formed on the front surface, and a front cover 2625. A thin plate-shaped effect sheet 2626, a thin plate-shaped diffuser lens sheet 2627 arranged behind the effect sheet 2626 and having a plurality of fine prisms, and a front cover arranged behind the diffuser lens sheet 2627. It includes a transparent disk-shaped holding member 2628 inserted into the 2625.

In this fixed decorative body 2620A, the effect sheet 2626 is composed of a transparent and smoke-colored base film and a colored layer formed on the back surface of the base film so that the effect sheet 2626 looks black when viewed from the front side. (See FIG. 144 (b)). When viewed from the front, the fixed decorative body 2620A has a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front cover 2625 on the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 (see FIG. 143). As a result, when the fixed decorative body 2620A is viewed from the front without being luminescently decorated, the relief of the front cover 2625, the relief reflected on the effect sheet 2626, and the distance between the front surface of the front cover 2625 and the front surface of the effect sheet 2626. Due to the difference, the relief of the front cover 2625 looks more three-dimensional like decoupage, and it is possible to present an unprecedented decoration to the player, and as shown in FIGS. 143 (b) and 143 (c). In addition, since the appearance changes depending on the viewing position of the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained.

Further, in the fixed decorative body 2620A, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the colored layer in the effect sheet 2626 has a black portion 2626a having almost no translucency, a blue portion 2626b having translucency, and a translucent portion. It is composed of a light red portion 2626c and an uncolored uncolored portion 2626d. As a result, when the LED located behind the fixed decorative body 2620A in the decorative substrate 2640 in the middle right of the table is not emitted, the smoke color of the base film makes the whole blackish and the pattern can be seen as shown in FIG. 144 (b). On the other hand, when the LED emits light in blue, it emits light with the pattern shown in FIG. 144 (c), and when it emits light in red, it emits light with the pattern shown in FIG. 144 (d). ing.

More specifically, the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 in the fixed decorative body 2620A has a black portion in a portion not included in any of the patterns when the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) and the pattern of FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped. It is set to 2626a, and the portion included in any of the patterns is set to the uncolored portion 2626d. Further, when the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) and the pattern of FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped with each other, the portion of only the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) is designated as the blue portion 2626b, and only the pattern of FIG. 144 (d) is used. The part is the red part 2626c. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit blue light, light is transmitted through the blue portion 2626b and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the red portion 2626c. The imitated pattern) will emit blue light. Further, when the LED is made to emit red light, light is transmitted through the red portion 2626c and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the blue portion 2626b. The imitated pattern) will emit red light. When the LED is made to emit white light, the pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (a) emits light.

In this way, when the LED of the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 arranged on the rear side of the fixed decorative body 2620A is not emitting light, the relief formed on the front cover 2625 is reflected on the effect sheet 2626 to give a three-dimensional effect. While it is possible to present a certain decoration, it is possible to display different patterns by emitting light according to the emission color of the LED, and it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player so that he / she will not get bored. The relief of the front cover 2625 has substantially the same shape as the pattern that is displayed when the LED emits blue light, which gives a three-dimensional effect to the pattern that emits blue light together with the relief of the front cover 2625. Can be given.

[2-5. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. be.

The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the back box 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. It is equipped with 3010. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is fixed to a box-shaped opening 3010b having an open front side and a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction, and extending outward from the outer periphery of the front end to the rear side of the game panel 1150. It is provided with a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed to be smaller than the front view outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Further, the back box 3010 has a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d recessed in the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a so as to be substantially the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and toward the front, and a rear view of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 into which the fixed piece 1902 can be inserted and the liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite sides (right side of the rear view) of the liquid crystal inserting portion 3010d and the lock mechanism 3040. The lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f to which the is mounted is provided. In this back box 3010, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface in the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d on the rear wall 3010a is a flat surface. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 comes into contact with each other.

Although detailed description will be omitted, the back box 3010 is formed with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like for mounting the production units 3100, 3300, 3500, a board, a cover, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back unit 3000 is mounted near the front end in the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the front side unit 2200, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the back left lower decorative board 3020 and near the front end in the back box 3010. The lower right decorative board 3021 mounted at a position corresponding to the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the front surface of the rear wall 3010a above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back upper relay board 3022, the back right relay board 3023 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a on the right side of the front view of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the rear wall 3010a on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. It is provided with a back left relay board 3024 mounted on the front surface.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, the panel relay board 3025 attached to the lower left corner of the rear view below the opening 3010b, and the back box 3025 on the right side of the rear view. It includes a first drive board 3026 mounted on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in 3010, and a second drive board 3027 arranged on the right side of the rear view of the first drive board 3026 and mounted on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. ing.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a panel relay board cover 3030 that covers the rear side of the panel relay board 3025 and is attached to the back box 3010, and a first drive board cover that covers the rear side of the first drive board 3026 and is attached to the back box 3010. It includes 3031 and a second drive board cover 3032 that covers the rear side of the second drive board 3027 and is attached to the back box 3010.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a lock mechanism 3040 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3040 of this example is slidably attached to the lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction, and when slid upward, the fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rearranged. When the insertion port that can be inserted from the side opens, the fixing piece 1902 is inserted from the insertion port, and then the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the rear end of the insertion port is closed and the fixing piece 1902 cannot be removed. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a plate-shaped back left holder 3050 attached to the vicinity of the front end at the left end in the back box 3010 and a second starting port of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010. The back right guide member 3060, which is attached at the position corresponding to the 2102 and the general winning opening 2104 and can guide the game ball, and the first starting port 2101 and the front side unit 2200 of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010. It is provided with a back left guiding member 3070 which is attached to a position corresponding to one general winning opening 2201 and can guide a game ball.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a magnetic detection sensor 3080 which is attached to a predetermined position of the back left holder 3050 and the back right guide member 3060 to detect magnetism, and a first start port 2101 which is attached to a predetermined position of the back left guide member 3070. The first start port sensor 3081 that can detect the game ball received in the above, and the game ball that is attached to the predetermined positions of the back right guide member 3060 and the back left guide member 3070 and are received in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 respectively. It is equipped with a possible general winning opening sensor 3082.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back horizontal effect unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and on both the left and right sides, and a back upper effect unit 3300 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And the underside effect unit 3500 arranged under the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

The lower left decorative substrate 3020 on the back unit 3000 can be decorated with light emission on the front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light. Further, the lower right decorative substrate 3021 on the back side can illuminate the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the front surface.

The back-up relay board 3022 in the back unit 3000 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the peripheral control board 4010. Further, the back right relay board 3023 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back side relay board 3112 of the back right effect unit 3100R in the back side effect unit 3100. The back left relay board 3024 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back side relay board 3112 of the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100.

The panel relay board 3025 in the back unit 3000 includes a connection between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, a main control board 4100 and the first start port sensor 3082, a second start port sensor 2125, a count sensor 2114, and a general winning port. The purpose is to relay the connection with the sensor 3082, the gate sensor 2126, the start port solenoid 2124, the attacker solenoid 2113, and the like.

The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 in the back unit 3000 are each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the door frame 5 based on the control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010. LEDs mounted on 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and on each decorative substrate 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 252, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided in the game board 4. Dial drive motors 414 provided on the door frame 5 and drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159 provided on the game board 4 based on control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010 and controlling light emission. It is for controlling the drive of 3302, 3506 and the like.

The back left holder 3050 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the warp inlet 2504 in the center accessory 2500, and guides the game ball to the warp inlet 2504 using a magnet. It is possible to detect fraudulent activities.

The back right guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the first starting port 2101 in the center accessory 2500, and uses a magnet to move the game ball to the first starting port. It is possible to detect fraudulent acts that lead to 2101.

The back right guide member 3060 is arranged on the rear side of the second unit 2120 and the third unit 2130 in the attacker unit 2100, and has an upper opening 3061 that can communicate with the general winning opening 2104 on the front surface of the upper end portion. A middle opening 3062 that can communicate with the second starting port 2102 is provided on the front surface of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back right guide member 3060 has a right guide passage extending from the upper opening 3061 to the lower end so that the game ball can flow and the lower end opens downward. The middle opening 3062 communicates with the middle of the right guide passage, and the game balls that have entered the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 are both discharged downward from the lower end by the right guide passage.

As a result, the back right guide member 3060 allows the game ball that has been received into the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 to enter the right guide passage from the upper opening 3061. At the same time, the game ball received by the second starting port 2102 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the right guidance passage from the middle opening 3062. In the back right guide member 3060, the general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached at a position between the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 in the right guiding passage, and the game ball from the upper opening 3061, that is, the general winning opening 2104. Only can be detected.

The back left guide member 3070 in the back unit 3000 straddles the portion where the first starting port 2101 is arranged in the attacker unit 2100 and the portion where the three general winning openings 2201 in the front side unit 2200 are arranged. It is designed to be placed on the rear side. The middle guidance passage 3071, which extends in the vertical direction at the right end of the front view and allows the game ball to circulate, and the upper end of which can communicate with the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the left side of the front view of the middle guidance passage 3071. It is formed on the front surface and has three general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200 and three left openings 3072 that can communicate with each other.

The lower end of the middle guide passage 3071 of the back left guide member 3070 is opened downward, and the opened front side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100. As a result, the game ball received by the first starting port 2101 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the middle guidance passage 3071 from the upper end portion, and is guided downward by the middle guidance passage 3071 from the lower end. It is designed to be discharged downward. The first start port sensor 3081 is attached to the vicinity of the upper part and the lower part of the middle guide passage 3071 so as to detect one game ball twice. That is, although details are omitted, the acceptance (winning) of the game ball to the first start port 2101 is determined based on the detection pattern of the detection signal of the game ball from the two first start port sensors 3081. If a detection pattern different from the preset regular detection pattern is detected, for example, it is determined that a fraudulent act such as putting an illegal tool in and out of the first starting port 2101 is performed, and the fraudulent act is dealt with. It is designed to perform a predetermined game process.

Further, although not shown, the back left guide member 3070 has a left guide passage having three left openings 3072 and a discharge port through which a game ball can pass at the lower end of the communication with the three left openings 3071 on the left side of the front view of the middle guide passage 3071. I have. A general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached to the discharge port of this left guide passage, and no matter which of the three general winning opening 2201 the game ball is received, it can be detected by one general winning opening sensor 3082. ing.

[2-6. Back side production unit]
Subsequently, the back lateral effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 156. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back-lateral effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back-lateral effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back-lateral effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back-horizontal effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed afterwards. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of one rotating decorative body unit in the back-lateral effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of one rotating decorative body unit in the back-lateral effect unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit of the back-horizontal effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit of the back-lateral effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure.

The back lateral effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and on both the left and right sides, and is attached at the positions on both the upper and lower sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back side effect unit 3100 is formed substantially symmetrically with the back right effect unit 3100R arranged on the right side of the front view of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the back right effect unit 3100R, and the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back left effect unit 3100L, the back left effect unit 3100L, and the back right effect unit 3100R arranged on the left side of the front view can be independently moved in the left-right direction, and the upper side and the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. It is equipped with a back-horizontal slide unit 3150, which is arranged in.

The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100 are supported by the back side side slide unit 3150 so that the upper end and the lower end can be slidably supported in the left-right direction, and the front side and the front side of the back box 3010 with respect to the opening 3010b. The front of the back-horizontal base 3110 can be covered with a vertically long box-shaped back-horizontal base 3110 whose side facing the center in the left-right direction and a part of each of the open front side and the back-horizontal base 3110 facing the center. The back-horizontal decorative member 3111 attached to the back-horizontal base 3111, the vertically long back-horizontal relay board 3112 attached to the outer surface of the back-horizontal base 3111 opposite to the open center-facing side, and the inside of the box-shaped back-horizontal base 3110. It is equipped with three rotating decorative unit units 3120, which are mounted in a row in the vertical direction.

The back-horizontal base 3110 of the back-right effect unit 3100R and the back-left effect unit 3100L is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the height in the vertical direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. Further, the back lateral base 3110 protrudes upward from the front end of the upper end and is connected to the lower end of the right connecting member 3157 or the left connecting member 3162 of the back lateral slide unit 3150, and the slider mounting portion 3110a projects downward from the lower end and extends in the left-right direction. It is provided with a guided portion 3110b that is inserted and guided into the lower right guide member 3170R or the lower left guide member 3170L of the back horizontal slide unit 3150. The back horizontal base 3110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin.

The back side decoration member 3111 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is positioned corresponding to each rotation decoration body 3126 of the three rotation decoration units 3120 mounted in the back side side base 3110, and each rotation decoration body. A plurality of notched portions 3111a are provided so as to face the front side of the 3126 and the side facing the center of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The back horizontal decorative member 3111 may hide the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 located above and below the rotating decorative body 3126 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 from the player side at a portion between the notched portions 3111a. You can do it.

Further, the back-horizontal decorative member 3111 is provided with a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface, and at a position corresponding to the back-horizontal decorative substrate 3130 in the rotary decorative body unit 3120, a plurality of the back-horizontal decorative members 3111 penetrate in the front-rear direction along the decoration. Has an opening of 3111b. As a result, the light from the back side decoration substrate 3130 can be directly irradiated forward through the opening 3111b of the back side decoration member 3111.

The rotating decorative unit 3120 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L has a plate-shaped lower base 3121 extending in the left-right direction and a front surface of the lower base 3121 from the center in the left-right direction to the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. A box-shaped upper base 3122 mounted on the upper side opposite to the side facing the center in the left-right direction, and a back-lateral rotation drive mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 3122 so that the rotation axis extends toward the lower base 3121. The motor 3123, the drive gear 3124 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 and rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, and the drive gear 3124 meshing with the drive gear 3124 and having the same diameter as the drive gear 3124. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 3125 that is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, and a bottomed tubular shape that is attached to the upper surface of the driven gear 3125 and extends in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed into a substantially regular square shape. It includes a decorative body 3126 and a rotation position detection sensor 3127 that can detect the rotation position of the rotation decoration body 3126 and is attached to the upper base 3122.

Further, the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is a semi-cylindrical lens member 3128 that is inserted into the rotating decorative body 3126 from above and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 3122 and extends in the vertical direction, and the chord side of the lens member 3128. A vertically long rotary decorative body decorative substrate 3129 mounted on the lens member 3128 facing the side and mounted in the substantially center of the front surface of the upper base 3122 in the left-right direction and mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a back-horizontal decorative substrate 3130.

The lower base 3121 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 is formed to have a length in the front-rear direction slightly longer than the outer diameter of the rotary decorative body 3126, and is on the opposite side of the drive gear 3124 with the driven gears 3125 at both left and right ends interposed therebetween. The end portion is formed in a semicircular shape substantially concentric with the axis of the driven gear 3125. Further, the lower base 3121 includes a drive shaft portion 3121a that rotatably supports the drive gear 3124 and extends upward, and a driven shaft portion 3121b that rotatably supports the driven gear 3125 and extends upward. .. The drive shaft portion 3121a is inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) formed on the lower surface of the drive gear 3124. Further, the driven shaft portion 3121b is inserted into the shaft hole 3125a penetrating the shaft core of the driven gear 3125 via the bush 3131.

The upper base 3122 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 is arranged on the side of the lower base 3121 that supports the drive gear 3124 from the center in the left-right direction, and the lower side and the driven gear 3125 side (the side facing the center in the left-right direction in the opening 3010b) are open. The box-shaped main body portion 3122a, the vertical wall portion 3122b extending upward from the open driven gear 3125 side at the upper end of the main body portion 3122a, and the lower base 3121 from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 3122b to the driven gear 3125 side are abbreviated. It is provided with a top plate portion 3122c extending in parallel. In the rotary decoration unit 3120 of this example, a rotary decoration unit 3126 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction is arranged between the lower base 3121 and the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122.

In the upper base 3122, the lower end of the main body 3122a is attached to the lower base 3121. Further, in the upper base 3122, the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 3122a. The vertical wall portion 3122b of the upper base 3122 extends upward higher than the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the main body portion 3122a. The top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 has a semicircular tip formed on the opposite side to the vertical wall portion 3122b, and the lens member 3128 is attached to the lower surface.

An annular upper guide 3132 having a cylindrical guide cylinder (not shown) inserted inside the rotating decorative body 3126 can be attached to the lower surface of the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122. ing. The outer diameter of the guide cylinder inserted into the rotating decoration body 3126 is slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotating decoration body 3126, and the upper guide 3132 has a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotating decoration body 3126. Can be rotatably supported.

The drive gear 3124 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 has a flat shaft portion 3124a whose upper end is fixed to the rotary shaft of the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 and extends downward, and a flat gear 3124 formed at the lower end of the shaft portion 3124a and meshes with the driven gear 3125. A gear-shaped gear portion 3124b, a detection piece 3124c extending in a fan shape from substantially the center of the shaft portion 3124a in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a shaft hole recessed upward from the lower surface side at the center of the gear portion 3124b (not shown). ) And. The drive gear 3124 has a shaft hole inserted into the drive shaft portion 3121a of the lower base 3121 so that the rotation shaft core of the gear portion 3124b located far from the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 does not easily swing. It has become. Further, the detection piece 3124c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3127 mounted in the main body portion 3122a of the upper base 3122, and the rotation decoration body 3126 is detected by detecting the detection piece 3124c of the drive gear 3124. It is possible to detect the rotation position of.

As shown in the figure, the rotating decoration unit 3126 of the rotating decoration unit 3120 is formed in a bottomed cylinder whose outer circumference extends in the vertical direction of a substantially regular quadrangle, and can be assembled as a rotating decoration unit 3120 to form a regular quadrangle. It is possible to rotate around an axis extending in the vertical direction with the center as the axis. The rotating decorative body 3126 is translucent and has different decorations on the four outer peripheral surfaces.

The lens member 3128 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 and the rotary decoration decorative substrate 3129 have a length extending from the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 to the vicinity of the lower end of the rotary decoration 3126 in the assembled state, and are the rotation decoration. It is possible to illuminate and decorate the entire 3126 in the vertical direction substantially uniformly. The lens member 3128 having a semicircular cross section has the left and right sides of the opening 3101b in the back box 3010 with respect to a surface whose chord direction extends in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (a surface parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1150). It is attached to the upper base 3122 in a state of being tilted so that the center side in the direction is retracted (for example, a state of being tilted by about 30 degrees in a plan view). As a result, the front surface of the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3129 attached to the string side of the lens member 3128 faces the player side, so that the player feels brighter when the rotating decorative body 3126 is light-emittingly decorated. It has become.

The back horizontal decorative substrate 3130 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 is attached to the front side of the main body portion 3122a of the upper base 3122 so as to extend to the upper end of the vertical wall portion 3122b. The back-horizontal decorative substrate 3130 can be decorated with light emission from the rear side by appropriately causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the rotary decoration unit 3120 of the present embodiment is a surface facing the left-right center side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 among the four surfaces of the outer circumference of the rotary decoration body 3126 in the assembled state. Except for, it is possible to expose three sides. Further, in the rotary decorative body unit 3120, the rear surfaces of the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 are respectively mounted in the back horizontal base 3110.

The rotating decorative body unit 3120 is formed symmetrically with respect to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L.

The back side slide unit 3150 of the back side effect unit 3100 is attached to a position above the opening 3010b near the front end in the back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction so as to extend substantially the entire width, and the unit base 3151. It is attached to the upper part of the rear surface near the right end of the front view, and the rotation axis extends forward through the unit base 3151. A gear-shaped drive gear 3153, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3154 that is rotatably supported by a unit base 3151 at a position on the left side of the front view of the drive gear 3153 and meshes with the drive gear 3153, and a first transmission gear 3154. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3155 that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side of the front view and meshes with the first transmission gear 3154, and a rack gear 3156a extending in the left-right direction that meshes with the second transmission gear 3155. A plate-shaped right slider 3156 that is slidably supported in the left-right direction at a position on the lower front surface of the unit base 3151 below the second transmission gear 3155, and an upper end is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3156 and the lower end is attached. It includes a right connecting member 3157 attached to the slider mounting portion 3110a of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R.

Further, the back side slide unit 3150 is provided with a right slide position detection sensor 3158 which is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and can detect the left / right slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R. The right slide position detection sensor 3158 detects the slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R via the right slider 3156 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the right slider 3156. Can be done.

Further, the back-horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the upper rear surface on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the front view of the unit base 3151, and has a back-horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 that penetrates the unit base 3151 and extends forward. It has a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3160 fixed to the rotating shaft of the back side left slide drive motor 3159, and a rack gear 3161a extending in the left-right direction that meshes with the drive gear 3160, and is below the drive gear 3160 in the unit base 3151. A plate-shaped left slider 3161 that is slidably supported in the left-right direction at the position of the front side, and an upper end is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3161, and the lower end is a slider attachment portion of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back left effect unit 3100L. It includes a left connecting member 3162 attached to the 3110a.

Further, the back side slide unit 3150 is provided with a left slide position detection sensor 3163 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and can detect the left / right slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L. The left slide position detection sensor 3163 detects the slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L via the left slider 3161 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided in the left slider 3161. Can be done.

Further, the back lateral slide unit 3150 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3151 and includes a plate-shaped unit cover 3165 that covers the front side of the drive gear 3153, 3160, the right slider 3156, the left slider 3161, and the like.

Further, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the upper side is opened and extends in the left-right direction to guide the lower end of the back right effect unit 3100R in the left-right direction so as to be slidable. The lower guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction while the upper side is opened and slides the lower end of the back left effect unit 3100L in the left-right direction. It is equipped with 3170L. In the lower right guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member 3170L, the guided portion 3110b of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is slidably inserted from above. The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L can be slidably guided in the left-right direction via the guided portion 3110b.

The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 in the back lateral slide unit 3150 are formed from the rack gears 3156a and 3161a formed so as to extend in the left-right direction at the upper ends, respectively, and from the left-right end portion of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 toward the center in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detection piece (not shown) that extends upward in a plate shape, and a guide groove (not shown) that is open on the rear side and extends in the left-right direction and is formed so as to be separated in parallel in the vertical direction. There is.

In the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161, a plurality of rollers (not shown) rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3151 are inserted into the guide grooves on the rear surface, and the plurality of rollers are inserted. Allows you to slide left and right. Further, the movement of the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the unit cover 3164 and the unit base 3151.

The back side slide unit 3150 of the back side extension unit 3100 rotates the back side side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side side left slide drive motor 3159 in an appropriate direction to keep the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 within a predetermined range. It can be slid independently in the left-right direction, respectively, and thus the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect via the right connecting member 3157 and the left connecting member 3162 attached to the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161. The unit 3100L can be slid in the left-right direction.

The back-horizontal effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is capable of rotating the back-right effect unit 3100R and the back-left effect unit 3100L, which are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction in the front view, around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The rotating decorative bodies 3126 are arranged in three rows in the vertical direction coaxially, and the rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged vertically face each other in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. Is located in. In the back-horizontal effect unit 3100 of this example, the back-right effect unit 3100R and the back-left effect unit 3100L are separated from each other by the back-lateral slide unit 3150 (backward position) and the closest position (appearance position). It is possible to slide and move in the left-right direction independently between them. When the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are in the most separated positions, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are located outside the front view of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, respectively. , It is designed so that it cannot be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 110 and the like). And this state is a normal game state.

On the other hand, in the back side effect unit 3100, assuming that the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to the positions closest to each other, the rotary decoration body 3126 rotatably supported by each is centered. It is located inside the front view of the window portion 2501 in the accessory 2500, and the three rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged vertically from the player side can be visually recognized (see FIG. 159). Further, in the state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are closest to each other, the size of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 facing from the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately larger than the normal state. It is half the size.

The backside effect unit 3100 is movable according to the result of a special lottery when a game ball is received into the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102.

[2-7. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back-up effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

The back side effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is arranged behind the unit base 3151 of the back side side slide unit 3150 in the back side side effect unit 3100. There is. The back-up effect unit 3300 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3301 which is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction near the left end portion of the front view, and the rotation shaft penetrates the unit base 3301 and moves forward. It has a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft of the back-up drive motor 3302, and a rack gear that meshes with the drive gear and extends in an arc shape. It is equipped with an arcuate and plate-shaped slider (not shown) that is slidably supported in the circumferential direction by the unit base.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3300 includes a back-up decorative body base 3305 attached to the front surface of a slider (not shown), and a back-up decorative body 3306 attached to the front surface of the back-up decorative body base 3305 and having a predetermined decoration. It is provided with a back-up decorative substrate (not shown) arranged between the back-up decorative body 3306 and the back-up decorative body base 3305 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3300 is arranged behind the back-up decorative body base 3305 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301, and covers the front surface of the drive gear and the slider. The unit base cover 3308 and the unit base cover. Three columnar shaft members (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction in which the front end and the rear end are supported at predetermined positions by the 3308 and the unit base 3301, and each of them is rotatably inserted into each shaft member to form an outer circumference. It is equipped with a plurality of bushes (not shown) that can be brought into contact with the slider. In the backside effect unit 3300, a slider is supported so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction with respect to the unit base 3301 via a shaft member and a bush.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3300 is attached to a slide position detection sensor (not shown) that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and can detect the slide position of the slider, and is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 to decorate the back-up. It includes a back-up relay board (not shown) for relaying the connection between the board and the first drive board 3026.

Further, although not shown, the back-up effect unit 3300 is provided with magnets at the front-view right end of the back-up decoration base 3305 and the front-view right end of the unit base 3301, respectively, and attracts each other. It is mounted facing.

Although not shown, the unit base 3301 of the back-up effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open front side, and can accommodate a drive gear, a slider, and the like. Further, although not shown, the unit base 3301 is provided with three shaft holes that penetrate in a predetermined position in the front-rear direction and insert a rear end of a shaft member (not shown).

Although not shown, the drive gear of the back-up effect unit 3300 has an outer diameter of about two-thirds of the height dimension of the unit base 3301, and has a large-diameter spur gear shape. It is said to be a gear.

Further, although not shown, the slider of the back-up effect unit 3300 extends in an arc shape having a center below the unit base 3301 and is formed with a substantially constant width, and is formed on the outer peripheral surface in the radial direction. A rack gear that meshes with the drive gear is arranged in. Further, the sliders are formed at both ends in the circumferential direction and have a mounting portion for mounting the back-up decorative body base 3305, a slit that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the circumferential direction at approximately the center in the radial direction, and extends in the circumferential direction. It is equipped with a plate-shaped detection piece formed on the outside of the right end of the rack gear when viewed from the front.

The slider of the back-up effect unit 3300 is designed so that the bush inserted into the shaft member whose rear end is supported is in contact with the shaft hole of the unit base 3301 in contact with the peripheral surface inside the radial direction and the slit. By rotating the bush in contact with it, it can slide smoothly in the circumferential direction. Further, in the slider, both ends of the slit are closed, and the bush abuts on the circumferential end of the slit, so that the slide range in the circumferential direction of the slider is restricted. Further, in the slider of the back-up effect unit 3300, the detection piece can be detected by the slide position detection sensor, and the slider, that is, the slide position of the back-up decoration can be detected by detecting the detection piece. You can do it.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back-up decoration base 3305 of the back-up effect unit 3300 is formed so as to extend along the slider in the front view, the left end side of the front view is attached to the left end of the slider, and the right end side is the unit. It is designed to be attached to the right end of the slider through a through hole (not shown) of the base cover 3308. The back upper decorative body base 3305 is formed in a flat plate shape from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view, and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the back upper decorative body 3306.

The back-up decoration body 3306 of the back-up effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow (thin) relief shape imitating a fist, and is provided with a translucent decorative portion 3306a consisting of predetermined characters in a portion corresponding to the back of the hand. (See Figure 160). The back-up decorative body 3306 is formed in a state close to opaque light except for the outer periphery and the decorative portion 3306a, and is given a predetermined color by screen printing or the like. Further, although not shown, the decorative color applied to the front surface of the back-up decorative body 3306 is a color whose brightness becomes lower (darker) as the distance from the outer circumference increases.

In the back-up decorative substrate of the back-up effect unit 3300, a plurality of LEDs are mounted at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the back-up decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a on the front surface. As a result, the outer periphery of the back-up decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a can be light-emitting and decorated by the back-up decorative substrate.

In the back-up effect unit 3300 of this example, the slider is supported by the unit base 3301 and the unit base cover 3308 so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. This slider is in a state where the string with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered from the left side of the front view with respect to the horizontal (the state of the retracted position), and the string with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the arc of the slider in the counterclockwise direction with the front view. It is possible to slide in the circumferential direction until (the state of the appearance position).

In the normal state, the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered on the left side with respect to the horizontal, and in this state, the back top decorative body 3306 attached to the front side of the slider. However, it is in a state of being located directly in front of the unit base 3301. Therefore, in a normal state, the back-up decorative body 3306 of the back-up effect unit 3300 is located above the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is invisible to the player, that is, in the retracted position. It is in a state (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, the back-up effect unit 3300 slides the slider counterclockwise in the front view by driving the back-up drive motor 3302, and when the strings are substantially perpendicular to the arc of the slider, the slider is moved to the front side of the slider. The attached back-up decorative body 3306 is located below the front of the unit base 3301 and the fist is facing downward. In this state, the back-up decorative body 3306 of the back-up effect unit 3300 hangs down from the upper side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 into the window portion 2501, and is located substantially in the center of the window portion 2501. It is in a state where it can be visually recognized from the side, that is, in a state where it appears (see FIG. 160).

[2-8. Backside production unit]
Subsequently, the underside effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. The underside effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged behind the back left guide member 3070.

The under-back effect unit 3500 of this example is arranged on the rear side of the under-back decorative body 3501 which is formed in a substantially symmetrical predetermined shape and has partial translucency, and the under-back decorative body 3501 and is placed on the front surface. A lower back decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted (not shown), a slider arranged behind the lower back decorative board and attached to the lower back decorative body 3501 (not shown), and the rear side of the slider. A shallow box-shaped unit cover 3504 that is horizontally long and has an open rear side, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit cover 3504 and is mounted in the back box 3010. It is provided with a shallow box-shaped unit base 3505 with an open front side, and a backside drive motor 3506 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 to slide the slider in the vertical direction.

The underside decoration body 3501 of the underside effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a flame. Although not shown, the sliders of the underside effect unit 3500 are arranged at positions at both left and right ends apart in the vertical direction and protrude backward, and are centered in the left-right direction between the support bosses. It is provided with a pair of slits that are arranged on both the left and right sides of the sling and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction.

Although not shown, the unit cover 3504 of the underside effect unit 3500 has a pair of elevating guide grooves that are separated in the left-right direction, penetrate in the front-rear direction, extend in the up-down direction, and the support boss of the slider is slidably inserted. It is provided with a through hole portion that is arranged symmetrically with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched between the pair of elevating guide grooves, extends in an arc shape so that the center side in the left-right direction bulges, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The unit cover 3504 is capable of slidably supporting the slider in the vertical direction by a pair of elevating guide grooves.

The outer shape of the unit base 3505 of the underside effect unit 3500 is the same as the outer shape of the unit cover 3504, and it is possible to form a box having a shallow depth in the front-rear direction with the unit cover 3504. .. The underside drive motor 3506 of the underside effect unit 3500 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and rotates while being attached to the unit base 3505. The shaft penetrates the unit base 3505 and extends forward.

Further, although not shown, the underside effect unit 3500 meshes with a spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the underside drive motor 3506 between the unit cover 3504 and the unit base 3505, and the drive gear. The spur gear-shaped first transmission gear, which is arranged on the right side of the front view of the drive gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, meshes with the first transmission gear and is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first transmission gear. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear, which is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, meshes with the second transmission gear and is placed at the same height as the drive gear on the right side of the front view of the second transmission gear. A spur gear-shaped third transmission gear that is rotatably supported by the base 3505, and a fan-shaped gear portion that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the drive gear when viewed from the front. , The extension piece extending radially outward from the gear part, and the extension piece protruding forward from the tip of the extension piece, penetrating the through hole on the left side of the front view of the unit cover 3504 and sliding into the slit on the left side of the slider. A fan-shaped gear part that meshes with a left link member having a transmission pin that is movably inserted and is rotatably supported by a unit base at a position on the right side of the front view from the third transmission gear. , The extension piece extending radially outward from the gear part, and the extension piece protruding forward from the tip of the extension piece, penetrating the through hole on the right side of the front view of the unit cover 3504 and sliding into the slit on the right side of the slider. It comprises a right link member with a transmission pin that is movably inserted.

Although not shown, the lower back effect unit 3500 is arranged symmetrically with the left link member and the right link member sandwiching the center in the left-right direction, and the drive gear is rotationally driven by the back left drive motor 3506. , The drive gear, and the plurality of transmission gears allow the left link member and the right link member to rotate in opposite directions with their respective transmission pins at the same height. That is, the height position of each transmission pin changes by rotating the left link member and the right link member, and the transmission pin slides the slider, that is, the lower back decorative body 3501 in the vertical direction. It can be raised and lowered.

Further, although not shown, the underside effect unit 3500 is inserted from the rear side into the support boss of the slider inserted through the elevating guide groove in the unit cover 3504, and is arranged between the support boss and the elevating guide groove. The elevating bush, the transmission bush inserted from the front side with respect to the transmission pin of the left link member and the right link member inserted into the slit of the slider, and the transmission bush arranged between the transmission pin and the slit, and the extension piece in the left link member. An arcuate gear retainer that is placed between the drive gear and attached to the unit base 3505, and an elevating position detection that can detect the slide position (elevation position) of the lower back decorative body 3501 that is attached to the front of the unit base 3505. It includes a sensor and a lower back relay board attached to the front surface of the unit cover to relay the connection between the lower back decorative board and the second drive board 3027.

Although not shown, the left link member of the underside effect unit 3500 is provided with a detection piece extending outward in the radial direction on the side opposite to the gear portion with respect to the rotation shaft core. By detecting with the elevating position detection sensor, the rotational position of the left link member can be detected, and thus the elevating position of the lower back decorative body 3501 can be detected.

In the under-back effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, when the under-back decorative body 3501 is located at the lower end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction, the under-back decorative body 3501 is located below the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. It is located and cannot be seen from the player side (retracted position) (see FIG. 110). On the other hand, in the state where the lower back decorative body 3501 is located at the upper end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction, the lower back decorative body 3501 is located in the upper window portion 2501 from the lower side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. It is in a state where it can be visually recognized from the player side (state of appearance position) (see FIG. 160). As shown in FIG. 160, the back upper decorative body 3306 of the back upper effect unit 3300 and the back lower decorative body 3501 of the back lower effect unit 3500 are in the state of appearance positions, respectively, at the lower end and the upper end. Are approaching to the extent that they do not touch.

[2-9. Liquid crystal display device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixed piece 1902. It has become like.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and protrudes from the left side of the front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the right side of the rear view of the back box 3010, and the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion slot formed by the lock mechanism 3040. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3040 downward to close the insertion slot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a peripheral control board box 1910 and a peripheral control board box 1910 that house a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 161), and the like on the rear side. It has a volume 1912 that extends rearward from the bottom of the. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes an inverter board box 1920 for accommodating an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode fluorescent lamp as a backlight on the left side of the peripheral control board box 1910 when viewed from the rear.

[2-10. Movable production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects of the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right middle production unit of the center accessory in the front unit, and FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right middle production unit is in the normal position. It is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above with the movable decorative body in the middle right of the table in the appearance position. Further, FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back side effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back top effect unit and the back bottom effect unit in the back unit. .. In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, under a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side through the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. It has become like.

Further, in the normal state of the game board 4, as shown in FIG. Located at the right end of 2501, the outer periphery of the circular fixed decorative body 2620 in the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is surrounded by the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 of the front right outer effect unit 2700. In this normal state, the fixed decorative body 2620 of the back right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be seen from the player side as a whole, while the rotating decorative body 2630 can be seen from the player side except for a part on the left side of the front view. It is invisible.

Further, under normal conditions, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back upper decoration body 3306 of the back upper effect unit 3300, and the back under decoration of the back lower effect unit 3500. The body 3501 is located outside the window portion 2501 of the front view center accessory 2500, and cannot be visually recognized from the player side.

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has the effect unit 2600 in the middle right of the table according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 from the normal state. The back-side effect unit 3100, the back-up effect unit 3300, and the back-down effect unit 3500 can be appropriately moved to perform a predetermined movable effect.

Specifically, for example, in the table right middle effect unit 2600, the annular rotary decoration body 2630 in the table right middle movable decoration body 2610 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by rotationally driving the table first drive motor 2651. be able to. At this time, as described above, since the rotating decorative body 2630 is in a state where only a part of the left side of the front view can be visually recognized from the player side, when the rotating decorative body 2630 is rotated in this state, the circular fixed decoration is formed. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the left side of the body 2620 flows upward or downward depending on the rotation direction.

Further, in the front right middle effect unit 2600, the base member 2660 supporting the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 by rotationally driving the table second drive motor 2671 is centered on the bearing portion 2662 formed at the upper end thereof. It can be rotated and can be rotated and moved from the normal position located on the far right side of the front view, which is a normal state, to the appearance position located on the front center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 157). ). In the state of this appearance position, as shown in FIG. 157, the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the front is moved from the outside production unit 2700 in the front right to the left in the front view, and only a part of the left side in the front view is from the player side. The rotating decorative body 2630 of the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table, which could not be visually recognized, comes off from the rear side of the outer peripheral decorative member 2730 in the middle right of the table, and most of them are visible from the player side.

By rotating the effect unit 2600 in the middle right of the table to the appearance position, the movable decoration body 2610 in the middle right of the table moves to a position closer to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the movable decoration body 2610 in the front right is moved from the player side. It can be made to stand out. By rotating the rotary decoration body 2630 by driving the first drive motor 2651 in the state where the movable decoration body 2610 in the middle right of the table is moved to the appearance position, the movable decoration body 2610 in the middle right of the table can be further conspicuous. It is possible to strongly attract the player's attention to the movable decorative body 2610 in the middle right of the table.

As shown in the figure, the guide piece 2664 extends to the upper right side of the front of the stage 2510 in the state of the appearance position, and the movable decorative body in the middle right of the table extends from the stage 2510 side. Even if the game ball bounces to the 2610 side, it can be bounced back to the stage 2510 side by the guide piece 2664.

The guide piece 2664 of the effect unit 2600 in the middle right of the table is located on the extension line on the right side of the front view of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520. Since it is guided by an arc-shaped groove (space), a game ball deviating from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) to the right is inside the groove (space) that guides the guide piece 2664. Even if it is housed and held (see FIG. 158 (a)), the game ball held and held is guided by the movement of the front right middle effect unit 2600 (table right middle movable decorative body 2610) from the normal position to the appearance position. The piece 2664 can be extruded to the left and returned to the stage 2510 side.

The guide piece 2664. (See FIG. 158 (b)), so that the player can be shown a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the movement of the game medium can be shown to the player. It is designed to entertain and prevent the decline in interest.

Further, in the back side effect unit 3100 of the game board 4, the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in the back side slide unit 3150 are driven to drive the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit. The 3100L can be moved from a position that cannot be seen from the player side (retracted position) to a position that can be seen from the player side (appearance position) by moving to the center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (appearance position). See Figure 159). When the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to the appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is displayed in the left-right direction by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. The width is narrowed vertically, and the rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged in three rows in the vertical direction are arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen that can be visually recognized from the player side, respectively, which is of interest to the player. Can be strongly attracted to the back right effect unit 3100R, the back left effect unit 3100L, and the liquid crystal display device 1900.

In this back-horizontal effect unit 3100, three rotary decorative bodies 3126 supported by the back-right effect unit 3100R and the back-left effect unit 3100L are separately extended in the vertical direction by the drive of the back-lateral rotation drive motor 3123. It can be rotated around the core, and when each rotating decorative body 3126 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is visible from the player side, they can be rotated. The movable effect of the rotation of the rotating decoration body 3126 can also be enjoyed.

Specifically, for example, when moving the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 to the appearance position, the rotation decoration body is driven by the back side rotation drive motor 3123 in the retracted position. The 3126 is rotated to stop it so that the surface with the predetermined decoration faces the player side, and then it is moved to the appearance position, and the rotation decoration body 3126 is rotated each time it is moved to the appearance position. It is also possible to make the stop position different. As a result, the decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 is different each time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are made to appear, and the player can be entertained by the difference in the appearance of the decoration.

Alternatively, when the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rotary decoration body 3126 is rotated by each back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 and then moved to the appearance position. You can also. As a result, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 that roll like rollers appear on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player's interest is strongly focused on the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. Can be attracted.

Further, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L may be moved to the appearance position, and then the rotation decoration body 3126 may be rotated by each back lateral rotation drive motor 3123, whereby the back right effect is produced. After covering the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, the rotating decorative body 3126 supported by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L rotates to play a game. It is possible to surprise the person, draw the player's attention to the rotating decorative body 3126 and the like, and enjoy the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3126.

Further, in the back-up effect unit 3300 of the game board 4, by driving the back-up drive motor 3302, the back-up decorative body 3306 is slid downward in an arc shape from the retracted position which cannot be seen from the player side. It can be moved to an appearance position that can be visually recognized from the person side. In the state where the back upper decorative body 3306 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. It is in a conspicuous state, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, in the under-back effect unit 3500 of the game board 4, by driving the under-back drive motor 3506, the under-back decorative body 3501 can be seen from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the upper side visible from the player side. It can be moved to the appearance position. In the state where the lower back decorative body 3501 appears, as shown in FIG. 160, it is in a state of extending upward from the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900. ..

In the game board 4 of this example, assuming that both the back-up effect unit 3300 and the back-up effect unit 3500 are moved to the appearance positions, as shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the back-up decoration body 3306 and the back-down decoration The upper end of the body 3501 is in a state of being close to each other, and a movable effect is performed as if the fist-like upper back decorative body 3306 is hitting the flame-like lower back decorative body 3501. Can be done.

Further, although not shown, the game board 4 has a movable effect by the front right middle effect unit 2600, a movable effect by the back side effect unit 3100, or a movable effect by the back upper effect unit 3300 and the back lower effect unit 3500. It has become possible to perform a movable effect by combining the above, and it is possible to present a wider variety of movable effects to the player so that the player will not get bored.

[3. Various boards]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 is the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. It includes a drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a. .. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and the main control built-in RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a has a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start port sensor 3081 that detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2102. Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3082 that detects the game ball received into the 2125 and the general winning opening 2104, 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the gate sensor 2126, the general winning opening. Detection signals from the sensor 3082, the count sensor 2114, and the magnetic detection sensor 3080 attached to the back unit 3000 are input via the panel relay board 3025 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It is designed to do.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2124 and the attacker are output via the panel relay board 3025. The first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, and the first special are output to the solenoid 2113 via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3025, and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the gate sensor 2126, and the count sensor 2114 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3082. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2105, so that the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2126 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, and the gate sensor 2126. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 2114 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 2114 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently detect by the general winning opening sensor 3082. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3082 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 161 of the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585 are performed. The launch control unit 4120 that controls, the error LED display 4130 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and the prize ball tank. It includes a 720, a tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4111a is operating normally (hereinafter, "external WDT4111c"). The payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and the payout control input circuit 4111e to which the detection signals from various detection switches related to the payout are input. , Is equipped. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), the payout control MPU4111a is used to prevent fraud. It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750 is input. , The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 is input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 first passes through the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first sent out from the payout control input circuit 4111e. Is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the device 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued to the payout control I / O port 4111b. It is serially transmitted to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4100, or the number of actually paid out game balls is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "count switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal of, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game ball), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (CR is not connected). Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control boards 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock" (specifically). Has reached a predetermined number of game balls that have not been paid out yet).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b first pass through the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Is input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and this signal is used for the payout control I / O. It is received at port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining degree display 365c, which is a CR unit connection terminal. It is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161 of the launch control unit 4120, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585, a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing. It includes a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the emission reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. Further, when the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

Based on the signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper dish 301 of the dish unit 300, and the constant current is triggered by the completion of the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. By stopping the output of the ball feeding member 584, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 161 of the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161 the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls the effect on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. It includes a sound source IC 4140c to be performed, and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various production units provided in 4. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. The door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc., and the door-side drive light emission data composed of the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the peripheral panel Serial I / O for the liquid crystal control unit to send control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base board 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 or to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting data from the port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d are output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various in-situ detection sensors for detecting the in-situ of various production units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU4140a via 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is monitored based on this operation signal. is doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It controls the flow of music and sound effects according to various effects from the speaker 821, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer built into the peripheral control MPU4140a (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), the peripheral control unit 4140 has an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "external peripheral control") (not shown). It is also described as "WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blinking command, the game board side lighting blinking command, and the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. , It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. A lighting signal or a lighting signal based on the LED of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 provided in the door frame 5 or received by the game board side lighting and blinking command The blinking signal is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 252, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided in the game board 4.

Further, the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to the dial drive motor 414 provided in the above, and each drive motor 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506, etc. provided in the game board 4.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via the first drive board 3026 or the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and relays the first drive board 3026, the second drive board 3027, etc. mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side. The main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 or the upper speaker 222, 262 of the door frame 5 via the terminal plate 882, or via the first drive board 3026, the second drive board 3027, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects are played from the speaker 821 of the above. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the bass speaker 821. , It has become possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than before.

[3-4. LCD control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for displaying and controlling the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 1900, the character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. It includes a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

This liquid crystal control MPU4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP4150c based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in control. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a receives an execution signal described later from the VDP4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, schedule data corresponding to the schedule data, and control data (display command) thereof. Multiple corresponding non-residential area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined.

The liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the screen data at the head of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the screen data at the head. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, the VDP4150c outputs an executing signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along a pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scan is for one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game content]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162 and the like. The functional configuration related to the payout of the game ball will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, effect controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a.

When a detection signal of a game ball is input from the gate sensor 2126 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 that generates a predetermined normal random number that is a lottery result for a normal symbol, and a generated normal random number are predetermined. The ROM of the main control board 4100 stores the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal symbol holding storage means 4202 that is temporarily stored according to the conditions of the above and the normal random number that is stored and executed by the normal symbol holding storage means 4202. The normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern. When the normal random number (normal lottery result) displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 by the normal symbol display control means 4206 is "normal hit", the start port solenoid 2124 is driven to retract (immerse) the movable piece 2106. It is provided with a start port opening / closing control means 4208 and a normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of normal symbol random numbers held and stored in the normal symbol hold storage means 4202 on the normal symbol storage display 1188 as a storage number. There is.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding storage means 4202 uses a predetermined number (for example, four) of ordinary random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2126 while the ordinary symbol is variablely displayed by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206. ), And the execution of the memorized ordinary random numbers is suspended until the variable display of the ordinary symbol becomes possible.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3081 due to the start winning to the first start port 2101. The first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number, the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to a predetermined condition, and the like. A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 for the first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored and executed by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214. The first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 is selected based on the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected from the table and the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216. The first special symbol display control means 4218 to be variablely displayed and the first special symbol storage display 1184 to display the number of the first special random numbers held and stored by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 as a storage number. It is provided with a symbol storage number display control means 4220.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2125 due to the start winning to the second start port 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number, a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition, and the like. A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 for the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored and executed by the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224. The second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 is selected based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected from the table and the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226. The second special symbol display control means 4228 to be variablely displayed and the second special symbol storage display 1187 to display the number of the second special random numbers held and stored by the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 as a storage number. It is provided with a symbol storage number display control means 4230.

The first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 have new special symbols such as the first and second special symbols being variablely displayed by the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228. When the variable display cannot be performed, a predetermined number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers triggered by detection signals from the first start port sensor 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125 (for example, four each). ), And the execution of the first special random number and the second special random number stored until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible is suspended.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 are given to the starting ports 2101, 1022 to win a prize. It is provided with a priority hold digestion means 4231 that preferentially executes (digests) the second special random number over the timing, and the priority hold digestion means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The hold of the lottery result is given priority and executed (digested).

Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second special lottery result) stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 are stored. The advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 that generates an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the special lottery result), and the opening / closing member 2107 that closes the large winning opening 2103 based on the instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232. It is equipped with a large winning opening opening / closing control means 4234 that drives and controls the attacker solenoid 2113 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern.

Further, on the main control board 4100, according to the first special random number or the second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern or second special symbol variation pattern) in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232, Further, the variation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol variation pattern table and the second special symbol variation pattern table is provided. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 may be changed to, for example, a variation pattern table (for example, a high probability variation pattern table) in which a variation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal variation pattern table (for example). Change to a variation pattern table (for example, time reduction variation pattern table) in which the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shorter than the normal variation pattern table (so-called probability variation) (so-called time reduction). It is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time reduction variation pattern table) in which the probability that an advantageous gaming state occurs is higher than usual and the variation time of the special symbol is short (so-called probability variation / time reduction).

Further, the main control board 4100 has a normal random number, a first special random number, a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol storage according to the second special random number. Command generation means 4238 that generates commands for predetermined control such as effect commands based on the second special symbol memory, etc., and command transmission means 4240 that sends commands generated by command generation means 4238 to peripheral control unit 4140. And have.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is generated by the game panel 1150 by the player rotating the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. It is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged in front of the player, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger it can be driven. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, it is centered by a plurality of obstacle nails or the inclined upper surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503. You will be guided to the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Further, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the outer periphery of the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the game area 1100 It enters the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 in the attacker unit 2100 through a narrow gap with the inner circumference, and is discharged into the game area 1100 directly above the gate portion 2105 from the front left end opening of the guide passage 2142a.

Then, when the game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 is guided by the guide passage 2142a and discharged into the game area 1100, it passes through the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability and the gate sensor 2126. Will be detected by. When the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result by the normal random number generation means 4200 based on the detection signal.

Based on this ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is displayed in a variable manner (for example, the ordinary symbol display 1189 composed of two red and green LEDs emits light alternately) for a predetermined time (for example). For example, the normal symbol extracted after the lapse of 0.1 seconds to 1 second and based on the normal random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (one of the two LEDs of the normal symbol display 1189 emits light). Ru. In this example, the same variation display is performed on the ordinary symbol display board 1191a provided in the second unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table in the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection means 4204.

Specifically, if the lottered ordinary random number is a "normal hit" random number, it will be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the lottered ordinary random number will be a "normal loss" random number. In the case of, the normal symbol suggesting a loss is displayed as a stop (the normal symbol display 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the movable piece 2106 that closes the second starting port 2102 retracts for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 6 seconds), and the second starting port 2102 is closed. A game ball can be awarded to 2102.

In this example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short compared to the conventional pachinko machine, so the game ball that passes through the gate 2105 and draws a "normal hit" is the second starting port. At the timing of reaching or not reaching the movable piece 2106 that closes the 2102, the movable piece 2106 is retracted by the starting port solenoid 2124 and can be accepted into the second starting port 2102. Is drawn, it is accepted to the second starting port 2102 with an extremely high probability.

Then, when the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 by drawing a "normal hit" through the gate portion 2104, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2125 and based on the detection signal of the second starting port sensor 2125. In the main control board 4100, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command, so that one game ball can be played. , It is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 301. That is, in this example, when the game ball performs a driving operation (so-called right-handed) passing through the right side of the center accessory 2500, it passes through the gate portion 2104 with an extremely high probability and also passes through the gate portion 2105. If a game ball that has passed through is drawn for a "normal hit", it will be accepted into the second starting port 2102 with an extremely high probability, so even beginners and players who are unfamiliar with the game can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2102. It can be made to entertain the player.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the player can easily make the second starting port 2102 win the game ball by hitting the right side, and therefore, by winning the second starting port 2102. If the number of game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed increases, and there is a risk of hesitating to install the pachinko machine 1. However, in this pachinko machine 1, since the number of game balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is one, the special lottery result by winning the second starting port 2102 is drawn. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player, and it is possible to install the pachinko machine 1 without any problem.

Further, in this example, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126 while the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol during the fluctuation is stopped and the normal symbol is generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is temporarily stored by the ordinary symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. It is designed to be held, and the number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of each LED that lights up suggests the number of storages. In this example, up to four LEDs are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of stored items exceeds four, the ordinary random numbers extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 are discarded.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2104 and a "normal loss" is drawn, the movable piece 2106 arranged directly under the gate portion 2105 and closing the second starting port 2102 closes the second starting port 2102. Since the game ball remains closed, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 comes into contact with the upper surface of the movable piece 2106 and rolls to the left from the left discharge port 2122f on the left shelf portion 2122g, and the left shelf. From the left end of the portion 2122g, it is discharged into the game area 1100 below the first starting port 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 and above the large winning opening 2103.

Further, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 under the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2202 of the front side unit 2200. It has become. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3082, the payout control is performed on the main control board 4100 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are moved up. It is designed to be paid out to the plate 301.

If the game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the game is played. It is provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction of the area 1100, and is discharged downward from the rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1151. Further, regardless of whether the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the game area 1100. It is designed to be discharged downward to the rear side of the game board 4 without being damaged.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is mainly the lowest portion after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is released forward from. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and is the most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. From the lowered portion, it is refluxed and discharged into the game area 1100 above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100.

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 enters the chance entrance 2513 opened on the left-right central rear side of the second stage 2512, it enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 opened directly above the first starting port 2101. It is released and is likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2101. Then, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3081, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are transmitted from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. However, it is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 301.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when it is desired to win a game ball in the first starting port 2101, a driving operation (so-called left-handed) is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. If you want to win a prize for the game ball to the second starting port 2102, you can drive the game ball so that it flows down the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed). It is possible to select the driving operation of the game ball according to the interest and mood, and it is possible to reflect the player's thoughts and entertain.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball refluxed and discharged from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 is not received by the first starting port 2101 and flows down to the lower right side of the first starting port 2101. , There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the big prize opening 2103. On the other hand, when the game ball refluxed and discharged from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 flows down to the lower left side of the first starting port 2101 without being received by the first starting port 2101, the general winning opening of the front side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by 2201.

In the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125. At the first starting port 2101, the first special random number generating means 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number, and at the second starting port 2102, the second special random number generating means 4222 generates a predetermined second special random number.・ Extraction is performed respectively. Then, based on the extracted special random numbers, it is extracted after the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode suggesting "big hit" in the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) is generated, and a game ball is won in the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired. When one game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

In these first starting port 2101 and second starting port 2102, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are also displayed in the same manner as the fluctuation display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2105. When the special symbol is variablely displayed in the device 1186, or when the special symbol cannot be variablely displayed, such as during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins a prize in the starting ports 2101, 1022 and the first starting port sensor. When detected by the 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125, they were extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125 until the variation display of the special symbol became possible. The first special random number and the second special random number are stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 to hold the display, and the stored special random number The number is displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187.

The first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of each LED that is turned off, turned on, and blinking. In this example, up to four of each are memorized and displayed. If the number of stored items exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. Further, the second special random number stored (held) by the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 by the priority holding digestion means 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214. It is designed to be executed (digested). That is, the holding of the lottery result relating to the second starting port 2102 and the third starting port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to the holding of the lottery result relating to the first starting port 2101.

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the special random number of the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125 are selected as the first special symbol variation pattern. By collating with the predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as the special symbol variation pattern table) determined in advance by the means 4216 or the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, the special random numbers are "missing" or "big hit". In addition to determining which one, the "big hit" is also determined to be one of "4R big hit", "8R big hit", and "16R big hit". In addition, the random number determination table also determines "probability variation time reduction hit", "probability variation hit", "time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit", and the like.

When the extracted first special random number or second special random number is a "big hit", the main control board 4100 determines the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 after being opened by the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232. An opening / closing pattern (1) that closes the opening / closing member 2107 when the time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy any of the conditions of winning the large winning opening 2103. The opening / closing pattern is called one round), which is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For "4R jackpot", 4 rounds, for "8R jackpot", 8 rounds, and "16R jackpot" If so, it is repeated for 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. After the end of the predetermined number of rounds, for the "big hit", the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time-saving table or the like by the variation pattern table changing means 4236 according to the extracted special random numbers.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (special lottery result). In addition to the variable display of the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, the liquid crystal display device 1900 also responds to a special random number (special lottery result). The production image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, a variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and then sequentially. When the stop display is displayed and all the symbol strings are finally stopped and displayed, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed after the plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed according to the special lottery result due to the start winning. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. We will pay attention to the design.

As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol columns are variablely displayed, a "reach effect image" is displayed so that the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed while leaving one variable symbol string satisfies a specific condition (reach). As a special lottery result in which this "reach production image" is displayed, there are "reach hit" and "reach loss". There is also a "reach development effect image" that is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and that emphasizes and displays the remaining symbol strings that are variablely displayed after the reach display. That is, the reach effect image and the reach development effect image are images used to perform a reach effect (winning effect) to imply that a big hit may be won, and as a result of these reach effects, a plurality of images are used. Depending on the stop mode displayed by the variable stop of the symbol sequence of, it is recognizable by the player whether it is a big hit or a loss. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game.

The variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 162). The fluctuation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It has become. As a result, since the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like controls the variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900, which the player pays particular attention to, a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100. For one command, a plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance to increase the number of symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game is also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the load of arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

In addition to controlling the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506 and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. The LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521,252, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided in the game board 4 are appropriately operated, and the LEDs are appropriately emitted. , It is possible to entertain the player with a movable effect and a light emitting effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the image effect by the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212) in the table unit 2000 are used. (Collaboration effect), image effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900, and compound effect using the effect units 2550, 2600, 2700, 3100, 3300, 3500 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. It is also possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored.

[4-1. Production example]
Subsequently, an example of the effect (example of the collaboration effect) by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. FIG. 163 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a simplified normal state facing from the window portion of the center accessory, and FIG. 163 (b) shows a back right effect unit and a back left effect unit while rotating the rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect example which divides the display screen of a liquid crystal display means into three, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which stopped the rotating decoration body following (b). Further, FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into six with respect to the appearance of the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit, unlike FIG. 163. Further, FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect in which the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit are made to appear at different rotation positions before appearing.

First, in the normal state, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 are located in the retracted positions where they are separated from each other and away from each other. The right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are respectively located on the left and right outside of the front view of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 are invisible from the player side due to the center accessory 2500 and the game panel 1150, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is invisible through the window portion 2501. Only the display screen of is mainly visible from the player side (see FIG. 163 (a)).

In this state, when the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is received by the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 and a predetermined special lottery result is drawn, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left The back-horizontal rotary drive motor 3123 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 provided in each of the effect unit 3100L is driven, and the three rotary decorative bodies 3126 arranged vertically are rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The rotation speed at this time is considered to be a speed that is difficult to recognize by the decoration applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating decoration body 3126.

With the three rotating decorative bodies 3126 provided in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L rotated, the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 of the back side slide unit 3150. The back right effect unit 3100R is slid to the left in the front view, and the back left effect unit 3100L is slid to the right in the front view.

On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display screen is divided into three upper and lower parts so as to correspond to the rotating decorative bodies 3126 which are vertically arranged in three rows on the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, respectively. Display different images.

Then, when the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid in the direction of approaching each other from the retracted position, three different images are displayed from the left and right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. A rotating rotating decorative body 3126 appears, and the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating rotating decorative body 3126 and each of the three-divided production images.

The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid to the appearance positions closest to each other in a state where each rotating decorative body 3126 is rotated (see FIG. 163 (a)). In the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L may be slid while swinging left and right until the appearance position is reached. It is possible to entertain the player by giving a sense of urgency to the player.

Then, when the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L reach the appearance position, the rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped. When the rotation of each rotating decoration body 3126 is stopped, decorations such as four patterns and patterns applied to the outer circumference of the rotating decoration body 3126 are decorated so as to correspond to the lottery special lottery result. The surface is stopped so as to face the player side (see FIG. 163 (c)). As a result, the result of the special lottery drawn is suggested to the player by the combination of the decorations represented by the plurality of (six in this case) rotating decorative bodies 3126, and the player's expectation for the game is raised. Can be done.

In this production, there are a pattern in which a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 are stopped all at once and a pattern in which the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 are stopped in sequence according to the result of the special lottery. Further, during this effect, the LED of the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3129 is appropriately emitted.

Further, as an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100, in the above effect as shown in FIG. 164, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted to each rotating decorative body 3126. On the other hand, it is possible to perform a production that divides into six so that each can be dealt with separately. In this effect, with each rotating decorative body 3126 rotated, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid to the appearance position, and the display screen is divided into six parts so as to correspond to each rotating decorative body 3126. (See FIG. 164 (a)).

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L have reached the appearance position, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 are sequentially stopped from rotating (see FIG. 164 (b)). ). In the rotation decoration body 3126 for stopping the rotation, when the rotation of all the rotation decoration bodies 3126 is stopped, the combination of each decoration facing the player side becomes a combination corresponding to the special lottery result drawn. , Each of the rotating ornaments 3126 is sequentially stopped.

After that, when the rotation of all the rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, the combination of the decorations in the rotating decorative body 3126 that is stopped and facing the player side suggests the result of the special lottery drawn to the player, and the player It is possible to raise the expectation for the game of (see FIG. 164 (c)).

In this effect, the light circulates around the six effect images while all the rotating decorative bodies 3126 are rotated with the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L as the appearance positions. There is a pattern in which the LEDs of the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3129 provided in the rotating decorative body unit 3120 are sequentially emitted. There is also a pattern in which the light emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 for stopping the rotation is blinked, or the LED of the back horizontal decorative substrate 3130 arranged next to the rotating decorative body 3126 is made to emit light. Further, there is also a pattern in which the rotating decorative body 3126 is luminescently decorated with a color corresponding to the color of the image divided into six and displayed respectively.

Further, as an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100, a normal state in which the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are located in the retracted positions (see FIG. 165 (a)). That is, in a state where the rotating decorative body 3126 cannot be visually recognized from the player side, the rotating decorative body 3126 is rotated, and then the surface decorated with a specific decoration according to the lottery special lottery result faces the player side. To stop the rotation. Then, in that state, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L were each slid to the appearance position, and the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L appeared and became visible from the player side. The decoration of the rotary decoration body 3126 (see FIGS. 165 (b1) and (b2)) causes the player to suggest the result of the special lottery drawn, and raises the player's expectation for the game.

As a result, each time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L (plural rotation decorations 3126) appear, the decoration of the rotation decoration 3126 seen from the player side is different (FIG. 165 (b1)). , (Refer to (b2)), so it is possible to excite the player by what kind of decoration the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L will appear, and the player will be more entertained and the interest will be reduced. It is possible to suppress the hobby.

[5. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU4100a) will be described. FIG. 166 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment is first applied to various registers and RAM as the process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the power-on, and the main control MPU 4100a inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is present, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the RAMs of various registers and the main control MPU4100a.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and the special symbol used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Reach with the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the variable display of the above special symbol. (The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed, or the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all displayed in a variable manner so that they are the same symbol. Reach random number used for lottery processing to determine whether or not to perform), and symbol random number used for lottery processing to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number (first It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as a symbol random number (a second symbol random number), a random number (ordinary random number) used for a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the movable piece 2105, and the like.

In this example, the reach random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first starting port 2101 is started and the starting prize is given, the second starting opening 2102 is given the starting prize. Even in this case, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is determined by acquiring from counters that have different ranges of random numbers that update the reach random number. It may be different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers, and is different from the first reach judgment table. By providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

FIG. 166 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

As shown in FIG. 166 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2126, the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and the general winning port sensor 3082 are transmitted. Entered. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated in the random number counter. A counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag, first) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a. (Ii) The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the movable piece 2106 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is basically selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the drive frequency of the movable piece 2106 is higher during the period from the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 4R big hit gaming state) to the big hit again. The lottery process is executed so as to be (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased until the jackpot is reached again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time required for controlling the variation display of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. When the result is a hit, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 is extended to realize such a time saving state.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18. ..

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning port sensor 3082, etc. as the process of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out the prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then executes a storage process for checking an increase / decrease in the number of start storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal for confirming the control state of the pachinko machine 1 outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. Will be.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3081. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passing process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2125 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S39) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the results of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped are "4R latent probability variation jackpot (specific 1)" and "4R probability variation jackpot". When the mode suggesting "(specific 2)" and "4R normal jackpot (non-specific)", the above-mentioned big winning opening 2103 is controlled to the open state according to the 4R jackpot game state, and "8R probability variable jackpot (specific)" is controlled. When the mode suggesting "4)" is obtained, the above-mentioned big winning opening 2103 is controlled to the open state according to the 8R big hit gaming state, and "16R sudden probability change big hit (specific 3)" and "16R probability change big hit (specific 5)" are controlled. ) ”, The process of controlling the big winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed according to the 16R big hit game state of opening for a short time or opening for a long time.

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S36), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the reserved storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S38). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S31, it is determined that the first start port sensor 3081 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. 168. First, as the process of step S41, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken in order to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S44, each random number thus acquired is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU4100a. Store in.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2125 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2102 in the process of step S33, as shown in FIG. 169. First, as the process of step S51, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the above-mentioned second special symbol is the maximum value "4".

If it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S54, each random number thus acquired is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU4100a. Store in.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since only the tables and tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S80)
2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 166).

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 171 of the same, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted by the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process is terminated.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S111), the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 will be in the high probability time shown in FIG. 206 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 206 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 173 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). It is provided with a jackpot determination table at the time of low probability used for, and a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that 10 types of first special random numbers have won the jackpot, and the deviation determination indicating that the 2390 types of first special random numbers are out of the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the low-probability jackpot determination table referenced for this, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that 10 types of second special random numbers have won the jackpot, and 2390 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that.

Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 20 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability match the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 2380 kinds of first special random numbers match the deviation determination value. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is in the low-probability state (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state)). ) And the time saving state (low probability time saving state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. 20 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit judgment table at low probability are hit by the same as the big hit judgment table at high probability. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the winner has been won and to match the deviation determination value indicating that the 2380 types of second special random numbers are out of order.

When the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S115). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set, the process is terminated (step S116), and the selected jackpot determination table and the first special read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are performed. If it is determined that the result is out of alignment as a result of comparison with the random number, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117).

The reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is a probabilistic change (high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state)). It is provided with a time reach determination table and a normal reach determination table used when the gaming state is the normal time (normal state). Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach random numbers do not match the reach determination value indicating that all 240 types of reach random numbers reach, and the above reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not achieved. Each is associated. In this way, at the time of probability change (high probability state), when it is determined that the reach is out of order, it is not determined that the reach is out of reach. Therefore, the reach flag described later is not set and the reach effect is executed. There is no. Therefore, when a reach is formed at the time of probability change and a reach effect is executed, it can be recognized that a big hit is achieved at that time.

Further, in the reach determination table at the normal time, the reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that the seven types of reach random numbers reach, and the reach random numbers indicate that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Are associated with each other. As described above, in the normal time (normal state), unlike the probability change time (high probability state), a reach determination value indicating reach is provided. Therefore, even if the reach is formed in the normal time and the reach effect is executed, it cannot be recognized whether or not the hit is a big hit until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

The main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 is the result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117), and when it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S118), the variation. Is set to the reach flag indicating that the reach is reached, and the process is terminated (step S119).

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 174, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S121).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 173 (C). (Step S122), the type of the jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S123).

As shown in FIG. 173 (C), the symbol determination table includes each determination result (specific 1 4R latent probability variation jackpot, specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot, specific 3 16R sudden probability variation jackpot, specific 4 8R probability variation jackpot, A symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) is stored in a form associated with the 16R probability variation jackpot of the specific 5 and the non-specific 4R normal jackpot. In the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the type of jackpot is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
The 1.4R jackpot gaming state (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated four times (4 rounds)) is controlled in a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, it is performed again. The 4R latent probability variation big hit of the specific 1 that controls the high probability non-time saving state until it becomes a big hit and executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the high probability state 2.4R. The specific 2 4R probability variable jackpot 3.16R jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot game state is controlled in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter the ball, and the high probability time saving state is controlled until the jackpot is reached again after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state. The opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated 16 times (16 rounds)) in a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the high probability is reached until the game becomes a big hit again after the end of the 16R big hit game state. Specific 3 16R sudden probability change big hit 4.8R big hit game state (repeating the opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 8 times (8 rounds)) is repeated 8 times (8 rounds) to make it easy for the game ball to enter. The 8R probability variable jackpot 5.16R jackpot game state of the specific 4 which is controlled and controlled to the high probability time saving state until the jackpot is reached again after the end of the 8R jackpot gaming state is controlled in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter the ball. After the end of the 16R big hit game state, the 16R probability variation big hit 6.4R big hit game state of the specific 5 that controls to the high probability time saving state is controlled in a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the 4R big hit game state is controlled. A non-specific 4R normal jackpot that controls the low-probability non-time saving state (normal state) after the end of the game and executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the high-probability state. One of the 6 types of jackpots is decided.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the 4R latent probability variation jackpot of the specific 1, the 4R probability variation jackpot of the specific 2, the 16R sudden probability variation jackpot of the specific 3, and the 16R sudden probability variation jackpot of the specific 3. While the distribution of judgment values is set for the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 4 and the non-specific 4R normal jackpot, the 4R latent probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is specified in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. Distribution of judgment values is set for 2 4R probability variation jackpot, specific 5 16R probability variation jackpot, and non-specific 4R normal jackpot.

In this example, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit gaming state between the specified 2, 4, 5 and the specified 1, 3 and the non-specified (opening control of the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100). Time to do) is different. Specifically, when the number is specified 2, 4, 5, the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 per round is controlled to be 30 seconds, whereas the specified 1, 3 or When it is not specified, the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 per round is controlled to be 0.05 seconds, which is extremely shorter than the long opening state. When controlled to such a short opening state, the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 per round is too short, so even if the opening control of the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is recognized, the above It is difficult to get a game ball to the large winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short open state in the big hit game state, the game ball rarely wins in the above-mentioned big winning opening 2103, and unlike the control of the long open state, it is expected that many game balls will be acquired. It is not possible (such a big hit is also called a "big hit with virtually no balls").

Further, when the type of the jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 4R latent probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is determined, the 4R latent probability variation jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined, and when the 4R latent probability variation jackpot of the specific 2 is determined, the 4R of the first special symbol is determined. If it is decided to be a probable change jackpot symbol, if it is decided to be a specific 3 16R sudden probabilistic jackpot, it is decided to be a 16R sudden probabilistic jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is decided to be a specific 4 8R probable change jackpot, it is the first special symbol. 8R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined, and when it is determined to be a non-specific 4R normal jackpot symbol, it is determined to be the 4R normal jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation is stopped (step S124).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, these lottery results (type of jackpot, loss of reach, or instruction of any one of the loss (the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) are displayed. A determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the instruction)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. After that, as the process of step S126, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). Peripheral control MPU4140a displays and controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU4140a specifies the 4R probability variation jackpot of the specific 2 out of the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. In that case, the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7") was determined, and the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 4 was specified among the jackpots. In the case, it is decided to be an 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". It is common with a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol), and a specific 5 16R probability variation jackpot is determined. Is determined as a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". Common to the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol and the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol). Then, when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the odd number of the same combination of decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7" as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the decorative symbol stops. It is not possible to discriminate between the 4R probability variation jackpot of the specific 2, the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specification 4, and the 16R probability variation jackpot of the specification 5, but it is high after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state, the 8R jackpot gaming state, or the 16R jackpot gaming state. It can be determined that the control is performed in a stochastic state. Then, until the effect result in the 4R jackpot gaming state is derived, it is not possible to determine whether or not to continuously control the 8R jackpot gaming state or the 16R jackpot gaming state after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a is a case where the 4R latent probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 among the jackpots is specified from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is determined to be a 4R latent probability variable jackpot symbol (combination of even-numbered identical decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6"), and if a non-specific 4R normal jackpot is specified among the jackpots, the 4R normal jackpot is specified. Determined for the jackpot symbol (combination of even-numbered identical decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6". Common to the 4R latent probability variation jackpot symbol), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (game) At the end of the effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of even numbers of the same decorative symbols of "2", "4", and "6" as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops fluctuating, the specified 1 is specified from the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. It is not possible to determine whether it is a 4R latent probability variable jackpot or a non-specific 4R normal jackpot, and it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state even after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state. Since the effect is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control the high probability state after the end of these jackpot gaming states.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU4140a, when the 16R sudden probability change big hit of the specific 3 out of the big hits is specified from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. Is determined to be a 16R sudden change jackpot symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols among the missed symbols (bare stitches). Specifically, for example, a combination of decorative symbols of "357"), and is specified from the variation pattern command. When the fluctuating time elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the decorative symbols of "357" as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, it is determined from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol whether it is a 16R sudden probability change jackpot of the specific 3 and 16R. It can be determined that the control to the high probability state is performed after the end of the big hit game state (16R big hit game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter).

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. (Combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same), and if the deviation is specified, the missing symbol without reach (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same). Is not the same), and the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as shown in FIG. 175. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S142) to reach. If the flag is set (step S143), the variation pattern table at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of a loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), the variation pattern table at the time of the loss is selected (step S145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S146), and the determination variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S149). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 only for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU4100a includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU4100a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect (for example, corresponding to the winning effect of the SP1 type and the SP2 type in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later) becomes the normal reach effect (for example, the winning effect of the normal type in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later). The expectation of a big hit is higher than that of (equivalent), and when the super reach effect is executed, the expectation of the player for the big hit gaming state is increased. A detailed description of the reach effect in the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described later.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. This process ends when the update is made.

In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time reduction time, the variation time information of one type of special symbol set to about 1 second is associated with all of the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In the form, a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol is set. On the other hand, in the non-time reduction variation pattern table, the variation time information of a plurality of types of special symbols set in the range of 10 to 120 seconds is associated with each of the above special symbol random numbers, and the variation of the special symbol. The pattern is set. That is, in the variation pattern table during the time reduction, the variation time information of the special symbol is set so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is as short as about 1 second as compared with the variation pattern table during the non-time reduction. ing.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 176, first steps S171. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of this step S173, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 177, first steps S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1185 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

Next, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game state (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, the time saving flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is set to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing. This process ends when the process is updated so as to be migrated (step S190). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and depends on the type of jackpot (4R latent probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 16R sudden probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 4R normal jackpot). It is prepared individually according to the situation. In step S187, the jackpot start command (4R latent probability variation jackpot start command, 4R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (4R latent probability variation jackpot, 16R sudden probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 4R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot start command, 16R sudden probability change jackpot start command, 8R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R probability variation jackpot start command, 4R normal jackpot start command,). As a result, the effect of the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speaker 130, 222, 262, and the like.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S801, the detection signal by the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, as shown in FIG. 178, the main As the process of step S802, the main control MPU4100a of the control board 4100 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit a normal figure", the movable piece 2106 retracts to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2102. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807) for executing a process to be controlled as possible.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 166).

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S801, the detection signal by the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, as shown in FIG. 179, the above. As the process of step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

If it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are used to newly put the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols into the pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the processing of step S821. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S822, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers with variable figures) are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. The random numbers (ordinary random numbers, variable random numbers in the normal figure) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2105 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 is a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S825), a non-time-saving normal figure hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time saving hit determination table used when the gaming state is non-time saving time (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure is used. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, it is always won, and the movable piece 2106 retracts to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2102. Is controlled as possible.

The movable piece 2106 is also generally referred to as an "electric chew". Further, when the movable piece 2106 is operated (retracted in this example), the game ball is easily received by the second starting port 2102. Therefore, such an operation of the movable piece 2106 is also called "opening", and the operation thereof is also called "opening". The duration is called the open time. In this example, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 is set to 5800 ms when the player wins the game in a short time. By setting a relatively long opening time in this way, it is possible to prolong the period during which the right-handed game ball can enter the second starting port 2102. Further, in the later normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined, but in this example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the time saving time is set to be shorter than the conventional time. , The ratio of the movable piece 2106 in the open state is further increased. Specifically, for example, the time during which the normal symbol is changed is 80 ms, and the time during which the normal symbol whose fluctuation has stopped is displayed is 500 ms. Further, the interval period from the closing of the movable piece 2106 (after the end of the open state) to the start of the next fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to 464 ms.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 in a short time by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as described above, the normal symbol is reached before the game ball reaches the movable piece 2106. It is possible to end the variable display of the above and make it in time for the opening of the movable piece 2106 by winning the normal figure. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 in a short time will be accepted by the second starting port 2102. By providing such a characteristic configuration, the pachinko machine 1 facilitates entry into the second starting port 2102 in a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and the second starting port 2102. The second special lottery, which is based on the entry into the ball, can be continuously executed without interruption. In other words, it is easy to maintain or increase the number of holdings of the second special lottery displayed on the second special symbol storage display 1187. It should be noted that the characteristics of such a normal hit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment are also described in Chapters [5] and [8].

In addition, in the non-time saving normal random number hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it may match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that all 251 kinds of normal random numbers have been won per normal random number. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal map, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. In this way, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 during non-time reduction, the movable piece 2106 retracts to the second starting port 2102 because it is not won in the normal drawing. There is no control over the acceptance of the game ball.

When the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol hit as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S831), while the normal symbol changes when it is determined to be out of order as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S832). Then, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process is terminated.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 181, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU4140a performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is cleared. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady state process. In the 2ms steady processing, a process of counting up the 16ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16ms progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S503), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady-state process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speaker 130, 222, 262 and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady state process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the peripheral control MPU 4140a analyzes a command (for example, an effect command) received from the main control board 4100, and according to the analysis result, of a plurality of types of flags stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e. Of these, set the flag corresponding to the command.

In the effect control process of step S602, the control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. The command received from the main control board 4100 is, for example, a process corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting). The variation pattern command transmitted by being set in (process)), to be set in the start port passage process (steps S45 and S47 of the first start port pass process, steps S55 and S57 of the second start port pass process). It is a hold number specification command, a random number specification command, etc. sent by. In the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control ROM 4140b has an "effect pattern" as a display effect pattern performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in association with each variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Each is remembered. In the effect control process of step S602, the peripheral control MPU4140a determines an effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command, and causes the liquid crystal display MPU4150a to execute a display effect based on the effect pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1900. .. The detailed processing of the effect control processing will be described later.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 3013 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating a random number (for example, a look-ahead random number) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16ms steady processing is completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady state process, only the 16 ms progress flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms progress flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady state process, the 16 ms steady state process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

Hereinafter, detailed processing of the effect control processing (step S602 in FIG. 182) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the effect control processing. As shown in FIG. 183, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes any of the processes of steps S1210, S1220, and S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. The process selection flag is held in, for example, the peripheral control RAM 4140e.

In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting is made to start the decorative symbol variation display if the variation pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the fluctuation pattern command and the jackpot command, and the advance notice effect and the like are set. Here, the jackpot command is one of the commands received from the main control board 4100 by the peripheral control MPU 4140a in step S601 of FIG. 182, and is a command indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. For the received jackpot command, the information regarding the jackpot indicated by the command is analyzed by the command analysis process of step S601.

In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is "1", the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (step S1220) receives a variation stop command related to the variation stop of the special symbol from the main control board 4100 by the peripheral control MPU4140a. In particular, a display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a) to control the variable display of the decorative pattern to be stopped.

In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, the peripheral control MPU4140a displays the liquid crystal display via the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in response to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. The device 1900 is controlled to display the start of the big hit game state and the display during the big hit game state (for example, round display, etc.).

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the decorative symbol variation start processing. As shown in FIG. 184, first, the peripheral control MPU4140a determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1211). The variation pattern reception flag is set in the command analysis process (step S601) described above, and is a flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. The variation pattern reception flag is held in, for example, the peripheral control RAM 4140e. If the variation pattern reception flag is not set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU4140a determines that the variation pattern command has not been received and ends the process.

When the variation pattern reception flag is set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU4140a resets the variation pattern reception flag (step S1212), and the variation pattern based on the received variation pattern command generates a big hit (variation pattern). It is determined whether or not it is a hit pattern) (step S1213).

When the variation pattern is a hit pattern in step S1213 (YES in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU4140a determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol forming the jackpot symbol array suggesting a jackpot based on the variation pattern (YES in step S1213). Step S1214). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is not a hit pattern in step S1213 (NO in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU4140a determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol forming the missed symbol array suggesting the missed pattern based on the variable pattern. (Step S1215).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is a symbol displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and changes with changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the special symbol. The stop is displayed in a mode corresponding to the stop mode of. That is, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a hit (big hit), the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the hit pattern is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 (peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral). It is transmitted to the control MPU4140a), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the stop symbol forming the jackpot symbol array. Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "missing" that is not a hit (big hit), a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fluctuation pattern of a missed pattern that is not a hit pattern is peripherally controlled from the main control board 4100. It is transmitted to the substrate 4010 (peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral control MPU4140a), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached mode, and the decorative symbol is also stopped at the stop symbol forming the detached symbol array. Is displayed.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes a advance notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect based on the advance notice determination random number (step S1216), and the effect pattern based on the variation pattern (details will be described later). , The effect time (variation time) determined based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), the advance notice pattern stored in the advance notice type storage area, and the advance notice pattern determined in steps S124 and S1215. Set the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the display command according to it. In the case of a pachinko machine that does not have a notice effect, the advance notice selection process in step S1216 is unnecessary, and even in the processes after step S1217, information processing related to the advance notice effect (for example, input / output to the advance notice type storage area). Processing) becomes unnecessary. After that, the peripheral control MPU4140a updates the process selection flag to "1" (step S1218) and ends the process.

The display command set in step S1217 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S605 in FIG. 182). The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 starts variable display of the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received display command. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives an effect stop command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits the effect stop command to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a decorative pattern based on the received effect stop command. Ends the variable display of.

Further, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read out in step S1217, the content of the notice type storage area is cleared after reading the notice pattern, so that the next decorative pattern is changed. At the time of display, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect based on the advance notice pattern determined at the time of starting the variable display of the previous decorative symbol from being erroneously executed.

[6-1. Determining the production pattern including the winning effect]
Next, the “effect pattern based on the fluctuation pattern” described in step S1217 of FIG. 184 will be described in detail. The "effect pattern" is determined by the peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 based on the variation pattern (of the special symbol) determined by the main control board 4100, in other words, the "variation pattern of the decorative symbol". Is. As the effect pattern (variation pattern of the decorative pattern), the pattern to be executed is determined from a plurality of types of effect patterns stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like. Such effect patterns include a variable pattern that can execute a display effect including a winning effect (effect pattern including a winning effect) and a variable pattern that can execute a display effect that does not include a winning effect (effect pattern that does not include a winning effect). ). Strictly speaking, the winning effect includes an effect that forms a reach state and an effect that suggests whether or not a big hit will occur after that (post-reach effect). Called (reach production).

Then, the peripheral control MPU4140a advances the effect according to the effect content indicated by the determined effect pattern. In this case, the peripheral control MPU4140a outputs the sound from the speakers 121 and 391 by outputting the control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c, and outputs the drive command to the motor drive board 3013a to output the fist gun unit 3075. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by operating and outputting a display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (liquid crystal control MPU 4150a). In the following, among such effect patterns, the effect patterns including the winning effect will be described in detail.

FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the determination result and the effect time in the special symbol variation pattern. As described above in FIGS. 174 and 175, the main control board 4100 sets a determination result notification command (step S125) based on the result of the special lottery and a variation pattern command (step S147) according to the variation pattern of the special symbol. .. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100. FIG. 185 summarizes an example of the relationship between the special lottery result (determination result) and the variation time (effect time) for the special symbol variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 in this way. In FIG. 185, as an example, for a part of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (see step S146 in FIG. 175), the determination result of the special lottery (in this case, the result of the first special lottery in the normal state) and the production time (in this case). The relationship with (variation time) is shown (special symbol variation pattern table). In the following explanations regarding the winning effect, the first special symbol will be described for the sake of brevity, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The determination result column of FIG. 185 is divided into "missing", "low hit", and "high hit" based on the special lottery result notified by the determination result notification command. For example, in the “missing” column of FIG. 185, a variation pattern transmitted in combination with a determination result notification command for notifying “missing” or “reaching loss” is summarized. In addition, in FIG. 185, the fluctuation patterns having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or more are summarized, and the reach flag is set (reach is formed) in all the fluctuation patterns of the deviation pattern in such a relatively long fluctuation time. ). In other words, the variation pattern of "off" shown in FIG. 185 is a variation pattern corresponding to a special random number such that "with reach" is selected in the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B), so-called. It is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to "out of reach" (in the following description in this section, it is simply referred to as "out of reach" or "out of reach pattern" for the sake of brevity). The peripheral control MPU4140a that has received such a special symbol variation pattern of the deviation pattern has a variation pattern (effect pattern including the winning effect) in which the display effect including the winning effect is executed as the effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern. Select and set a display command based on the selected variation pattern or the like (see step S1217 in FIG. 184).

Further, in the "low hit" column of FIG. 185, the fluctuation patterns transmitted in combination with the determination result notification command for notifying the big hit corresponding to the "low hit" are summarized, and the "high hit" column of FIG. The variation pattern transmitted in combination with the judgment result notification command for notifying the big hit corresponding to the "high hit" is summarized in.

Here, "high hit" and "low hit" used in the present embodiment are tentative names when a plurality of types of big hits in the pachinko machine 1 are classified based on a predetermined criterion regarding the degree of advantage. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of types of jackpots. Specifically, for example, a round at the time of a jackpot such as "4R jackpot", "8R jackpot", or "16R jackpot". There are different numbers of jackpots. Further, for example, there are big hits such as "probability change" and "time reduction" in which the game state controlled after the big hit is different. In addition to this, it is also possible to consider a big hit (a big hit with a relatively long opening time and a relatively short big hit, etc.) in which the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2103 is different in each round during the big hit.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a plurality of types of big hits are classified into "high hits" having a relatively high degree of advantage and "low hits" having a lower degree of advantage than "high hits". It is possible to make a difference in the distribution ratio of the winning effect, which will be described later, depending on whether the big hit is a "high hit" or a "low hit".

In the following description of the embodiment, as an example, the probabilistic jackpot is referred to as "high hit", and the other jackpot (so-called normal jackpot) is referred to as "low hit". That is, in the specific type of jackpot exemplified in FIG. 173 (C), the specific 1 to the specific 5 correspond to the "high hit", and the specific 6 corresponds to the "low hit". According to the example of FIG. 173 (C), in the special lottery by the first special symbol (first special lottery), the case where the first symbol random number is "40-199 (160 pieces)" is "high hit". Since the case where the first symbol random number is "0-39 (40 pieces)" is "low hit", the ratio of "high hit" to "low hit" by the first special lottery is 160: 40 = 4: However, in the following, for the sake of simplicity, the ratio of "high hit" to "low hit" by the first special lottery will be described as 1: 1. Further examples regarding the classification and setting of "high hit" and "low hit" will be described in detail in [6-5].

FIG. 185 exemplifies how much the effect time (variation time) of the variation pattern is for each category of the determination result of the special symbol. For example, in the case of "off", 34% is a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, 50% is a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, 15% is a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and 1% is a fluctuation time of 120 seconds. At this time, the average fluctuation time at the time of "off" is 32 seconds. Similarly, in the case of "low hit" or "high hit", 5% is a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, 50% is a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, 60% is a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and 10% is a fluctuation time of 120 seconds. It will be time. Then, the average fluctuation time at the time of "low hit" or "high hit" is 56.5 seconds. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of the special symbol as shown in FIG. 185, when the reach effect appears, it is the average when the effect result is a hit (low hit or high hit) than when the effect result is out of order. Fluctuation time tends to be long.

Further, considering the breakdown of the determination results when the fluctuation times are the same with reference to FIG. 185, the distribution is described with the denominator as 100 for all of "missing", "low hit", and "high hit". Therefore, it is possible to calculate the appearance ratio of each determination result when the fluctuation time is used as a reference from the distribution ratio of each determination result. For example, when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds, the distribution number of each judgment result is 50 for "missing", 25 for "low hit", and 25 for "high hit", so that the appearance ratio is "missing". : "Low hit": "High hit" = 50:25:25 = 2: 1: 1. Also, since "big hit" is the total of "low hit" and "high hit", the appearance ratio of "missing" and "big hit" when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is "missing": "big hit" = 50:50 = 1: 1. That is, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the "missing" and the "big hit" appear on a one-to-one basis, and the degree of expectation (reliability) for winning the big hit is 50%.

Also, considering the low hit and the high hit separately, the low hit and the high hit are due to the above-mentioned relationship of "missing": "low hit": "high hit" = 50:25:25 = 2: 1: 1. When the appearance ratio of is 1, the appearance ratio of the deviation is 2. At this time, 1/4 (25%) becomes a low hit or a high hit, and 2/4 (50%) becomes a miss. Therefore, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the degree of expectation of winning the "low hit" and the degree of expectation of winning The expectation of winning a "high hit" is 25% each.

[6-1-1. Distribution of production patterns with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (1)]
FIG. 186 is a diagram (distribution table 1A) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The effect pattern (variation pattern of the decorative pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, but if the effect pattern determined in that way is an effect pattern including a win effect (reach effect), the effect is performed. An effect pattern to be executed (substantially, there is no problem even if it is read as a winning effect to be executed) is selected from the plurality of effect patterns possessed. FIG. 186 illustrates the distribution of the selection of the effect pattern including such a winning effect, and the distribution of the effect pattern used when the variation time is “30 seconds” as the variation pattern of the special symbol. It is a table, and the effect time (variation time of the decorative pattern) of each winning effect shown in FIG. 186 is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the jackpot is won with a probability of 50% (reliability 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, the result of the special lottery is half (50%) a big hit, and the variation time of the special symbol is "30 seconds". It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effect shown in FIG. 186 is an example for simply explaining, and does not limit the type and type of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like in advance, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can read them as needed.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the game result in the peripheral control RAM 4140e or the like when an effect pattern including a specific winning effect is selected and executed, and the decorative symbol is removed and stopped in the symbol arrangement due to the winning effect. (Record of battle history) In the subsequent games, it is possible to change the distribution in which the effect pattern including the winning effect is selected from the plurality of effect patterns. The specific contents regarding the fluctuation of the distribution will be described with reference to FIG. 186. It should be noted that the effect pattern including the "specific winning effect" is an effect pattern in which the "specific winning effect" is executed, and selecting and determining such an effect pattern is substantially "specific winning effect". Is synonymous with selecting and deciding. Therefore, in the following description, for the sake of brevity, "winning effect" may be described instead of "effect pattern including winning effect".

First, the "type" in FIG. 186 is a type in which the winning effect is roughly classified, and "normal", "SP1", and "SP2" are provided as an example. The winning effect included in "SP1" and "SP2" corresponds to the winning effect generally called super reach, and is a big hit than when the "normal" type winning effect appears. Expectation (reliability) is set relatively high. In FIG. 186, as an example, the types are roughly classified based on the effect content of the winning effect, and in the winning effect of the "SP1" type, the effect of the mode in which the story progresses progresses, and the big hit (the result of the progress). And its type) is displayed in a recognizable manner. Further, in the winning effect of the "SP2" type, as an example, the effect in the battle format progresses, and it is displayed in a mode in which it is possible to recognize whether it is a big hit (and its type) or not depending on the progress result. In addition, the winning effect, which is different from "SP1" and "SP2", is classified as a "normal" type. Although the details will be described later, the distribution of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is based on the appearance status of the winning effect (which winning effect was selected and executed, and the winning effect is linked to the big hit. It has the characteristic that the distribution content is changed by accumulating "battle history" according to the accumulation of battle history, etc., but the "initial setting" (corresponding to battle history P) before receiving the change due to the accumulation of battle history. In the above, it is assumed that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot for each type is set higher in the order of "normal", "SP1", and then "SP2". The contents of the winning effect shown in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192 with specific examples.

The "effect name" in FIG. 186 is an example of the name of each winning effect. For example, "normal" and "long" are described in the production names included in the "normal" type, and "story A", "story B", and "story C" are described in the production names included in the "SP1" type. Is described, and "Battle A", "Battle B", and "Battle C" are described in the production names included in the "SP2" type. "A" to "C" in "SP1" and "SP2" distinguish characters, scenes, and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the time of executing each winning effect.

Further, the "battle history" in FIG. 186 is a division indicating a combination of winning effects, and which battle history distribution is used is selected based on the appearance status of the winning effects with the progress of the game. Will be done. With reference to FIG. 186 specifically for the distribution of the winning effect, for example, when "battle history P" is used, peripheral control is performed based on the fact that a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-order pattern is received from the main control board 4100. As for the winning effect determined by MPU4140a, the "normal" winning effect (normal reach) is selected for 30 distributions (that is, 30%) of the denominator 100, and the "long" winning effect is selected for 14 distributions (14%). The production (long reach) is selected, and the winning effect (story A reach) of "Story A" is selected with 20 distributions (20%) (corresponding to the distribution "X1-P" in FIG. 186). In the distribution "X1-P", the most easily selected of all the winning effects is the normal reach, and the most difficult to select is the winning effect of "Battle C" (Battle C reach). Further, the winning effect determined by the peripheral control MPU4140a based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the low hit pattern from the main control board 4100 is the distribution (1%) of one of the denominators 100. The "normal" winning effect (normal reach) is selected, the "long" winning effect (long reach) is selected with 3 distributions (3%), and the "story A" winning effect is selected with 3 distributions (3%). The production (story A reach) is selected (corresponding to the distribution "Y1-P" in FIG. 186). In the distribution "Y1-P", the winning effect of "Battle C" (Battle C reach) is most likely to be selected from all the winning effects. Further, in the battle history P of FIG. 186, the distribution of the high hit pattern (corresponding to the distribution "Z1-P" of FIG. 186) is set to be the same as the distribution "Y1-P" of the low hit pattern. The same applies to the winning effect determined in the case of the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the high hit pattern.

In addition, in FIG. 186, at least a part of the distribution of the winning effect selected at the time of winning (big hit) is set to be different for each battle history. Here, as an example, the combination of distributions as the initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is set as "battle history P", and based on the execution of a specific winning effect that stops at the out-of-order symbol arrangement, "battle history Q" and further "battle history" It is assumed that the selection destination shifts to "R". Speaking of each lottery result of the special lottery, when the selection destination of the battle history is "Battle history Q", the distribution "X1-Q" is the distribution "X1-Q" at the time of "missing", and the distribution "Y1-Q" is the distribution "Y1-Q" at the time of "low hit". At the time of "high hit", the distribution "Z1-Q" is used. When the selection destination of the battle history is "Battle history R", the distribution "X1-R" is used when "missing", the distribution "Y1-R" is used when "low hit", and the distribution "Z1" is used when "high hit". -R "is used. Then, as a specific example of the transition condition in which the selection destination of the battle history shifts, when the winning effect of "Battle A" is selected at the time of "missing" (that is, when the losing battle A reach appears), once. Each time it is selected, the selection destination will shift from "Battle History P" to "Battle History Q" and then "Battle History R", and after the selection destination becomes "Battle History R", until the big hit is won. It is assumed that the selection destination is not changed from "Battle History R". In the following, what kind of effect pattern is selected when FIG. 186 is used according to such a transition condition of the battle history will be described.

First, in the case of "Battle History P", which is the selection destination of the distribution in the initial setting, the ratio of Battle A reach selected among the outlier production patterns is 12%, and the battle is out of the winning production patterns. The percentage of A reach selected is 8%. In response to the display command based on the winning effect (including the effect pattern) selected in this way, the battle A reach is displayed (appears) on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the case of an effect pattern that is out of order. , The decorative symbol stops fluctuating in the off mode, and in the case of a hitting effect pattern, the decorative symbol fluctuates and stops in the big hit mode. The effect pattern that is a hit includes an effect pattern that indicates a low hit and an effect pattern that indicates a high hit. In the case, the decorative symbol usually stops fluctuating in the jackpot mode of the big hit, and in the case of the effect pattern showing a high hit, the decorative symbol fluctuates and stops in the jackpot mode of the probable variable jackpot. Alternatively, in addition to this, the same decorative symbol may be stopped to fluctuate regardless of whether it is a low hit or a high hit, and it may be taught whether it is a low hit or a high hit during the big hit game. By doing so, even if the result of the special lottery is a low hit, it is possible to give the player the expectation for a high hit and to play the big hit game.

Here, the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 is used when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and as described above with reference to FIG. 185, the breakdown of the determination result when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is ". "Loss": "Low hit": "High hit" = 2: 1: 1 and "Loss": "Big hit" = 1: 1. Therefore, when the distribution table of FIG. 186 is used, the expected degree of winning for "low hit" and the expected degree of winning for "high hit" are 25%, respectively, and the expected degree of winning for "big hit" is. It is 50%.

Further, by referring to the fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 185) and the distribution table (FIG. 186), it is possible to calculate the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific winning effect appears. The degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific winning effect appears can be calculated by the ratio of "the distribution per distribution to which the appearance ratio is distributed" to "the total sum of each distribution to which the individual appearance ratio is distributed". .. For example, considering the degree of expectation for a big hit when a battle A reach appears in the battle history P, referring to FIG. 186, the low hit distribution is 8 (distribution Y1-P), and the high hit distribution. The minute is 8 (distribution Z1-P), and the out-of-order distribution is 12 (distribution X1-P). Then, from FIG. 185, each appearance ratio has a deviation of 2 while the low hit and the high hit are 1 respectively. From the above, the degree of expectation of a big hit when Battle A reach appears in battle history P is
[(8 × 1 + 8 × 1) / ((8 × 1 + 8 × 1) + (12 × 2))] × 100
It is shown that it is "40.0%" by using the calculation formula of.
In addition, regarding the degree of expectation for high hits when Battle A reach appears in battle history P, [(8 × 1) / ((8 × 1 + 8 × 1) + (12 × 2))] × 100
It is shown that it is "20.0%" by using the calculation formula of.

Also in the following description, the expected degree (reliability) of the big hit is calculated by using the method as described above, but the calculation formula in the middle is omitted as appropriate.

Next, when the off-season A reach was selected in the battle history P, the peripheral control MPU4140a did not win the big hit due to a specific winning effect (here, the battle A reach) (in other words, the out-of-order). When a specific winning effect has appeared) and the predetermined conditions are met (in the latter example, when the flag value of the effect result storage flag becomes "1"), the subsequent game Change the selection destination of the distribution of the winning production in "Battle history Q".

Here, as a method of "recording the battle history" for recording that the jackpot was not won due to a specific winning effect, for example, a predetermined flag (effect result storage flag) is held in the peripheral control RAM 4140e, and the peripheral control MPU4140a is used. Should update (add) the flag value. The update timing of the flag value for the effect result storage flag is not limited to the time when the battle A reach is selected. For example, the display effect by the battle A reach appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the decorative pattern is removed. It may be the timing of stopping, the timing of stopping a special symbol in the game, or the like. In any case, the peripheral control MPU4140a determines the selection destination of the distribution according to the flag value of the effect result storage flag that is rewritten based on the appearance of a specific winning effect (outlier battle A reach). For example, if the flag value of the effect storage flag is "0", the battle history P is selected, and if the flag value is updated (added) to "1", the battle history Q is selected. Then, when the flag value is updated (added) to "2", the strategy R may be selected. Further, the information stored at the time of "recording the battle history" is limited to a form such as a flag (effect result storage flag) whose value is changed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition as described above. is not it. For example, a command or data that can specify a reach pattern corresponding to a specific winning effect may be stored, and the storage destination is not limited to the storage medium of the peripheral control board 4010, but is not limited to the storage medium of the peripheral control board 4010. A storage medium such as a storage medium of 4100 or another substrate, or a plurality of them may be stored.

In this example, the information related to "recording of battle history" is stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e by the peripheral control MPU4140a, but when the information related to "recording of battle history" is managed by the peripheral control board 4010 in this way. Since the peripheral control MPU4140a can select the effect pattern of the decorative symbol based on the "record of battle history" under the condition that the variation time of the special symbol shown in the variation pattern of the special symbol is within the fluctuation time of the special symbol. It is possible to realize various production selections that do not correspond to the fluctuation pattern and one-to-one. Further, as another example, when the information regarding the "record of battle history" is managed by the main control board 4100, the main control MPU4100a may select the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "record of battle history". , It is also possible to change the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the "record of battle history". Then, for example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, the time required for one game digestion is shortened, so that it can be expected that the number of rotations per unit time is improved and the game efficiency is improved. Further, for example, by extending the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it is possible to reduce the non-rotating period in which the symbol is not variablely displayed, so that the effect of extending the period during the game and making it difficult for the interval between games to occur can be expected.

In "Battle History Q", a part of the distribution in the winning production pattern is changed as compared with "Battle History P". Refer to FIG. 186 to confirm the specific change contents of the distribution. To change each distribution, the distribution X1-P and the distribution X1-Q may be compared for the out-of-order pattern, and the distribution Y1-P and the distribution Y1-Q may be compared for the low hit pattern. Often, for the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-P and the distribution Z1-Q may be compared. At this time, in the out-of-order pattern and the low hit pattern, there is no change in the distribution content even if the battle history P is changed to the battle history Q. However, in the high hit pattern, the story A reach distribution is reduced by 2 from "3" to "1", and the story B reach distribution is reduced from "5" to "3" in the winning effect of SP1 type. It decreases, and the distribution of Story C reach is reduced by 5 from "10" to "5". In total, the distribution of winning effects (story A to C) for all SP1 types is reduced by 9 from "18" in battle history P to "9" in strategy Q. Furthermore, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the battle A reach is increased by 9 from "8" to "17" among the winning effects of the SP2 types, and the distribution of the winning effects (battles A to C) of the entire SP2 types is In the battle history P, what was "78" becomes "87" and increases by 9.

Further, when the distribution by "Battle history Q" is compared with the case of "Battle history P" according to the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit when each winning effect appears, it is as follows. The reliability of each winning effect is calculated in the same manner as the reliability of the battle A reach described above.

First, regarding the reliability of big hits (combined low hits and high hits) in "Battle History P" and "Battle History Q",
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A Reach is 13.0% (6/46 x 100),
Story B reach reliability is 33.3% (10/30 x 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 62.5% (20/32 x 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 33.3% (36/108 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A Reach is 40.0% (16/40 x 100),
Battle B reach reliability is 80.0% (40/50 x 100),
The reliability of Battle C Reach is 94.3% (100/106 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 79.6% (156/196 × 100).
On the other hand, in the battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A Reach is 9.1% (4/44 x 100),
Story B reach reliability is 28.6% (8/28 x 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 55.6% (15/27 x 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 27.3% (27/99 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A Reach is 51.0% (25/49 x 100),
Battle B reach reliability is 80.0% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 94.3% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 80.5% (165/205 × 100).

That is, when comparing "Battle History P" and "Battle History Q" with respect to the degree of expectation for a big hit, in "Battle History Q", each winning effect (story A to C) and type of SP1 type is compared with "Battle History P". While the expectation for the big hit in the whole is lowered, the expectation for the specific winning effect (Battle A) of the SP2 type and the big hit in the whole type is improved. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the winning effects (battles B and C) other than the specific winning effects among the SP2 types does not change.

The change in expectation (reliability) as described above becomes remarkable especially in high hits. Regarding the reliability of high hits (expectation for high hits) in "Battle History P" and "Battle History Q",
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A Reach is 6.5% (3/46 x 100),
Story B reach reliability is 16.7% (5/30 x 100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 31.3% (10/32 x 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 16.7% (18/108 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A Reach is 20.0% (8/40 x 100),
Battle B reach reliability is 40.0% (20/50 x 100),
The reliability of Battle C Reach is 47.2% (50/106 × 100),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 39.8% (78/196 × 100).
On the other hand, in the battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A Reach is 2.3% (1/44 x 100),
Story B reach reliability is 10.7% (3/28 x 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 18.5% (5/27 x 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 9.1% (9/99 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A Reach is 34.7% (17/49 x 100),
Battle B reach reliability is 40.0% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 42.4% (87/205 × 100).

That is, when comparing "Battle History P" and "Battle History Q" with respect to the degree of expectation for high hits, in "Battle History Q", each winning effect (story A to C) of SP1 type is compared with "Battle History P". Expectations for high hits in all types are greatly reduced. For example, the reliability of high hits for all SP1 types has dropped from 16.7% in battle history P to 9.1% in battle history Q. On the other hand, the expectation for a specific winning effect (battle A) of the SP2 type and a high hit in the entire type is greatly improved. For example, the reliability of high hits in Battle A has improved from 20.0% in Battle History P to 34.7% in Battle History Q. Further, the degree of expectation for a high hit in the winning effects (Battles B and C) other than the specific winning effects among the SP2 types does not change like the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Next, when the off-season Battle A reach is selected in the battle history Q, the peripheral control MPU4140a did not win the big hit due to the specific winning effect (here, the battle A reach) as in the case of the battle history P. This is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 4140e (effect result storage flag). When the flag value of the effect result storage flag is updated (added) from "1" to "2" by this process, the peripheral control MPU4140a selects the selection destination of the winning effect in the subsequent games as "Battle history R". To change to.

In "Battle History R", a part of the distribution in the winning production pattern is further changed from "Battle History Q". Refer to FIG. 186 to confirm the specific change contents of the distribution. To change each distribution, the distribution X1-Q and the distribution X1-R may be compared for the out-of-order pattern, and the distribution Y1-Q and the distribution Y1-R may be compared for the low hit pattern. Often, for the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-Q and the distribution Z1-R may be compared. At this time, in the off-field pattern and the low-hit pattern, there is no change in the distribution content even if the battle history Q is changed to the battle history R. However, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the story A reach remains "1" in the winning effect of the SP1 type, but the distribution of the story B reach is reduced by 2 from "3" to "1". Story C Reach distribution is reduced by 4 from "5" to "1". In total, the distribution of winning effects (story A to C) for all SP1 types is reduced by 6 from "9" in battle history P to "3" in strategy Q. Furthermore, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the battle A reach is increased by 6 from "17" to "23" among the winning effects of the SP2 types, and the distribution of the winning effects (battles A to C) of the entire SP2 types is In the battle history P, what was "87" becomes "93" and increases by 9.

At this time, as in the explanation of "Battle History P" and "Battle History Q", the degree of expectation (reliability) and high degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit when each winning effect appears in the distribution of "Battle History R". The degree of expectation (reliability) for winning is as follows.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (combined low hit and high hit) in "Battle History R",
The reliability of Story A Reach is 9.1% (4/44 x 100),
The reliability of Story B Reach is 23.1% (6/26 x 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 47.8% (11/23 x 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 22.6% (21/93 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A Reach is 56.4% (31/55 x 100),
Battle B reach reliability is 80.0% (same as battle history P, Q),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 94.3% (same as battle history P and Q),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 81.0% (171/221 × 100).

That is, when comparing "Battle History Q" and "Battle History R" with respect to the degree of expectation for a big hit, in "Battle History R", compared to "Battle History Q", the winning effect of SP1 type (story B, C) and the entire type While the expectation for the big hit in is lowered, the expectation for the big hit in the specific winning effect (Battle A) of the SP2 type and the whole type is improved. In addition, the reliability of the winning effects (Battles B and C) other than the specific winning effects among the SP2 types does not change.

Also, regarding the reliability of high hits in "Battle History R",
The reliability of Story A Reach is 2.3% (same as Battle History Q),
Story B reach reliability is 3.8% (1/26 x 100),
The reliability of Story C Reach is 4.3% (1/23 x 100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 3.2% (3/93 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A Reach is 34.7% (23/55 x 100),
Battle B reach reliability is 40.0% (same as battle history P, Q),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (same as battle history P and Q),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 44.1% (93/211 × 100).

That is, when comparing "Battle History Q" and "Battle History R" with respect to the degree of expectation for high hits, in "Battle History R", each winning effect (Story B, C) of SP1 type is compared with "Battle History Q". Expectations for high hits in all types are greatly reduced. For example, the reliability of high hits for all SP1 types has dropped from 9.1% in battle history Q to 3.2% in battle history R. On the other hand, the expectation for a specific winning effect (battle A) of the SP2 type and a high hit in the entire type is greatly improved. For example, the reliability of high hits in Battle A has improved from 34.7% in Battle History Q to 41.8% in Battle History R. Further, the degree of expectation for a high hit in the winning effects (Battles B and C) other than the specific winning effects among the SP2 types does not change like the degree of expectation for a big hit.

FIG. 187 is a diagram summarizing the reliability when each winning effect appears using the distribution table 1A. In each column of FIG. 187, the reliability obtained by the calculation method as described above is described.

In this way, by using the distribution table 1A illustrated in FIG. 186, a combination of distributions can be obtained based on the fact that a specific winning effect (Battle A reach) appears without becoming a big hit (out of place). In the subsequent games after the change, at least some winning effects other than a specific winning effect (other winning effects: stories A to C) are selected as a winning pattern (strictly speaking, a high winning pattern). While the distribution is kept low, it is possible to increase the distribution in which a specific winning effect is selected in the winning pattern (strictly speaking, the high winning pattern). Even if the battle history of the selected destination changes, the distribution of the distribution selected in the outlier pattern does not change. As a result, in the game after the combination of distributions (battle history) is changed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for big hits and high hits when "other winning effects" with low distributions appear. Can be lower than the reliability before the change, while the reliability when a specific winning effect appears can be higher than the reliability before the change.

In addition, when the selection destination of the distribution combination (battle history) shifts to multiple stages, the distribution is changed as described above each time the selection destination shifts, so that a specific win will be made in the subsequent games. It is possible to further increase the number of distributions in which the effect is selected in the hit pattern, and it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for big hits and high hits when a specific winning effect appears.

[6-1-2. Distribution of production patterns with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (Part 2)]
FIG. 188 is a diagram (distribution table 1B) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is another example of the distribution table of the effect pattern that can be used in place of the distribution table 1A shown in FIG. 186. Similar to the distribution table 1A, the distribution table 1B is a distribution table of the effect pattern used when the variation time is "30 seconds" as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and each winning effect shown in FIG. 188. The production time (variation time of the decorative pattern) is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the jackpot is won with a probability of 50% (reliability 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, the result of the special lottery is half (50%) a big hit, and the variation time of the special symbol is "30 seconds". It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effect shown in FIG. 188 is an example for simply explaining, and does not limit the type and type of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like in advance, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can read them as needed.

The distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is selected based on the fact that the battle history is recorded based on the fact that a specific winning effect (battle A reach) appears in an out-of-order manner as in the distribution table 1A. The previous battle history shifts from "battle history P" to "battle history Q" and "battle history R". The difference between the distribution table 1B and the distribution table 1A is the breakdown of the distribution due to the transition of the battle history, which will be specifically described below.

In the distribution table 1B, when shifting from "battle history P" to "battle history Q", in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the battle A reach, which is the "specific winning effect" among the winning effects of SP2 type, is " Increased by 15 from "8" to "23", decreased the distribution of Battle B reach, which is another winning effect of SP2 type, from "20" to "15", and distributed the distribution of Battle C reach from "50". Decrease by 10 to "40". It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effects (battles A to C) for all SP2 types in the high hit pattern remains unchanged at "78". In addition, the distribution of the winning effect included in the normal type and the SP1 type, which are types other than the SP2 type (winning effect group), is not changed.

Further, in the distribution table 1B, the distribution in the high hit pattern is changed when shifting from "Battle history Q" to "Battle history R" as well as when shifting from "Battle history P" to "Battle history Q". .. Such a change in distribution is performed only between the winning effects included in the SP2 type, and does not affect the winning effects included in the other types. Specifically, among the winning effects of SP2 type in the high hit pattern, the distribution of Battle A reach, which is a "specific winning effect", increased by 20 from "23" to "43", and other winning effects of SP2 type. The distribution of Battle B Reach, which is the production, is reduced by 5 from "15" to "10", and the distribution of Battle C Reach is reduced by 15 from "40" to "25". The distribution of the winning effect (Battle A to C) of the entire SP2 type in the high hit pattern remains unchanged at "78", and the winning effect included in the normal type and SP1 type that are types other than the SP2 type (winning effect group). The distribution of the production is not changed either.

FIG. 189 is a diagram summarizing the reliability when each winning effect appears using the distribution table 1B. The reliability of each column is calculated using the same calculation formula as in FIG. 187 in the case of the distribution table 1A, but detailed description is omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 188 and 189, the reliability when each winning effect is displayed using the distribution table 1B does not change in the jackpot for each type or the reliability for each hit, and the SP2 type is specific. It is shown that the expectation for big hits and high hits in the winning effect (Battle A) is improved, while the expectation for big hits and high hits in other SP2 types of winning effects (Battles B and C) is decreasing. Is done. This feature becomes more pronounced by shifting from "Battle History P" to "Battle History R" via "Battle History Q". Specifically, when the battle history P, the reliability of the jackpot when a specific winning effect (Battle A reach) appears is 40.0%, but when it comes to the battle history Q, it becomes 56.4%. Furthermore, the battle history R has improved to 68.0%. In addition, the change in the degree of expectation for high hits is even more remarkable, and the reliability of high hits when Battle A reach appears is 20.0% for battle history P, but when it comes to battle history Q. It will more than double to 41.8%, and if it becomes battle history R, it will be 57.3%, which is almost three times more reliable than battle history P. On the other hand, the distribution of high hit patterns of Battle B Reach and Battle C Reach of the same type as Battle A Reach, which is a specific winning effect, is suppressed, but the reliability of SP2 type as a whole changes due to the transition of battle history. Not.

According to such a distribution table, the distribution combination is changed based on the fact that a specific winning effect (Battle A) appears (out of the box) without becoming a big hit, and after the change. In the game, at least some winning effects (other winning effects in the same type: Battles B and C) other than the specific winning effect in the winning effect group (type) including the specific winning effect are the winning patterns. While the distribution selected by (strictly speaking, the high hit pattern) can be suppressed to a low level, it is possible to increase the number of distributions selected by the specific winning effect in the hit pattern (strictly speaking, the high hit pattern). Even if the battle history of the selected destination changes, the distribution of the distribution selected in the outlier pattern does not change. As a result, in the game after the combination of distributions (battle history) has been changed, the degree of expectation for big hits and high hits when "other winning effects within the same type" appear in which the distributions are kept low. (Reliability) is lower than the reliability before the change, while the reliability when a specific winning effect appears can be higher than the reliability before the change.

[6-1-3. Features of the production pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds]
As described above using the distribution table 1A (see FIG. 186) and the distribution table 1B (see FIG. 188), according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific winning effect is present in an out-of-order manner. The battle history is recorded based on the fact that it was issued, and the combination of distributions is changed based on the battle history record (transition of battle history), so that the specific winning effect appears after the transition of battle history. In that case, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be increased, and in particular, the degree of expectation for a high hit with a high advantage can be increased.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an effect pattern including a specific winning effect is selected and executed, and the decorative symbol is removed and stopped in the symbol arrangement due to the winning effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is set to the peripheral control RAM 4140e. The "recording of the battle history" for memorizing the game results is performed, and the information regarding the winning effect stored in the "recording of the battle history" is taught to the player (teaching of the battle history). The teaching of the battle history is realized, for example, by displaying a predetermined image or the like suggesting that the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is displaced in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a specific winning effect according to the instruction by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Will be done. Then, it is taught to the player that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the winning effect regarding the taught content is improved by teaching the battle history. Specifically, for example, when the battle history is taught in a manner suggesting the character "A" corresponding to the battle A reach (corresponding to the teaching area 1900a shown in FIG. 192 described later), the character "A" is strengthened. The state (power-up of the character) is shown, and the player who sees this can recognize that the expectation of a big hit is high for the battle A reach, which is a winning effect for the character "A". That is, by teaching the battle history regarding battle A, it is possible for the player to recognize that the character "A" is powered up, and when the battle A reach appears in the subsequent games, a big hit is expected. Teach easy situations. In addition, in order to supplement the recognition of the situation where the character "A" is being powered up, a character such as "Character A is being powered up" may be displayed (supplementary display of the power-up state). However, even if the supplementary display of the power-up state is performed, it is in the area that does not interfere with the display by the winning effect (battle A reach) (so-called "area where the player recognizes whether or not the battle A reach is hit"". It is desirable to be displayed in the non-overlapping area). In this way, by performing the supplementary display of the power-up state in the area that does not interfere with the display of the winning effect, both the recognition of the powered-up character by the supplementary display and the recognition of the winning result by the display of the winning effect can be performed. You can be satisfied.

Image data and the like used for teaching the battle history are stored in, for example, the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and the character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and when the battle history is taught, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a (or VDP4150c) is used. Appropriate image data is read out and drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A specific example of the teaching of the battle history will be explained again in the next section, but when a specific winning effect appears in the game situation where such teaching is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player concerned Since it is possible to recognize that the reliability of a specific winning effect is higher than that of the conventional one (for example, the initial setting), the expectation for the big hit can be further increased, and the improvement of the interest can be expected.

In addition, when the above-mentioned battle history is taught using the distribution table 1A on the liquid crystal display device 1900, other than the winning effects such as Battle B Reach and Battle C Reach, which have relatively high reliability from the beginning. In addition, since the reliability is high even if a specific winning effect (Battle A reach) occurs, the player becomes more expectant for the occurrence of the reach state. In addition, when the above-mentioned battle history is taught using the distribution table 1B, the reliability of the original winning effects such as Battle B Reach and Battle C Reach, which are relatively high in reliability, is secured to some extent. Since the reliability is high even if a specific winning effect (Battle A reach) included in the same type occurs while it is still (for example, the expectation degree is 50% or more), the player is opposed to the occurrence of the reach state. You will have more expectations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it can be expected that the player's expectation regarding the progress of the game will be improved, and in a situation where the game history is taught, it is wasteful to end the game. It can be expected to make people feel and motivate them to continue playing the game.

In addition, the "specific winning effect" used in the above explanation is a winning effect (or may be read as an effect pattern including the winning effect) in which the distribution of distribution can be increased with the transition of the battle history. For example, it is predetermined at the design stage. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the "specific winning effect" may be a plurality of types of winning effect. Specifically, in FIGS. 186 and 188, "battle history P" to "battle history R" focusing only on "battle A reach" are exemplified as specific winning effects, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, "specification" is given. The "winning effect" is not limited to one type of winning effect (or an effect pattern including the winning effect). For example, when the battle A reach and the battle B reach are each set as a "specific winning effect", an embodiment in which a multi-stage transition of the battle history related to battle A and a multi-stage transition of the battle history related to battle B are combined. Can be devised. Then, in the transition of the battle history related to battle B, when the distribution table 1A is used, the distribution of stories A to C in the high hit pattern is reduced in the same manner as the transition of the battle history related to battle A, and the high hit pattern is used. You can increase Battle B. Further, when the distribution table 1B is used, the distribution of other winning effects (Battles A and C) of SP2 type in the high hit pattern is reduced and the distribution of Battle B in the high hit pattern is increased. It should be. At this time, as the teaching of the battle history, the teaching that the character A corresponding to the battle A and the character B corresponding to the battle B are each powered up is given.

In addition, when using the distribution table 1B to record a plurality of winning effects within the same type as "specific winning effects", the recording of each battle history based on the appearance of each winning effect is used. It is assumed that the distribution of distributions will be interfered with, but the processing in such cases is not particularly limited, and the distributions will be flexibly changed each time each winning effect appears and the battle history is recorded. It should be done. To give a specific example, when Battle A Reach and Battle B Reach are each set as "specific winning effects", when the battle history related to Battle A is transferred, the distribution of the high hit pattern is divided into Battle B for each stage. The reach distribution is reduced by "5", the battle C reach distribution is decreased by "3", and the battle A reach distribution is increased by "8". The distribution of Battle A reach may be decreased by "4", the distribution of Battle C reach may be decreased by "3", and the distribution of Battle B reach may be increased by "7". The increase / decrease range at this time is not limited, and may be set as appropriate. FIGS. 190 to 192, which will be described later, show screen examples when the battle history shifts in each of the battles A to C reach. Further, the "specific winning effect" is not limited to the SP2 type of battle reach, and may be another type of winning effect, but in such a case, the same type as the winning effect (winning effect group). The distribution of other winning effects included in is suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning effects are set in advance as target candidates for the "specific winning effect", and the "specific winning effect" is selected from the target candidates according to the player's wishes. May be specifiable. As a specific operation of such designation, for example, an input screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to a predetermined operation of the player, and the player performs an operation on the input screen. "Specific winning effect" is decided. As an internal process, a distribution table that manages distribution changes for the transition of the battle history related to each winning effect of the target candidate is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a is selected by the player's operation. The distribution table to be used for selecting the winning effect may be determined based on the "specific winning effect".

[6-2. Example of winning production]
Here, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192, the contents of the winning effect shown in FIGS. 186 and 188 will be described for each type of winning effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. .. The effect illustrated in each figure is executed according to the effect pattern selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a displays the effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the effect pattern.

FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the normal type winning effect is executed. FIGS. 190 (A) to 190 (D) schematically show the effect images in the liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively. In FIG. 190 (A), the teaching areas 1900a, 1900b, and 1900c are areas in which information regarding the winning effect of the outlier where the battle history is recorded is shown. Specifically, for example, the teaching area 1900a is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the battle history related to the battle A has been recorded based on the fact that the battle A reach appears out of the way, and the battle. Based on the record of the battle history by A reach, for example, an image that emits light in a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the character "A". Similarly, the teaching area 1900b is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the battle history related to the battle B has been recorded based on the fact that the battle B reach appears out of the way, and the teaching area 1900c is the area for teaching (suggesting) that the battle history has been recorded. It is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the battle history related to Battle C was recorded based on the fact that the C reach appeared out of the way, and like the teaching area 1900a, "B" and "C". An image that emits light in a predetermined color can be displayed on the background of the characters. In FIGS. 190 (A) to 190 (D), the teaching regions 1900a to 1900c are not particularly emitted and displayed, and specific emission colors and the like will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

The image display area 1900d shown in FIG. 190 (A) is an area in which a symbol sequence of decorative symbols, an image of a winning effect, and the like are displayed. For example, the arrow shown in the image display area 1900d means a changing decorative pattern, and in FIG. 190 (A), three arrows are shown in the image display area 1900d, so that the left, middle, and right arrows are shown. The decorative design is changing in each row.

The character display area 1900e shown in FIG. 190 (B) is an area in which characters, symbols, and the like can be displayed in the image display area 1900d, and predetermined characters and the like are displayed depending on the effect situation. For example, in FIG. 190 (B), as shown by "7, arrow, 7" in the image display area 1900d, the decorative symbols in the left and right columns stop at the "7" symbol, and the decorative symbols in the middle row change. Since it is in the middle state, it is a situation where a reach state is formed. At this time, by displaying the characters "reach!" In the character display area 1900e, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the formation of the reach state.

In FIGS. 190 (A) to 190 (D) and FIGS. 191 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (E), which will be described later, the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, the image display area 1900d, and the character display are displayed. Those with the same symbols as the region 1900e indicate the same region, and individual description thereof will be omitted.

When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 190 (B), the effect screen of the normal type winning effect (normal reach or long reach) is displayed. Specifically, the changing decorative symbols in the middle row stop at any of the symbols after a lapse of a predetermined time, and the game result is displayed by the winning effect. When the game result is a hit (big hit), an effect pattern including a hit effect of the hit pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU4140a. Therefore, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, FIG. 190 (C) is shown. As described above, the same symbols (in this case, the "7" symbol) as the decorative symbols in the left and right rows forming the reach state are aligned and stopped. As a result, the player can recognize that he / she has won the big hit in this game from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Depending on the display regulation of the jackpot symbol in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to limit the display to the same symbol, and for example, a specific symbol indicating the jackpot may be stopped. When a big hit is won as shown in FIG. 190 (C), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

Further, when the game result is out of alignment, the peripheral control MPU4140a selects an effect pattern including a winning effect of the outlier pattern. Therefore, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 190 (D). In addition, a symbol (here, "2" symbol) different from the decorative symbols in the left and right rows forming the reach state is stopped. As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big hit could not be won (off) in this game. If the jackpot is not won as shown in FIG. 190 (D), the game proceeds to the next game after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

In addition, although normal reach and long reach are exemplified as the winning effect of the normal type, the difference between the two is distinguished by, for example, the law of the decorative pattern that stops in the middle row, and in the case of long reach, the middle row that stops at the time of coming off. The decorative symbol of is numerically or sequentially close to the symbol forming the reach state (for example, 1 to 2 frames before and after), and in the case of normal reach, the decorative symbol in the middle row that stops at the time of detachment is other than that. It is assumed that the symbol is numerically or sequentially distant from the symbol forming the reach state. By making the behavior in the long reach different from the normal reach in this way, it can be expected that the player has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach. However, as shown in FIG. 190, the winning effect of the normal type does not mean that a special effect screen is displayed after the reach state is formed, and the degree of expectation for the big hit is the SP1 and SP2 types described later. It's not as expensive as the winning production.

FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the winning effect of the SP1 type is executed. FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (G) schematically show the effect images in the liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively, and FIGS. 191 (A) and 191 (B) are the same as FIGS. 190 (A) and 190 (B). Since it is a production screen of, the explanation is omitted.

When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the effect screen of the SP1 type winning effect (story A reach, story B reach, or story C reach) is displayed. Here, "story reach", which is a winning effect of SP1 type, is a kind of super reach, and a dedicated winning effect screen as shown in FIG. 191 (C) is displayed, and the types of winning effects "A" to "" Different effects such as characters and traveling paths are performed corresponding to "C". More specifically, first, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the image display area 1900d up to FIG. 191 (B) is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and is displayed in the image display area 1900d. A screen is displayed as if the character is moving toward the goal. Since FIG. 191 (C) illustrates the story reach A, the character “A” is drawn. In such a story reach production screen, a hole (striped part in FIG. 191 (C)) is drawn at the destination of the character "A", and can the character "A" reach the goal beyond the hole? Whether or not the game result is a big hit is suggested.

After that, the effect screen of the story A reach transitions following the effect screen shown in FIG. 191 (C), and when the game result is a hit (big hit), the peripheral control MPU4140a includes the effect of winning the hit pattern. Since the pattern is selected, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 191 (D), an effect screen showing that the character "A" has successfully reached the goal is drawn. At the same time, the combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit (for example, "7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the alignment mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is displayed in a large size in the image display area 1900d, and the player indicates that the big hit was won in this game. Be recognizable. When a big hit is won as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

Further, when the game result is out of alignment, the peripheral control MPU4140a selects an effect pattern including a winning effect of the outlier pattern. Therefore, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 191 (F). On the other hand, an effect screen showing that the character "A" is stuck in the hole and cannot reach the goal is drawn. At the same time, the combination of decorative symbols indicating other than the big hit (for example, "7.5.7") is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the alignment mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is displayed in a large size in the image display area 1900d, and the big hit could not be won in this game (disappeared). ) Is made recognizable by the player. If the jackpot is not won as in FIG. 191 (G), the game proceeds to the next game after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

In addition, each winning effect (story A to C) of SP1 type can be calculated from the distribution shown in FIG. 186, for example, in the order of reliability of story A, story B, and story C at least in the initial setting (battle history P). Is set high. Therefore, by making the character "B" appear as a more useful character than the character "A" and the character "C" rather than the character "B", even if the winning effect of the same SP1 type is achieved, the player has a different expectation. Can be embraced. In addition, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit by the winning effect of SP1 type is higher than the reliability by the winning effect of the normal type as described above, so that it gives a special impression than the winning effect of the normal type. It is preferable that the effect screen to be obtained is drawn.

FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the SP2 type winning effect is executed. First, FIG. 192 (A) shows that the decorative pattern is changing in each of the left, middle, and right columns as in FIG. 190 (A) and FIG. 191 (A). 1900b is shown in a pattern different from the teaching area 1900c.

Here, in each of the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, the background display changes based on the fact that the battle history is recorded when the corresponding specific winning effects (battle A to C reach) appear in an out-of-order manner. (Change in power-up display). For example, if the transition stage of the battle history for each of battles A, B, and C is set to 4 stages including the initial setting, the background color is set to "white" in the first stage of the initial setting, and the background is set in the second stage of the next stage. The color is "blue", the background color is "green" in the third stage of the next stage, and the background color is "red" in the fourth stage of the next stage. The diagonal pattern of the teaching area 1900a in FIG. 192 (A) indicates "green", the satin pattern of the teaching area 1900b indicates "blue", and the plain pattern of the teaching area 1900c indicates "white". Further, the grid pattern of the teaching region 1900a shown in FIGS. 192 (F) and 192 (G) indicates "red". That is, in FIG. 192 (A), the battle history related to battle A shifts to the third stage, the battle history related to battle B shifts to the second stage, and the battle history related to battle C is the first stage, which is the initial setting. I understand. If this state is described as a power-up state of each character, the character A and the character B are in a power-up state. However, the character A is more powerful. The display of each stage in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c as described above basically corresponds to the selection destination of the internal distribution table selected as the combination of distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. ing.

Next, when the reach state by the "7" symbol is formed in FIG. 192 (B), the effect screen of the SP2 type winning effect (battle A reach, battle B reach, or battle C reach) is displayed. Here, "Battle Reach", which is a winning effect of SP2 type, is a kind of super reach, and a dedicated winning effect screen as shown in FIG. 192 (C) is displayed, and the types of winning effects "A" to "" Different productions such as characters and battle formats are performed corresponding to "C". More specifically, first, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the image display area 1900d up to FIG. 192 (B) is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and is displayed in the image display area 1900d. A screen is displayed in which the ally character fights with the enemy character. Since FIG. 192 (C) illustrates Battle Reach A, the ally character "A" is drawn. On such a battle reach production screen, it is suggested whether the game result is a big hit or not depending on whether or not the ally character "A" confronts the enemy character ("Z" in FIG. 192 (C)) and can win. To. The gauge area 1900 g in FIG. 192 (C) is a display area showing the physical strength of the enemy character, and the smaller the shaded area, the weaker the enemy character is damaged. The enemy character "Z" is another character (for example, an enemy character "X" that looks weak, an enemy character "Y" that looks strong, etc.) depending on the type of battle reach and the battle history in the game. May be drawn.

Further, in FIG. 192 (C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed with more emphasis than usual, based on the production of the battle A reach, which is the “specific winning effect” in which the battle history is recorded. .. By highlighting the teaching area 1900a corresponding to the winning effect that appears in this way, it is clear to the player that the effect pattern by the "specific winning effect" in which the battle history is recorded is executed. Since the reliability of Battle A reach at this time is higher than the initial setting, it can be expected to have the effect of significantly enhancing the interest of the player. In addition to visually emphasizing the teaching area 1900, the player may be made to recognize the appearance of the battle A reach, which is a "specific winning effect", by voice, character display, or the like. Further, on the effect screen when the teaching area 1900a is highlighted, the ally character "A" is drawn with an appearance different from that of the normal battle A reach (for example, a display mode as if the surroundings are emitting light). In this way, it may be taught that a special production is in progress.

After that, the effect screen of the battle A reach transitions following the effect screen shown in FIG. 192 (C), and when the game result is a hit (big hit), the peripheral control MPU4140a includes the effect of winning the hit pattern. Since the pattern is selected, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, an effect screen showing that the ally character "A" has won the enemy character "Z" is drawn as shown in FIG. 192 (D). To. In the gauge area 1900 g, a state in which the shaded portion disappears is drawn. At the same time, the combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit (for example, "7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the alignment mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is displayed in a large size in the image display area 1900d, and the player has announced that he has won a big hit in this game. Be recognizable. When a big hit is won as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped. When a big hit is reached in Battle A reach, as an example of the battle history recording method and teaching method, the background color in the teaching area 1900a is returned to the initial setting of "white", and the battle history record related to battle A is deleted ( (Reset), while keeping the background color in the teaching area 1900b as the current "blue" and leaving a record of the battle history regarding Battle B.

Further, when the game result is out of alignment, the peripheral control MPU4140a selects an effect pattern including a winning effect of the outlier pattern. Therefore, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 192 (F). On the other hand, an effect screen showing that the ally character "A" has been defeated by the enemy character "Z" is drawn. At the same time, the combination of decorative symbols indicating other than the big hit (for example, "7, 6, 7") is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (G), the alignment mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is displayed in a large size in the image display area 1900d, and the big hit could not be won in this game (disappeared). ) Is made recognizable by the player. If the jackpot is not won as shown in FIG. 192 (G), the game proceeds to the next game after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

In addition, in FIG. 192 (F), since the battle A reach, which is a “specific winning effect”, appears in an out-of-order manner, the condition of the battle history record regarding the battle A reach is satisfied. At this time, as shown in FIG. 192 (F), the background color of the teaching area 1900a is a diagonal line pattern (third stage) in such a manner as if the defeat result (battle history) of "A" is recorded. It is changed from "green") to a grid pattern ("red" in the 4th stage). Along with the transition of the battle history stage regarding the battle A, the selection destination of the combination regarding the distribution of the winning effect of the winning pattern (the selection destination of the battle history in the distribution table) is also transferred. Then, in the subsequent games, the teaching area 1900a for teaching the record of the battle history related to the battle A is displayed in a grid pattern on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. 192 (A). If Battle A Reach appears again, it will be possible to suggest to the player that the winning effect will be more reliable.

Further, each winning effect (battle A to C) of SP2 type can be calculated from the distribution shown in FIG. 186, for example, in the order of reliability of battle A, battle B, and battle C at least in the initial setting (battle history P). Is set high. Therefore, by making the ally character "B" appear as a useful (powerful) character rather than the ally character "A" and the ally character "C" rather than the ally character "B", the same SP2 type winning effect is achieved. However, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation. In addition, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit by the winning effect of the SP2 type is higher than the reliability by the winning effect of the normal type and the SP1 type as described above, so that the impression is more special than these other winning effects. It is preferable that an effect screen that can be embraced is drawn.

As described using the distribution table 1B of FIG. 188, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is based on the fact that the battle A reach, which is a specific winning effect, appears in an out-of-order manner that does not reach the big hit. The battle history related to Battle A is recorded and transferred, but if the transition of the battle history related to Battle A progresses in multiple stages, the reliability of the jackpot (and high hit) when Battle A reach appears will be the same type. It may be higher than other winning effects of one SP2 type (for example, Battle B reach). In this way, if the reliability of a specific winning effect (Battle A Reach) is increased to the extent that the order of reliability in the initial setting is changed, the ally character "A" will be changed to the ally character "A" when Battle A appears. A special effect effect that makes the character appear to be stronger than "B" may be produced, and as a result, it can be expected that the player's expectation for Battle A, whose reliability has been greatly increased, will be invited. In addition, when the battle history related to Battle A shifts to a higher stage and the reliability is increased, while the distribution related to Battle B decreases and the reliability becomes low, as a teaching of the battle history, the ally character "A" May be displayed not only in a power-up mode, but also in a weaker (power-down) mode than usual for the ally character "B". By performing such a display, the player's expectation for the battle A reach corresponding to the ally character "A" can be effectively increased.

[6-3. Another example of winning production]
Although the selection of the effect pattern including the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and the characteristics at the time of execution thereof have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above example, and the present invention is not limited to the above example. It may be realized by an example.

First, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting of the transition condition between battle histories, the distribution number in each battle history, and the like is not limited to the exemplary conditions. For example, as a transition condition between battle histories, the transition may be made when a specific winning effect of the outlier mode appears a specified number of times, or the specified number of times may be set to a different number of times between battle histories. .. In addition to this, for example, when Battle A is appearing at the time of a loss, a so-called "look-ahead hold" is performed for a hold based on a game ball winning in the starting port 2101 (this). (Sometimes, the expectation of a big hit on hold is increasing), instead of the above-mentioned one-step shift of the battle history, the battle history may be shifted to two stages at once. In such a case, it is desirable to set the expectation for the big hit after the transition of the battle history to a value higher than the expectation up to that point (for example, 50%). Further, the number of battle history settings is not limited, and "battle history S" or a battle history that is a further transition destination may be set as a transition destination prior to the "battle history R" shown in FIGS. 186 and 188. ..

Further, for example, in the examples of FIGS. 186 and 188, it is described that the distribution is set in advance for each battle history, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. In that case, the distribution number of a specific winning effect may be adjusted according to a predetermined rule or probability. Specifically, for example, when the out-of-order Battle A reach is selected and the transition condition of the battle history is satisfied, the distribution of the winning effect of the SP1 type in the high hit pattern is subtracted by "0" to "5", respectively. , The distribution at the time of hitting the battle A reach may be added by "9", and the like. However, from the viewpoint of efficiently performing the internal processing, it is more preferable that the total value of the subtraction numbers and the total value of the addition numbers of the distributions are set to be the same.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the teaching area (teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIGS. 190 to 192) where the teaching based on the record of the battle history is performed, the background color of the characters such as "A" to "C" is selected as the selection destination. However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not limit the mode of teaching based on the record of such battle history to the background color, for example, the battle history of the selected destination. Display method (size, color, etc.) of characters such as "A" to "C" that can change the display method (size, brightness, etc.) of the corresponding teaching area with the transition of May be changed. Further, as an example of another method of teaching the battle history, a character (for example, characters "A" to "C") corresponding to the winning effect to be recorded in the battle history appears in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It may be possible to suggest a winning effect in which the battle history is recorded. In any case, a display (such as an enhanced display of "A" or a power-up display of the character "A") that can recognize the correspondence to a specific winning effect (for example, battle A reach) may be performed.

Further, regarding the timing of teaching the battle history, in the example of FIG. 192, the latest battle history status is always displayed in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, but the present invention is not limited to the above, and for example, the battle history When the recorded specific winning effect appears next time, the battle history related to the specific winning effect may be taught on the effect screen at any timing in the display process. In such a case, the player will be notified at the time when the battle history is taught that the game is a game in which the winning effect is performed with the reliability improved based on the record of the battle history. Therefore, it can be expected to have the effect of rapidly increasing the interest in the game and giving a feeling of expectation to the big hit and the high hit. Further, for example, when a plurality of winning effects are targeted for "recording of battle history", it is not necessary to perform "teaching of battle history" for all the target winning effects, and the winning effects are limited to those that appear more frequently. , Only "teaching the battle history" regarding the winning effect of the target that appeared during the previous or past predetermined number of games may be performed, or various controls may be realized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not to display the teaching based on the record of the battle history in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be set so as to be selectable by the player. , Providing a game production according to the player's preference, such as wanting to enjoy the result while intentionally obscuring whether or not the reliability is high by the record of the battle history when a specific winning effect appears. be able to. By making it possible to "teach the battle history" in such various ways, it is possible to further enhance the playability.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the battle history is recorded based on the fact that a specific winning effect appears out of the way, and the selection destination of the distribution combination is changed (shift of the battle history). Although it has been explained that the reliability of big hits and high hits is increased when a specific winning effect appears in a game, such transition conditions and maintenance conditions of battle history are not limited to the above examples. For example, regarding the transition condition of the selection destination, it is not always the case that a specific winning effect appears in a continuous out-of-order manner, and it is not always necessary to record the battle history or transfer the battle history every time. In addition, if a specific winning effect appears more than a certain number of times within a predetermined period, the selection destination of the battle history may be shifted, and as described above, other predetermined conditions are satisfied. The selection destination may be migrated based on.

In addition, to give a concrete example of the transition of the battle history when multiple winning productions are targeted for the recording of the battle history, the battle A reach appears in an out-of-order manner, the battle history related to the battle A is recorded, and the battle history is recorded. If the battle B reach appears in an out-of-order manner after the power-up display of the character "A" is performed as a teaching of the corresponding battle history, regardless of whether or not the battle history is recorded based on the appearance of the battle B reach. It is preferable that the power-up state of the character "A" is left. By being controlled in this way, the power-up state of the character "A" is not erased by the appearance of Battle B, which seems to be irrelevant, so expectations for Battle A even after Battle B reach appears out of place. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of security that the feeling can be maintained. Then, when the instruction of the battle history corresponding to the battle B (power-up of the character "B") is separately performed by the deviated battle B reach, the expectation of the player can be further increased.

An example of the battle history transition condition that the battle history is not always transferred every time a specific winning effect that is the target of the battle history is revealed is the battle history recording of the out-of-battle A reach. This will be described with reference to the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186. Specifically, when a battle A reach that is out of the battle history P appears, there is a 1/2 (50%) chance of shifting to the battle history Q, and further, a battle A reach that is out of the battle history Q appears. When it is done, there is a 1/5 (20%) chance of shifting to battle history R. In this way, if the battle history is not necessarily transferred even if the battle history is recorded, even if the battle history is not transferred, the battle history is taught when the battle history is taught. Since it can be expected that the production that powers up the character "A" will be executed, even if a specific winning effect is missed, whether or not the battle history will be transferred is a game. It can direct people's enjoyment and anticipation, and has the effect of improving playability. Furthermore, if the transition condition from battle history P to battle history Q (probability 50%) is set to be stricter than the transition condition from battle history Q to battle history R (probability 20%), the first stage (initial stage) to the first stage. Since it is relatively easy to shift to the second stage, it becomes easy to teach the battle history such as power-up of the character "A". As a result, the opportunity to provide a special state in which the character is powered up can be increased, so that the effect of enhancing the interest of the player and promoting the operation can be expected.

Further, the information stored in the "record of battle history" may be partially or completely deleted by the peripheral control MPU4140a or the like when a predetermined condition is satisfied with the transition of the battle history. By erasing the information stored in the "record of battle history" in this way, it is expected to have the effect of suppressing the continued holding of excessive data that is not used and suppressing the decrease in processing capacity.

One of the opportunities to erase information about battle history records is to reset the battle history. The resetting of the battle history is to return the battle history to the initial state with a predetermined game result as an opportunity. As a condition for resetting the battle history, for example, there may be a case where a big hit is won, but the battle history may be reset to the initial setting when a certain predetermined big hit (for example, a high hit) is won next time. , The battle history of the transition destination may be maintained until a predetermined jackpot is won by a specific winning effect, or when a predetermined jackpot is won by a specific winning effect, the battle history is returned by a predetermined stage. It may be selected as the destination. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to reset all the battle histories when the big hit is won. Specifically, for example, when the characters "A" and "B" are powered up (when the battle history of battles A and B is taught) and the character "A" or "B" reaches a high hit by the battle A reach. , Only the battle history related to battle A may be reset to the initial state to cancel the power-up of the character "A", and the battle history related to battle B may be maintained and the power-up state of the character "B" may be left. When controlled in this way, it is unreasonable for the player to be able to hold the power-up state of the unrelated character "B" even though he won the big hit in the battle A reach related to the character "A". You can suppress your feelings. Then, even after the big hit, the player's expectation for the appearance of the battle B reach related to the character "B" can be maintained, so that the effect of promoting the continuation of the game can be expected. In addition, as another example, if a low hit is won by a specific winning effect, the battle history may be maintained without being reset, and by performing such control, a feeling of expectation for a high hit can be obtained. The effect of the present embodiment that can be enhanced can be more appropriately experienced by the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 2103 (so-called small hit) similar to that at the time of the big hit even though the special lottery result different from the big hit is obtained. If so, it is preferable that the information regarding the record of the battle history is not erased even if the small hit is executed. Further, even if the game shifts to a special game period (for example, an advantageous period such as a chance zone) triggered by a small hit, it is preferable that the information regarding the record of the battle history is not erased. By performing such control, even if it seems that the game state has been changed from the player's point of view, the information regarding the record of the battle history will be changed if the internal game state has not been changed. Because it is possible to prevent, it is possible to maintain the battle history until the player can actually acquire benefits such as winning a big hit, and the player can experience the degree of contribution by recording the battle history to the improvement of the expectation for the big hit. You can expect it to happen.

In addition, it can be assumed that the distribution value for a certain winning effect will be "0" when the distribution is repeatedly changed due to the transition of the battle history, but in order to avoid such a situation, The minimum threshold value may be specified in advance and controlled so as not to fall below the threshold value. When the distribution of the winning effect becomes "0", the winning effect is not selected, so that the selection range of the winning effect is reduced and the playability may be impaired. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a transition of the battle history that changes the degree of expectation for a big hit (high hit) while securing the types of winning effects that can be selected. In addition, from the player's point of view, while there is no change in the situation in which a variety of winning effects are provided, there is an effect that the interest is enhanced when a specific winning effect appears. Similarly, the upper limit of the distribution value for a specific winning effect may be controlled to be limited by a threshold value.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that a specific winning effect (for example, Battle A reach) appears in a mode (missing) that is not a hit, in the subsequent games, the swing of the specific winning effect at the time of a high hit. It has been said that by increasing the number of minutes, the degree of expectation for a big hit (high hit) when the specific winning effect appears can be increased, but according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific winning effect is achieved. The method that can raise the expectation for a high hit when the production (Battle A reach) appears is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that a specific winning effect (for example, Battle A reach) appears in a non-hit mode (missing), the specific winning in the "missing time" and "low hitting time" in the subsequent games. By reducing the distribution of the effect, the degree of expectation for a high hit when the specific winning effect appears may be relatively increased. However, changing the distribution of the hits will increase the chances of the game that wins the big hit in a specific winning effect, so the player's interest in the winning effect that can be expected for the big hit in response to the teaching of the battle history. It is possible to further promote the improvement.

[6-4. For fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times]
In the description so far, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of, for example, 30 seconds is selected, an effect pattern of a decorative symbol determined based on the variation pattern ( I have described how to determine the winning effect). However, as illustrated in FIG. 185, there are fluctuation patterns having a plurality of types of fluctuation times in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation time of 30 seconds (for example, fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is selected. In that case, it is not possible to perform the effect pattern determination process as described above.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern (variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of 30 seconds) that can cause a specific effect (for example, battle A reach) appears. Even if it is selected, the "specific effect" can be made to appear by executing the "alternative effect" described in detail later. Hereinafter, such control processing will be described. The "variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern" is defined as "a variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of 60 seconds (special symbol variation pattern)".

Further, in the following, the distribution of the winning effect determined based on the "special symbol fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds" will be described, but the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has such a "variation time of 60 seconds". The processing in the case of "special symbol fluctuation pattern" and the processing in the case of "special symbol fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds" described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3] are combined. Can be configured. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 30 seconds, the distribution table 1A (FIG. 186) described in [6-1-1] or the distribution table described in [6-1-2] When any of 1B (FIG. 188) is used and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds, the distribution table 2A (FIG. 193) of [6-4-1] described later or [6--4-] is used. 2] Any of the distribution tables 2B (FIG. 194) may be used.

[6-4-1. Distribution of production patterns with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (1)]
FIG. 193 is a diagram (distribution table 2A) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 is a distribution table of the effect pattern used when the variation time is "60 seconds" as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect time of each winning effect shown in FIG. 193. (Variation time of decorative pattern) is within 60 seconds. As illustrated in FIG. 185, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol having the fluctuation time of 60 seconds based on the special lottery result is 15/100 in the case of "missing", and "low hit". Or, in the case of "high hit", it is set to 60/100 respectively. From another point of view, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, the ratio of each judgment result is "missing": "low hit": "high hit" = 15: 60: 60 = 1: 4. : 4, 11.1% (1/9) is "missing", and 88.9% (8/9) is a big hit (low hit or high hit). In other words, when the winning effect is sorted using the sorting table 2A shown in FIG. 193, the result of the special lottery is 11.1% is "missing", "88.9%" is a big hit, and , The fluctuation time of the special symbol is "60 seconds". It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effect shown in FIG. 193 is an example for simply explaining, and does not limit the type and type of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like in advance, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can read them as needed.

Each item (type, effect name, battle history, etc.) of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 is the same as that of the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 and the distribution table 1B of FIG. 188, and the description thereof will be omitted. "SP3" is provided in the "type" of the distribution table 2A. The winning effect included in "SP3" corresponds to the winning effect generally called "super reach", and the expectation for a big hit is set to be particularly high among the super reach. In the "SP3" type winning effect, as an example, as in the "SP2" type winning effect, the battle-style effect progresses with a longer fluctuation time than the SP2 type, and depending on the progress result, is it a big hit (and its type)? Is displayed in a recognizable manner. And, there are 6 winning effects included in the SP3 types ("Long Battle A", "Long Battle A'", "Long Battle B", "Long Battle B'", "Long Battle C", "Long Battle C'". ”) However, if the types are classified based on the characteristics of the production content (for example, characters A to C selected as ally characters during the battle production), there are 3 types:“ Long A ”,“ Long B ”, and“ Long C ”. It can be divided into types.

Of these three types of SP winning productions, we will outline the production content of two types of winning productions that are classified into the same type of long (here, long B), such as Long Battle B Reach and Long Battle B'Reach. explain. First, both reach included in Long B will be a big hit depending on whether or not the ally character and the enemy character can play against each other and win the enemy character, similar to the battle B reach described in FIGS. 196 and 188. It is a battle-type reach effect shown, and basically character B is selected as an ally character. However, the battle period (variable time) is set as long as 60 seconds or less for the long B reach, while the battle B reach is 30 seconds or less. Here, in the long battle B reach, the character B is the main character through the reach production, whereas in the long battle B'reach, the overall production content is similar to the long battle B reach, but the reach. It is characterized by switching (replacement) to a different production content from Long Battle B Reach at any timing of the production. And, the production content to be switched is a production based on the record of the battle history. Specifically, for example, if the long battle B'reach is executed when the "record of battle history regarding battle A" is performed based on the fact that the battle A reach appears in an out-of-order manner, it is long. While the same (or similar) production as Battle B Reach is in progress, the same (or similar) production as the "Battle A Reach" production will appear based on the "Record of Battle History Related to Battle A". .. Similarly, if Long Battle C'is selected when "Recording Battle History for Battle A" is performed, the battle history is in the middle of the same (or similar) production as Long Battle C Reach. Based on the record of, the same (or similar) production as the production of "Battle A Reach" appears. In this way, although the type of Long Battle B'Reach and Long Battle C'Reach is a winning production of Long B or Long C, at least a part of the production is a specific production based on the record of the battle history (Battle A). It is a production that is an alternative to the production of reach) and can be called an "alternative production". The detailed effect screen of the "alternative effect" and the screen transition thereof will be described later in [6-5] and below.

It should be noted that, as described in [6-2] with reference to FIG. 192 and the like (specifically, the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c), the variation time 60 in the game after the "recording of the battle history" is performed. Even when a winning effect of SP3 type appears as a variation display of a decorative pattern based on a variation pattern of seconds, "teaching of battle history" is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Specifically, for example, when the battle history related to the battle A reach is recorded, the "battle history teaching" is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a manner in which the battle A or the character A can be recognized. Furthermore, in this state, when the same (or similar) production as the production of Battle A reach appears by executing the long battle B'reach or long battle C'reach, it is indicated by "teaching of battle history". It is preferable that the highlighting is performed so that the player can surely recognize that the effect corresponding to the information (the effect of the battle A reach) has appeared. In addition, the display form of "teaching of battle history" may take various forms as in [6-2].

Further, in the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, it is assumed that the transition conditions of the battle history P, the battle history Q, and the battle history R are the same as those of the distribution tables 1A and 1B shown in FIGS. The battle history is recorded based on the fact that the Battle A reach appears in an out-of-order manner when the "specific winning effect" is set, and the battle history selected in the distribution table 2A based on the battle history record. Will migrate.

Next, in the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the distribution of the winning effect that is changed with the transition of the battle history will be described. The distribution of the battle history P (distribution X2-P, Y2-P, Z2-P) is the distribution used in the initial setting. In the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, there is no distribution for long battle A'as an example of the distribution table used when "recording the battle history regarding battle A" is performed with the battle A reach as a specific winning effect. .. Further, in the default battle history P, it is assumed that there is no distribution for long battle B'and long battle C'.

When "Battle History P" is selected, the battle history related to Battle A is recorded, and if the predetermined battle history transition conditions are met, "Battle History Q" is selected when deciding the winning effect. Become. In "Battle History Q", as compared with "Battle History P", in Long B and Long C, a part of the distribution in each pattern (off, low hit, high hit) is changed.

Specifically, according to the distribution X2-Q of the out-of-order pattern, the distribution of the long battle B reach is reduced by "3" among the long B compared to the distribution X2-P, and the distribution of the long battle B'reach The distribution increases by "3". Then, among the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach decreases by "3" and the distribution of the long battle C'reach increases by "3". In addition, according to the distribution Y2-Q of the low hit pattern, the distribution of the long battle B reach is reduced by "10" among the long B compared to the distribution Y2-P, and the distribution of the long battle B'reach is reduced. Increases by "10". Then, among the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach decreases by "10" and the distribution of the long battle C'reach increases by "10". Further, the distribution Z2-Q of the high hit pattern is also increased or decreased by "10" as in the case of the distribution Y2-Q of the low hit pattern. However, the total number of distributions for each type (long A, B, C) has not changed.

In this way, in the distribution table 2A, the number of distributions for Long Battle B Reach and Long Battle C Reach decreases with the transition from "Battle History P" to "Battle History Q", but at the beginning, the distribution is The number of distributions for long battle B'reach and long battle C'reach, which were "0", increases. However, the increase / decrease in the number of distributions is the number of increase / decrease in "big hit" ("20" when the total of "10" in low hit and "10" in high hit is added) rather than the number of increase / decrease in "missing" ("3"). Is determined to be more.

Next, when "Battle History Q" is selected, the battle history related to Battle A is further recorded, and if the predetermined battle history transition conditions are satisfied, "Battle History R" is selected when determining the winning effect. Will be done. In "Battle History R", compared to "Battle History Q", in Long B and Long C, a part of the distribution in each pattern (off, low hit, high hit) is changed, and the content of the change is " This is the same as the change in the distribution content when shifting from "Battle History P" to "Battle History Q".

In this way, with the transition from "Battle History P" to "Battle History Q" and further to "Battle History R", the number of distributions for Long Battle B Reach and Long Battle C Reach gradually decreases, and the distribution is performed by default. The number of distributions for "0" long battle B'reach and long battle C'reach gradually increases. Furthermore, the difference between the number of increase / decrease in distribution in "missing" and the number of increase / decrease in distribution in "big hit" gradually increases. That is, by shifting the battle history selected based on the record of the battle history, the long battle B'reach appears when the long B type winning effect is selected, or the long C type winning effect is selected. At that time, Long Battle C'Reach will appear. Then, when such a reach production (long battle B', C') is executed, as described above, the battle A, which is the target of the battle history recording, is in the middle of the production content similar to the long battle B, C reach. The reach screen (or the screen related to Battle A reach) is displayed. That is, a fluctuation pattern different from a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which battle A reach can be selected with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) that can cause a specific effect (battle A reach) to appear (for example, a long battle with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds). Even if B is selected (variable pattern in which B can be selected), the specific effect (Battle A reach) can be made to appear by allowing an alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach) to appear.

In each of the battle histories P, Q, and R, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit (low hit or high hit) when each winning effect (reach effect) appears is as follows. As described above, each reliability is calculated in consideration of the appearance ratio of "off": "low hit": "high hit" = 1: 4: 4, but the details of the calculation formula are omitted. .. In addition, the reliability of the reach effect in which the distribution is "0" is not described.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (combined low hit and high hit) in "Battle History P",
Long A (Long Battle A) reach reliability is 76.2% (160/210 x 100), Long B (Long Battle B) reach reliability is 88.9% (240/270 x 100), Long C (Long Battle C) Reach reliability is 95.2% (400/420 x 100).
The reliability of all SP3 types is 88.9% (800/900 × 100).

Next, regarding the reliability of the big hit (combined low hit and high hit) in "Battle History Q",
The reliability of Long A (Long Battle A) reach is 76.2% (same as battle history P), and
The reliability of Long Battle B Reach is 85.6% (160/187 x 100),
The reliability of Long Battle B'Reach is 96.4% (80/83 x 100),
The overall reliability of Long B is 88.9% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C Reach is 95.0% (320/337 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle C'Reach is 96.4% (80/83 x 100),
The overall reliability of Long C is 95.2% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of all SP3 types is 88.9% (same as battle history P).

Next, regarding the reliability of the big hit (combined low hit and high hit) in "Battle History R",
The reliability of Long A (Long Battle A) reach is 76.2% (same as battle history P), and
The reliability of Long Battle B Reach is 76.2% (80/105 x 100),
The reliability of Long Battle B'Reach is 97.0% (160/165 x 100),
The overall reliability of Long B is 88.9% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C Reach is 94.1% (240/255 x 100),
The reliability of Long Battle C'Reach is 97.0% (160/165 x 100),
The overall reliability of Long C is 95.2% (same as battle history P),
The reliability of all SP3 types is 88.9% (same as battle history P).

In this way, when shifting from "Battle History P" to "Battle History Q" and then to "Battle History R", a new distribution is added (increased) to the winning production (long battle B', C'). When it is issued, there is a low probability that it will be "missing", but with a high probability (95% or more), it will be possible to strongly expect a big hit. That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A is used, a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, a battle A reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) that can cause a specific effect (battle A reach) to appear is achieved. Even if a variation pattern different from the variation pattern that can be selected (for example, a variation pattern in which long battle B can be selected with a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected, an alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach) can appear. This makes it possible to bring out the specific effect (Battle A reach), but such an alternative effect is selected when the expectation for a big hit is high. In other words, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit while the battle history is being recorded, "a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause a specific effect to appear" is selected. However, since it becomes easier to select an "alternative effect" as a winning effect, it becomes easier for a "specific effect" to appear. Therefore, when a "specific effect" appears while the battle history is being recorded, a high degree of expectation for a big hit can be realized.

[6-4-2. Distribution of production patterns with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (Part 2)]
FIG. 194 is a diagram (distribution table 2B) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 2B shown in FIG. 194 is another example of the distribution table of the effect pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, which can be used in place of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 192. The distribution table 2B is the same distribution table as the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193, except that the distribution contents are different due to the transition of the battle history. Omit.

Compared with the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194 has a different distribution amount for the long battle B and the long battle C in the low hit pattern in the battle history Q and the battle history R. Specifically, in the distribution Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of battle history Q, the distribution amount for long battle B reach is reduced by "5" as compared with the distribution Y2-P in the low hit pattern of battle history P. , The distribution amount for Long Battle B'reach has increased by "5", the distribution amount for Long Battle C reach has decreased by "5", and the distribution amount for Long Battle C'reach has increased by "5". Furthermore, in the distribution Y2-R in the low hit pattern of battle history R, the distribution amount for long battle B reach is reduced by "5" compared to the distribution Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of battle history Q, and the long battle. The distribution amount for B'reach has increased by "5", the distribution amount for long battle C reach has decreased by "5", and the distribution amount for long battle C'reach has increased by "5". In any of "Battle history Q" and "Battle history R", the distribution amount in the high hit pattern fluctuates by "10" as in the distribution table 2A.

In this way, in the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194, when the battle history shifts based on the battle history record related to battle A (battle history Q, R), the long battle B'reach and long battle C'in the low hit pattern The amount distributed to the reach is less than the amount distributed to the same reach in the high hit pattern. Further, as in the case of the distribution table 2A, the number of increase / decrease in "big hit" (from battle history P to battle history Q is "5") rather than the number of increase / decrease in "missing" (from battle history P to battle history Q is "3"). "" And "10", which is a high hit, are summed up so that "15") is more. Furthermore, it is preferable that the number of increase / decrease in "off" is set to be at least larger than the number of increase / decrease in "high hit". By using such a distribution table 2B, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined variation pattern capable of producing a specific effect (battle A reach) as in the case of using the distribution table 2A. Even if a variation pattern different from (for example, a variation pattern in which Battle A reach can be selected with a variation time of 30 seconds) (for example, a variation pattern in which long battle B or long battle C can be selected with a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected. By allowing alternative effects (for example, long battle B'reach and long battle C'reach) to appear, not only can the specific effect (Battle A reach) appear, but such alternative effects can be hit low. It can be easier to select in the case of a higher hit than.

As mentioned above, the alternative effects (long battle B'reach, long battle C'reach) are more likely to be selected when the hit is higher than the low hit. Calculate and verify the reliability when it is issued.

First, in "Battle History P", neither Long Battle B'reach nor Long Battle C'reach appears because there is no distribution.

Next, in "Battle History Q",
The jackpot reliability of Long Battle B'Reach is 95.2% (60/63 x 100),
The breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63 x 100),
The low hit reliability is 31.7% (20/63 × 100).
The jackpot reliability of Long Battle C'Reach is 95.2% (60/63 x 100),
The breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63 x 100),
The low hit reliability is 31.7% (20/63 × 100).

Next, in "Battle History R",
The jackpot reliability of Long Battle B'Reach is 96.0% (120/125 x 100),
The breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability is 64.0% (80/125 x 100),
The low hit reliability is 32.0% (40/125 × 100).
The jackpot reliability of Long Battle C'Reach is 96.0% (120/125 x 100),
The breakdown by jackpot is
High hit reliability is 64.0% (80/125 x 100),
The low hit reliability is 32.0% (40/125 × 100).

From the above calculated values, it is shown that when each alternative effect appears, the degree of expectation for high hit is higher than that for low hit, in other words, each alternative effect is at the time of high hit winning than at the time of low hit winning. It is an easy-to-execute winning effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses such a distribution table 2B to "specifically produce" when the result of the special lottery is a high hit when the battle history is recorded. Even if a "variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern" that can appear is selected, the "alternative effect" is likely to be selected as the winning effect, so that the "specific effect" is likely to appear. Thus, when a "specific effect" appears while the battle history is being recorded, a high degree of expectation for high hits can be achieved.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the teaching of the battle history as described in [6-2] is different from the "variation pattern (battle A reach with a variation time of 30 seconds) that can bring out a specific effect". It was mentioned earlier that even in the case of "variation patterns with different times (alternative effect of fluctuation time of 60 seconds)", it is executed in the same manner as in the case of "variation patterns with the same fluctuation time", but as described in [6-3]. Similarly, another example (processing related to the timing of teaching the battle history, resetting of the battle history, etc.) can be executed in the case of an alternative effect with a variation time of 60 seconds. Individual examples will be omitted because they overlap with the explanation in [6-3], but in particular, regarding the opportunity to erase the information related to the battle history record, the alternative production was selected and it became a big hit. By erasing (or resetting) the information, even if "a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is different from the fluctuation pattern that can cause a specific effect" is selected, it is based on the battle history. Since the distribution of the production can be changed and the fact that the jackpot has been reached by the production (alternative production) can be reflected in the battle history, the jackpot when a specific production appears based on the record and teaching of the battle history. It is possible to more reliably provide the characteristic effect of improving the degree of expectation of.

[6-5. Alternative production pattern]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which battle A reach can be selected with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) that can bring out a specific effect (for example, battle A reach)). Even if a variation pattern different from that (for example, a variation pattern in which SP3 type winning effect (long B, long C) can be selected with a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected, a specific effect based on the record of the battle history is substituted. It is possible to execute an "alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach or long battle C'reach)" that appears in. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using a distribution table such as the distribution table 2A (FIG. 193) and the distribution table 2B (FIG. 194), the battle history is transferred based on the battle history record. If you win a big hit (or a high hit) while you are playing, it becomes easier to select such an alternative effect, and by executing the alternative effect, it is possible to make a specific effect with a recorded battle history appear. Become. In the following, regarding the specific production pattern by such "alternative production", a specific production will be described as a battle A reach production, and an alternative production will be described as a long battle B'reach. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the alternative effects shown in the following effect patterns may be combined and executed, and the effect pattern to appear as the alternative effect is selected from the plurality of effect patterns. You may do it.

In the explanation so far, "Battle A reach" has been used as a specific production, but in order to explain more strictly, "Battle A reach production (also referred to as" Battle A production ")" will be specified hereafter. It will be a production. This "battle A reach production (battle A production)" is the reach state of the "series of productions by battle A reach" from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state and the stop of the change of the decorative symbol. It means an effect after being formed, and specifically corresponds to a battle-type effect in which the character A appears (for example, an effect after FIG. 192 (C)). That is, the battle A reach consists of an effect until the reach state is formed (pre-reach effect) and a battle A effect. As the display period of the battle A reach, for example, in FIG. 199 described later, the pre-reach effect appears for 8 seconds, and then the battle A effect appears for 22 seconds.

[6-5-1. First production pattern of alternative production]
First, as the first effect pattern of the alternative effect, an alternative effect in which a specific effect appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect will be described.

FIGS. 195 and 196 are diagrams for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the first effect pattern is executed. Figures 195 and 196 show an example of a long battle B'reach production screen that appears when the battle history related to the battle A production is being recorded, and FIGS. 195 (A) to 195 (D). Is an example of the production screen that appears in the first half of the long battle B'reach display period. Of the figures of FIGS. 195 and 196, the same effect screens as those described in FIGS. 190 to 192 will be simplified, and such a simplification of the explanation will be the same in FIGS. 197 and 198 described later. do.

FIG. 195 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbol before the reach state is formed is changing (pre-reach state), and FIG. 195 (B) shows the same decorative symbol (7) in the left column and the right column. It shows a state in which a reach state is formed by stopping the symbol). The display state of the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIG. 195 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 192 (A). Specifically, when the transition stage of the battle history is set to 4 stages including the initial setting (1st stage), the teaching area 1900a in which the record of the battle history related to the battle A production is displayed is the green of the 3rd stage, and the battle. The teaching area 1900b in which the record of the battle history related to the B effect is displayed is blue in the second stage, and the teaching area 1900c in which the record of the battle history related to the battle C effect is displayed is white in the first stage.

When the reach state is formed in FIG. 195 (B), the effect screen is displayed by the long battle B'reach, and at this time (in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach), it is a specific effect. The Battle A production appears (Fig. 195 (C)). In FIG. 195 (C), the confrontation effect between the ally character (character A) and the enemy character (character Z) is displayed, and the details of the screen display and screen transition are the SP2 type battle A described in FIG. 192. It may be the same as the reach, and detailed description is omitted.

As described in FIG. 192, also in FIG. 195 (C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed with more emphasis than in the normal time, so that the battle A effect in which the battle history is recorded is performed. It can be clearly recognized (visualized) by the player. Furthermore, since the reliability is increased when the production based on the record of the battle history appears, the reliability by the battle A production displayed here is higher than the initial setting, and the player It can be expected to have the effect of significantly enhancing the interest of.

After that, in the image display area 1900d, a confrontation effect by the battle A effect is displayed, and as a result, if the conclusion is reached within the lapse of a predetermined effect time (for example, 22 seconds) and the character A wins, the victory screen is displayed ( FIG. 195 (D)), if the conclusion cannot be reached within the lapse of a predetermined effect time, the confrontation effect by the character A is continuously displayed (FIG. 196 (G)). Here, the predetermined effect time is the time until the first half of the display period of the alternative effect elapses, and is 22 seconds based on the example of the time chart (FIG. 197) described later. Then, in the case of shifting from FIG. 195 (C) to FIG. 195 (D), in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach, the character A wins by the same confrontation production as the battle A reach, so that the battle A The production ends.

In FIG. 195 (D), the character A wins in the image display area 1900d, and the decorative symbol of the same symbol (“7” symbol alignment in the figure) is displayed in the second image display area 1900d. However, the decorative symbol shown in the second image display area 1900d in FIG. 195 (D) is not stopped and displayed, and at least one or more decorative symbols are in a swinging state. After that, as shown in FIG. 195 (E), the decorative symbol shown in the second image display area 1900d is displayed in the entire image display area 1900d, but at least one decorative symbol is also in a swinging state at this time. Will be done. That is, the oscillating state of the decorative symbol is maintained in the latter half of the display period of the alternative effect, and after a predetermined time elapses, the decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the big hit is won. Is shown (FIG. 195 (F)). As a result, the player can recognize that he / she has won the big hit in this game from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When a big hit is won as shown in FIG. 195 (F), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped. The effect screen that transitions in the order of FIGS. 195 (A) to 195 (F) in this way is displayed in the long battle B'reach of the jackpot pattern.

On the other hand, if the battle A production is not settled within the lapse of the predetermined production time after the battle A production is started (FIG. 195 (C)), the confrontation production by the character A continues as shown in FIG. 196 (G). Is displayed (extended production of Battle A). The extended effect of this battle A is continuously displayed even after the latter half of the display period of the alternative effect is entered, and the battle result of the victory or defeat of the character A is finally displayed according to the result of the special lottery. FIG. 196 (H) is an example of a defeat screen of character A displayed when the result of the special lottery is out of order, and then a combination of decorative symbols indicating other than a big hit (for example, "7.5.7") is displayed. It is stopped and displayed (FIG. 196 (I)). If the jackpot is not won as shown in FIG. 196 (I), the game proceeds to the next game after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped. Such an effect screen that transitions from FIGS. 195 (A) to 195 (C) to FIGS. 196 (G) to (I) is displayed with a long battle B'reach of an out-of-order pattern.

In the above description, in the long battle B'reach of the out-of-order pattern, the transition from FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (G) is assumed, but it is based on the long battle A reach (see FIGS. 193 and 194). In the production, such a production screen may be displayed. At this time, even if the effect screen of FIG. 196 (G) is displayed without shifting to FIG. 195 (D) in which the character A wins after FIG. 195 (C), there is a possibility that the effect screen is the long battle A reach. Therefore, since the game result is not determined to be out of order, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up the game result. More specifically, when the long battle A reach of the jackpot pattern appears, after the extension effect of battle A is displayed in FIG. 196 (G), the effect screen in which the character A wins is displayed and the jackpot is displayed. Is shown. Further, when the long battle A reach of the out-of-order pattern or the long battle B'reach of the out-of-order pattern is selected, the effect screens of FIGS. do.

By displaying the effect screen as shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 in this way, it is possible to realize an alternative effect of the first effect pattern in which a specific effect appears in the first half of the display period.

Next, another example of the alternative effect by the first effect pattern will be described. FIGS. 197 and 198 are other views for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the first effect pattern is executed. Each of FIGS. 197 and 198 shows an example of the production screen of the long battle B'reach that appears when the battle history related to the battle A production is being recorded, and FIGS. 197 (A) to 197 (D). Is an example of the production screen that appears in the first half of the long battle B'reach display period. In addition, FIGS. 197 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 198 (H) to (J) are the same effect screens as those of FIGS. 195 (A) to (D) and 196 (G) to (I), respectively. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 197 and 198 show, as another example of the alternative effect by the first effect pattern, in a mode in which the character A wins the battle A effect in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach (alternative effect). An example of an effect screen is shown in which an effect screen (episode A) relating to the character A is displayed in the latter half of the subsequent display period. Specifically, when the long battle B'reach of the jackpot pattern is selected, after the character A wins the character Z in FIG. 197 (D), the latter half of the display period is shown in FIGS. 197 (E) to As shown in (F), episode A is displayed, and then a stop display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit is performed (FIG. 197 (G)). On the other hand, when the long battle B'reach of the out-of-order pattern is selected, the transition is made to FIG. 198 (I) after FIG. 197 (C), and the effect screen showing the off-game result is displayed as in FIG. Will be.

In this way, even when the effect screen as shown in FIGS. 197 and 198 is displayed, a specific effect is displayed in the first half of the display period as in the case of the effect screen example shown in FIGS. 195 and 196. , It is possible to realize an alternative effect of the first effect pattern.

It should be noted that, in FIGS. 196 (H) to (I) and 198 (I) to (J), despite the appearance of the battle A effect, the game result is shown without being a big hit. , This out-of-game game may be recorded as a battle history. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 196 (H) and 198 (I), the display content of the teaching area 1900a corresponding to the battle history of "A" changes, specifically, from the green color of the third stage to the fourth stage. The stage turns red (shaded in the figure). In this way, if a specific production (Battle A production) appears as an alternative production but a big hit is not obtained, the battle history is recorded so that the player can see the result of this game. It is possible to expect a higher jackpot when a specific effect appears again in a subsequent game without making the player feel that it was out of order.

As described above, in the alternative effect by the first effect pattern, a specific effect related to the record of the battle history appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect, but the display timing of each effect screen according to the transition of the effect time. Will be explained again in chronological order. FIG. 199 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the first effect pattern. FIG. 199 (A) shows FIGS. 195 (A) to (F) or FIGS. 197 (A) to (G) when an alternative effect (long battle B'reach) by the first effect pattern appears. It is a time chart when a big hit is shown in the flow, and FIG. 199 (B) shows FIG. 196 (G) or the figure when an alternative effect (long battle B'reach) by the first effect pattern appears. It is a time chart at the time of transition to 198 (I).

In FIG. 199 (A), first, 8 seconds elapse in the “pre-reach state” from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state (for example, FIGS. 195 (A) to 195 (B)). Then, when the reach state is formed, the battle A effect appears for 22 seconds (for example, FIG. 195 (C)). After that, when character A wins in battle A (for example, FIG. 195 (D)), a decorative symbol of the same symbol is displayed in a swinging state for 30 seconds (for example, FIG. 195 (E)), and then a big hit. Is shown (eg, FIG. 195 (F)). In addition, instead of displaying the decorative symbol of the same symbol in a swinging state, episode A may be displayed for 30 seconds (for example, FIGS. 197 (E) to (F)).

In such FIG. 199 (A), the entire display period of the alternative effect is 60 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol variation pattern in which the SP3 type winning effect (including the long battle B'reach) can be selected. It corresponds. Then, it can be seen that the battle A effect, which is a specific effect, has appeared by the time when 30 seconds of the first half of the display period of the alternative effect elapses. The time chart shown in FIG. 199 (A) shows the case of an alternative effect (long battle B') of the jackpot pattern.

Further, in FIG. 199 (B), after the state from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state (pre-reach state), the battle A effect is performed for 22 seconds in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect. Although it appears over and over, the battle A production is continuously displayed in the latter half of the display period of the alternative production as "extended production of battle A" without the conclusion of the battle (for example, FIG. 196 (G)). .. After that, the conclusion of the battle is displayed, and the player is shown whether or not the game result of this game is a big hit (missing). The time chart shown in FIG. 199 (B) shows the case of an alternative effect of an out-of-order pattern (long battle B') and the case of a winning effect (long battle A) of the same type (SP3 type) different from the alternative effect. There is.

As described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199, in the alternative effect by the first effect pattern, a specific effect appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect based on the recorded (and taught) battle history. Therefore, the player can raise the expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) by recognizing that a specific effect has appeared from the early stage of the alternative effect. Then, a specific effect (for example, a battle A effect) appears as an alternative effect based on the record of the battle history, even if the expectation for the specific effect (that is, the reliability in the battle A reach) is relatively low. When it is done, it is said to be a highly reliable production, so it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit), and it has the effect of enhancing the player's interest.

Further, in the above description with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199, when the long battle B'reach is executed as an alternative effect when the battle history in which the battle A effect is a specific effect is recorded, after the reach state is formed. Since the battle A production appears immediately, the battle A production appears even though the winning production of the B system (non-A system) unrelated to the character A is internally selected. That is not recognized by the player. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as another example, the battle A effect appears after making the player aware that the non-A winning effect is selected when the alternative effect is executed. You may do so. Specifically, for example, after the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 195 (B) and before the transition to the confrontation effect, a screen (character selection screen) in which the confronting character is selected is displayed. To. Then, on the character selection screen, the initial state is the state in which the character B is selected, the character A is selected at the time of determination, and the subsequent confrontation effect is such that the battle A effect by the character A appears. do it.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is a winning effect related to the character B, and to make the battle A effect, which is a specific effect, appear in the first half of the alternative effect. Then, in such a case, the change from B to A of the selected character is clearly indicated, so that the expectation of the player can be increased. More specifically, for example, even if the expectation for a big hit regarding the winning effect regarding character B is not relatively high, the player can change to a specific effect (Battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history. Expectations for big hits (especially high hits) can be sharply increased. In addition, in the initial state of the character selection screen, a non-A winning effect (in this case, for example, the reach of a battle B system) is expected, so the player is expected to win a big hit by the winning effect, and then the player is expected to win. By selecting the character A corresponding to the record of the battle history, it is possible to give the player a higher expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit). For example, it is possible to gradually increase the interest of the player.

[6-5-2. Second production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a specific effect is made to appear within the display period of the alternative effect, and a related effect related to the specific effect is performed between the appearing specific effects. I will explain the alternative production to appear. In addition, when a specific effect (battle A effect) appears in the second effect pattern and the third and fourth effect patterns described later, FIGS. 195 to 195 described in the first effect pattern. As in 198, the confrontation effect with the enemy character by the character A is displayed, but the details are omitted because they overlap.

FIG. 200 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the second effect pattern. FIG. 200 (A) is a time chart of the first example of the alternative effect by the second effect pattern, and FIG. 200 (B) is a time chart of the second example of the alternative effect by the second effect pattern. Although the timing at which the related effects are displayed differs between the first example and the second example, a specific effect (Battle A effect) appears within the display period of the alternative effect (Long Battle B'Reach). Moreover, there is no change in the fact that related effects appear between the specific effects. In the second production pattern, as in battles A1 to A4 shown in FIG. 200 (A), in the case of other production patterns, a specific production (battle A production) that is continuously displayed is performed a plurality of times. It appears in two parts.

First, in the first example of the alternative effect by the second effect pattern shown in FIG. 200 (A), the battle A is performed between the battle A effects (Battle A1 to Battle A4) that appear within the display period of the alternative effect. Related effects (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) related to the effect appear multiple times.

Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In battle A1, for example, the start of a confrontation effect between the ally character A and the enemy character Z is displayed. After 6 seconds have passed since the image related to Battle A1 is displayed, the first related effect is displayed (cut-in 1). In the cut-in 1, for example, the character A makes a punch attack on the character Z, and it is displayed whether or not the attack is correct. Whether or not the attack is correct may be determined by performing an internal calculation based on the result of the special lottery (whether or not it is a big hit) in this game. When the attack is successful, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900 g (see, for example, FIG. 195 (C)) is reduced to give the player the impression of approaching victory.

After the cut-in 1 display period (8 seconds) has elapsed, the continuation of the battle A effect is displayed again for 4 seconds (battle A2). After that, the second related effect is displayed for 8 seconds (cut-in 2). In the cut-in 2, for example, similar to the punch attack in the cut-in 1, the character A makes a kick attack on the character Z, and it is displayed whether or not the attack is correct. If the attack is successful, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area of 1900 g is further reduced, giving the player the impression of being closer to victory.

After that, the process returns to the continuation of the Battle A effect (Battle A3), and after 4 seconds, the third related effect is displayed for 14 seconds (Cut-in 3). In cut-in 3, for example, a mysterious attack is displayed as a stronger attack than the attacks in cut-in 1 and cut-in 2, and if the result of the special lottery in this game is a big hit, the mysterious attack is targeted at the enemy character. The display is as if it were inside. Then, when the mysterious attack hits, in the subsequent battle A production (battle A4), the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900 g is reduced to 0, and the victory of the character A is shown. Make the player recognize that the game result of the game is a big hit. If the mysterious attack does not hit (fail), it indicates the defeat of character A in battle A4, and makes the player recognize that the game result of this game is out of order. The production time of the battle A4 shown in FIG. 200 (A) is 8 seconds, which is the longest of the divided battle A productions (battle A1 to battle A4).

According to the production of the first example like this, the related production appears multiple times between the appearance of the specific production, Battle A, so that the degree of expectation for the victory or defeat result of Battle A can be obtained. It can be increased or decreased for each related production, and the player's expectation can be changed in various ways. Specifically, the greater the number of successful punch attacks and kick attacks mentioned above, the more you can expect a big hit, and even if neither the punch attack nor the kick attack succeeds, as long as the final mysterious attack is correct. You can expect a come-from-behind victory.

Further, the content of the related effect in the first example is not limited to the attack of the character A as described above, but may be various effects having a meaning of enlivening a specific effect. For example, it may be possible to display the attack of the enemy character Z and whether or not the attack can be avoided, or the degree of expectation may be changed depending on the attack pattern (type of technique) that appears between the characters. Furthermore, the display color may be changed to change the degree of expectation, and this is performed not only in the related production (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) but also in a specific production (battle A1 to battle A4). good.

Next, in the second example of the alternative effect by the second effect pattern shown in FIG. 200 (B), the battle is performed between the battle A effects (battle A1 and battle A4) that appear within the display period of the alternative effect. Related effects (cut-ins) related to A effects are continuously displayed.

Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In battle A1, for example, the start of a confrontation effect between the ally character A and the enemy character Z is displayed. After 10 seconds have passed since the image related to Battle A1 is displayed, the related effect of Battle A is displayed (cut-in). In the cut-in, for example, a conversation between the character A and the character Z is displayed, and then the display as if the character A is powered up is performed. The result of the cut-in effect may be determined by an internal calculation based on the result of the special lottery. The degree of expectation for a big hit is changed depending on the content and display color of the conversation exchanged between character A and character Z, and if character A succeeds in powering up, the attack power of character A is increased. Gives the player the impression of approaching victory.

Then, after the cut-in effect is displayed for 30 seconds, the continuation of the battle A effect is displayed for 12 seconds, and it is determined whether or not the character A wins (Battle A4). When the long battle B'reach of the jackpot pattern is selected, the victory of the character A is shown in the battle A4, and the player is made to recognize that the game result of this game is a jackpot. When the long battle B'reach of the out-of-order pattern is selected, the defeat of the character A is shown in the battle A4, and the player is made to recognize that the game result of this game is out of order.

According to the second example of the production, a long-time related production (cut-in) of 30 seconds appears between the appearance of the specific production, Battle A, so that the specific production can be performed. For a specific production over a longer time than the original fluctuation time (30 seconds for the entire Battle A reach including the Battle A production) (in Fig. 200 (B), the total of battles A1, A4, and cut-in is 52 seconds). Relevant productions will appear. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention and expectation of the player for a specific effect, and to increase the expectation for a big hit (particularly a high hit).

As described in the first and second examples above, in the battle A4, the final judgment result (in short, whether it is a big hit or not) of the winning effect by the alternative effect is shown, so that the effect period of the battle A4 is shown. Can be said to be one of the most important production periods in the progress of alternative production. Therefore, in the second pattern of the alternative production, the production time of the battle A production (that is, battle A4) that appears last among the battle A productions (battle A1 to battle A4) that appear in multiple times. Is preferably set to the longest. For example, in FIG. 200 (A) of the first example, the production time of the battle A4 is 8 seconds, which is longer than the production time of a maximum of 6 seconds by the other battle A productions (Battle A1 to Battle A3). Further, for example, in FIG. 200 (B) of the second example, the production time of the battle A4 is 12 seconds, which is longer than the production time of 10 seconds by the other battle A production (battle A1).

In this way, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, among the specific effects (battle A effect) that appear in a plurality of times within the display period of the alternative effect, the determination result in the alternative effect is displayed. When setting the production time of the production (Battle A4) longer than the production time of other specific effects (Battle A1 to Battle A3) divided, the "judgment result (for example, whether it is a big hit or not)" is set. Since the period for displaying can be secured for a long time, it can be expected to have the effect of sufficiently attracting the attention of the player and enhancing the interest.

Further, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, the display pattern of the related effect that appears while the specific effect appears is selected from a plurality of types (for example, the first example and the second example). It is possible to make a difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit for each display pattern. In such a case, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of improvement in the expectation of the player, so that it can be expected to improve the playability. Also, as mentioned above, even if a specific effect is a relatively low reliability effect by default, the reliability is increased when it appears as an alternative effect, so the player's interest is It has the effect of suppressing the decrease in the amount of.

In addition, referring to FIGS. 200 (A) and 200 (B), an example of the production when the long battle B'reach is selected as the alternative production when the battle history related to the battle A production is recorded has been described. However, the production of another winning effect (specifically, Long Battle A reach) of SP3 type, which has the same fluctuation time as the alternative production Long Battle B'reach, is similar to the production content except for the production related to the alternative production. You may try to do it. In such a case, comparing the long A battle reach and the alternative production (long battle B'reach), the point that the fluctuation time is 60 seconds and the point that the battle-style production screen by character A is displayed. In common, the difference is whether or not a cut-in as a related effect occurs. Further, the degree of expectation for a big hit (or a high hit) is higher in the alternative effect as described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether it is a long battle A reach or a long battle B'reach (alternative production) until a cut-in (related production) occurs, and if the cut-in occurs, the degree of expectation is high. Since you can guess the high long battle B'reach, you can expect more depending on the progress of the production.

Furthermore, the production of Long Battle A Reach can display a production screen similar to the related production in Long Battle B'Reach, making it more similar to Long Battle B'Reach than the Long Battle A Reach explained in the previous section. You may. In such a case, it becomes more difficult to distinguish between the long battle A reach and the long battle B'reach, and the player can enjoy the display result until the production is completed.

Further, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a 30-second short battle including a specific effect (for example, in FIGS. 200A and 200B, an 8-second pre-reach state and a total of 22-second battle A effect). Insertion control to insert an interim effect (for example, equivalent to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 200 (A) and 200 (B)) when the performance appearance control for displaying (corresponding to a 30-second effect including) is being performed. When this insertion control is performed, the interruption control may be performed to interrupt the performance appearance control. The interruption control interrupts the execution of the interruption control when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds corresponding to the cut-in 1 in the case of the interruption control after the battle A1 in FIG. 200 (A)) elapses, and the interruption timing. By controlling so as to restart the performance appearance control (the effect screen corresponding to the battle A2 is displayed), the alternative effect can be displayed.

In addition to this, when a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, an effect pattern may be provided on the peripheral control board 4010 side as effect data capable of displaying the alternative effect itself. By providing an effect pattern as an alternative effect from the beginning in this way, it is possible to make the alternative effect appear regardless of which of the first to fourth effect patterns is selected.

[6-5-3. Third production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as a third effect pattern of the alternative effect, it is suggested that the specific effect is started within the display period of the alternative effect, and the alternative effect that causes the suggested specific effect to appear will be described.

FIG. 201 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the third effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 201, a change in the effect screen with the passage of time when an alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach) is selected when the battle history is recorded with the battle A effect as a specific effect. It is shown.

Referring to FIG. 201, first, in the initial 8 seconds of the display period of the alternative effect, there is a period (pre-reach state) from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state. After that, a suggestion effect appears for 30 seconds (suggestion effect A). This suggestion effect A is an effect that suggests that the display of the "specific effect (battle A effect)" in which the battle history is recorded is started, and the degree of expectation that the specific effect is started is set. It may be made to appear by selecting from a plurality of types of suggestive effects with differences. Further, the suggestion effect A may appear even in the interval of the pre-reach state.

A specific example of the suggestion effect A is shown below. For example, a preliminary effect such as "something will happen" is displayed at the beginning of the suggestion effect, a notice is given that a "competition effect" will be performed in the middle stage, and a character A will appear in the final stage such as "character A will appear". It is suggested that the battle production (that is, the battle A production) is started.

Also, for example, by making an enemy character appear in the early stage of the suggestion effect A, displaying the critical situation of the ally by the enemy character in the middle stage, and asking the character A for help in the final stage, the character is performed after the suggestion effect A. It is suggested that the battle with the enemy character by A (that is, the battle A production) is started.

Further, for example, in the early stage of the suggestion effect A, a screen in which the battle B effect by the character B is likely to be started is displayed, and in the middle stage, the character A appears before the battle B effect is started and substitutes for the character B. By having a conversation and displaying a screen in which the character B is replaced by the character A at the end of the conversation, it is suggested that the battle effect by the character A (that is, the battle A effect) is started after the suggestion effect A.

Then, after such a suggestion effect (suggestion effect A) appears for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect suggested to start by the suggestion effect appears for 22 seconds. (Battle A). In battle A, a battle effect in which character A plays against an enemy character is displayed, and if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the victory of character A is finally shown, and the game result of this game is a big hit. To make the player recognize. If the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (missing), the character A is finally defeated, and the player is made to recognize that the game result of this game is wrong.

In addition, in the alternative production by such a third production pattern, it is emphasized that a specific production (battle A production) corresponding to the record of the battle history appears in the battle A production in the latter half. It is preferable to teach. Further, at the stage of suggestion production, such emphasis teaching is not performed, and an expected production such as blinking the teaching area 1900a relating to battle A is performed so as to show that a specific production may be started. You may do it. In this way, by clearly teaching the player the relationship between the record of the battle history and the appearance of a specific effect, the player is sure to have a high expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit). It is possible to visually recognize that it has been issued.

When the alternative production by the third production pattern as described above is performed, when the suggestion production appears, a specific production (battle A production) is performed even before the battle A production is actually started. ) Can create an expected period that raises the player's expectation for the appearance. And since the expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) is high when the battle A production appears, it takes a long time (52 seconds in the example of FIG. 201) from the suggestion production A to the end of the battle A production. Throughout this, it is possible to raise the expectations and interests of the players.

Further, when the suggestion effect appears, the "start of a specific effect" may be confirmed without fail or with a relatively high probability. In such a case, the player appears the suggestion effect. Since you can be confident that a specific production with high reliability will appear at the early stage of the alternative production, you can expect advantageous game development (big hit or high hit) after that while having a sense of security. ..

Further, a so-called "fake suggestion effect" may be included so that the "start of a specific effect" is not necessarily confirmed even if the suggestion effect appears. It is possible to raise expectations for the appearance of a specific production with high reliability compared to normal times, and to entertain the game development with a feeling of excitement until a specific production actually appears. can.

Further, the suggestion effect in the third effect pattern of the alternative effect is not necessarily limited to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and may be an embodiment that can suggest that a specific effect is started in the latter half of the alternative effect. For example, other production methods such as an operation effect of an accessory or a lighting effect of an LED lamp may be adopted, and these production methods may be further combined.

[6-5-4. Fourth production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as the fourth effect pattern of the alternative effect, an "different effect" that is difficult to recall a specific effect (less relevant to the specific effect) appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect, and the alternative effect is displayed. An alternative effect that causes a specific effect to appear in the latter half of the display period of is described.

FIG. 202 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 202, a change in the effect screen with the passage of time when an alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach) is selected when the battle history is recorded with the battle A effect as a specific effect. It is shown.

Referring to FIG. 202, first, in the initial 8 seconds of the display period of the alternative effect, there is a period (pre-reach state) from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state. After that, "different production" appears for 30 seconds (as different production A, for example, battle B). As described above, the "different effect" is an effect that makes it difficult to recall a specific effect (here, the battle A effect), and may be an effect that is not closely related to the specific effect. Here, as a different production A in the long battle B'reach, it is said that a battle B production in which character B fights against an enemy character appears, but a production in which other characters play against each other (for example, battle C production) , A production other than the battle format by a character or story unrelated to the character A (for example, the story B described in FIG. 186 or the like) may be used.

In the different production, it is not necessary to add some sort of conclusion (for example, character B is defeated or wins) as the production content, but in any case, the fluctuation of all decorative symbols does not stop, and it is a substitute. The decorative design will change until the Battle A production, which appears in the latter half of the production, is completed.

Then, after the different effect A appears for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect appears (battle A). In battle A, a battle effect in which character A plays against an enemy character is displayed, and if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the victory of character A is finally shown, and the game result of this game is a big hit. To make the player recognize. If the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (missing), the character A is finally defeated, and the player is made to recognize that the game result of this game is wrong.

In addition, in the alternative production by such a fourth production pattern, it is emphasized that a specific production (battle A production) corresponding to the record of the battle history appears in the battle A production in the latter half. It is preferable to teach. In this way, by clearly teaching the player the relationship between the record of the battle history and the appearance of the specific effect, the player can see that the specific effect appears in the latter half of the alternative effect. It is possible to visually recognize that the degree of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) is high.

Here, the connection between the different production and the specific production after that will be described in detail with a specific example. For example, when the battle B effect appears as a different effect A, an effect in which the ally character B plays against the enemy character character Z is displayed. Then, as an example of the different effect A, the screen in which the character B is defeated by the character Z is displayed in the battle B effect, so that the player feels that the main game is out of the question. Then, after a lapse of a certain period of time, the character A is made to appear, and a screen is displayed in which the character A challenges the character Z to rematch. According to such an alternative production, after the different production A is performed in the first half of the alternative production, a specific production (battle A production) appears in the latter half of the alternative production, and the character B is temporarily defeated. After that, the snow humiliation battle by character A is started, and if character A wins in the battle A production, the big hit is shown to the player, so once the player is made aware of the loss of this game, the big hit is made. Expectations can be revived, and it can be expected that the interest will rise sharply.

Further, as another example of the different effect, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the different effect A is used as a part of the effect of changing the decorative pattern aligned in the image display area 1900d according to the degree of advantage of the big hit. You may do it. That is, the screen in which the character B wins the character Z in the different effect A (battle B effect) in the first half is displayed, and at this time, the decorative pattern alignment mode showing the big hit (low hit) with a relatively low degree of advantage is temporarily displayed. Display (in a rocking state). After that, at the end of the different production A, the character A is suddenly made to appear so that the promotion effect of the big hit is started, and a specific effect (battle A effect) appears as the promotion effect. Then, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (high hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage, the character A wins in the battle A production, and the arrangement of the decorative symbols is changed to the high hit. .. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (high hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage, a display is displayed so that the character A cannot win (for example, a draw) in the battle A production, and the arrangement of decorative patterns is changed. You should avoid it. According to such an alternative effect, after giving the player the joy of showing a big hit by a different effect, the big hit has a relatively low degree of advantage by suddenly appearing a specific effect as a promotion effect. It gives the player an opportunity to dispel the player's reluctance to be a big hit (low hit), and when it is converted to a big hit with a higher degree of advantage, it can give the player great joy. It has the effect of giving a person a multi-level satisfaction.

In this way, in the alternative production by the fourth production pattern, the player can be surprised and expected by the appearance of the specific production after the appearance of the different production that is difficult to recall the specific production. It can be expected to have the effect of enhancing the interest of the player for various effects that can be produced by the pachinko machine 1.

More specifically, when the alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern is performed, a different effect that is not related to the specific effect is performed in the first half of the alternative effect, so that the player is aware of the specific effect at this stage. You can enjoy the game development by different production without any need. Then, when a specific effect suddenly appears after that, it is possible to provide playability with surprise, and further, when the specific effect appears, the degree of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit). Is enhanced, so it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as described above, in the alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern, as long as the fluctuation time for displaying the specific effect can be secured, the specific effect appears after the different effect appears. The timing can be changed arbitrarily. In the pachinko machine 1 where such an alternative effect can be executed, it is not known from the player's point of view at what timing a specific effect (battle A effect) appears. For example, when SP2 type battle B reach or SP3 type long battle B reach is selected, the battle production by character B is started, but the battle production is not displayed after that. finish. However, when the long battle B'reach is selected, even if character B cannot win due to the battle B production, the battle A production by the character A will appear, and the expectation for the big hit will be raised again. Since it can be embraced, the player can enjoy the development of the production while always having a feeling of expectation for a specific production that may occur.

In the alternative production of the fourth production pattern, as described above, the different production may be a production that is not closely related to the specific production, but as a further relationship, it is a winning production that is recalled from the specific production. You may consciously form a relationship in which there is a difference in the reliability of each jackpot with respect to the winning effect recalled from the different effect.

For example, when a specific effect is a battle A effect and a different effect is a battle B effect, referring to the above-mentioned distribution tables (1A, 1B) and the like, the winning result is recalled from the battle A effect, which is a specific effect. The effect (for example, SP2 type) is the battle A reach, and the winning effect (for example, the SP2 type) recalled from the battle B effect of the different effect A is the battle B reach. Comparing the reliability of the jackpot in the initial stage (battle history P) for each of these winning productions, the reliability of Battle B Reach is higher than that of Battle A Reach (see Figures 187 and 189). When the B effect is viewed as a single effect, the expectation for a big hit (or a high hit) is higher when the battle B effect appears than when the battle A effect appears. In addition, even when compared with the winning productions of 3 types of SP, the long battle B reach recalled from the battle B production is more reliable than the long battle A reach recalled from the battle A production ([6-4]. -1], see "6-4-2") Therefore, the expectation for a big hit is higher in the battle B production than in the battle A production. In this way, in the alternative production of the fourth production pattern, in which the different production A (battle B production) is performed in a combination with higher reliability than the specific production (battle A production), the high reliability is different in the first half. The appearance of the production A can raise the player's expectation for a big hit. Then, if the big hit cannot be reached in the different production A (defeated in the battle B production), the player will be disappointed once, but after that, a specific production (battle A production) will appear. It is possible to make the player expect a big hit again. In other words, even if the high-reliability production that appeared in the first half of the alternative production did not show a big hit, it can be expected to be a big hit again by the subsequent development (a specific production appears). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, for example, when a specific effect is a battle A effect, an effect having a lower reliability than the battle A effect may be regarded as a different effect A, and an alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern may be performed. Strictly speaking, the "production with a lower reliability than the battle A production" is a production that can remind us of a winning production with a lower reliability than the winning production recalled by the battle A production. At this time, even if a different production with low reliability appears in the first half of the alternative production, the player may not have much high expectations for the big hit, but after that, the high reliability in the latter half of the alternative production. By the appearance of a specific effect (Battle A effect), the player's expectation for a big hit can be sharply increased. That is, even if a relatively low reliability effect appears in the first half of the alternative effect, the reliability is high as long as a specific effect (Battle A effect) appears after that, so the reliability is low. Even if the production of is shown, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for big hits and high hits, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when a specific production based on the record of the battle history appears after the different production, the expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) is raised, so that the specific production suddenly appears. It is possible to realize not only the enjoyment of the production but also the production that raises the expectation for the actual profit (acquisition of benefits).

Further, as described above in the specific example of the different production, when the battle A production by the character A appears after the character B is defeated in the battle B production, the production of the revival pattern is performed, so that the game is performed once. Since it is possible to make the player feel that the winning effect is performed multiple times in the production (there are multiple winning opportunities), it is expected that the player's interest will be enhanced. Furthermore, if different productions that lead to such a revival pattern appear multiple times during the first half of one alternative production, it is possible to realize a continuous production that further increases the chances of winning, and the player. It is possible to further enhance the interest of.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the original production (Battle A production) based on the record of the battle history is performed by performing the alternative production by the first to fourth production patterns. Even if a display time longer than the display time (22 seconds for the battle A effect, 30 seconds for the entire battle A reach) is selected (here, an alternative effect of 60 seconds) can be displayed. In general, the longer the display time, the more likely it is that the player's expectation that the game result will be a big hit or a high hit will increase. By making it possible, the effect of making the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game can be expected.

In addition, as described above in [6-4-1] to [6-4-2], the ratio at which the alternative effect is executed when a big hit (or high hit) is performed while the battle history is being recorded is , Higher than when no battle history was recorded. Therefore, if the specific effect appears while the battle history is memorized and taught regarding the specific effect (Battle A effect), the player raises the expectation for the big hit (or high hit). However, such a specific effect can be manifested by an alternative effect even if it is a winning effect with a variable time different from the original variable time corresponding to the battle A effect (Battle A reach of 30 seconds). Therefore, it can be expected that a specific effect will appear regardless of the fluctuation time of the special variation pattern, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a plurality of types of winning effects.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reliability of a specific effect (reliability in the winning effect in which the specific effect appears) is improved by the transition of the battle history, so that the specific effect is relatively in the initial setting. Even if it is a low-reliability production with low expectation for a big hit, it can be expected as a production with high expectation for a specific production after the battle history is recorded. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the appearance of the low reliability effect as seen in the conventional gaming machine.

[6-6. Supplementary information on determining the production pattern]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when using the distribution table as described above in [6-1] to [6-4], it is not always necessary to change the distribution in the low hit pattern. .. However, when the distribution is changed in the low hit pattern, the distribution shall be changed to the extent that the increase amount of the distribution in the high hit pattern is not exceeded. Specifically, in the case of the distribution tables 1A and 1B, the change is made to the extent that the increase amount of the distribution of the specific winning effect (battle A reach) in the high hit pattern is not exceeded. By doing so, even if the distribution for the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the distribution amount in the high hit pattern, a specific winning effect will appear in the game after the battle history is recorded. When it is done, the degree of expectation for high hits can be increased. In addition, in the case of the distribution tables 2A and 2B, the amount of increase in the distribution of the high hit pattern in the winning effect (long battle B'reach, long battle C'reach) in which the distribution is increased is changed. It shall be. In this way, even if the distribution for the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the distribution amount in the high hit pattern, a specific winning effect (Battle A Reach) is produced in the game after the battle history is recorded. A variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which Battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds) (for example, a variation pattern in which long battle B can be selected in a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected. Even if it is done, the specific effect (Battle A reach) can be made to appear by allowing the long battle B'reach to appear, and the degree of expectation for a high hit can be increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the "battle A reach (strictly speaking, the battle A effect)" that can be selected when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is described as a specific effect (specific winning effect), but other effects are described. It may be a specific production. Further, the target of the specific effect is not limited to one reach effect, and a plurality of related reach effects may be the target of the specific effect. Specifically, for example, by setting the reach effect related to the character A as a specific effect, not only the battle A reach that can be selected when the variation pattern has a variation time of 30 seconds but also the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. The long battle A reach that can be selected can also be included in the "specific production" of the same category. If the battle history is recorded for such a "specific production", not only when the Battle A reach appears in the out-of-range mode, but also when the long battle A reach appears in the out-of-range mode. However, the battle history is recorded. As a result, the result of the battle history that "the reach related to character A has appeared in an out-of-order manner" is recorded collectively, so even though multiple types of winning effects related to character A have appeared, a big hit cannot be obtained. In such a case, the character A can be powered up, and the degree of expectation for a big hit (and a high hit) when such a winning effect appears next can be increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probabilistic jackpot is defined as a “high hit” with a high degree of advantage, and the normal jackpot is defined as a “low hit” with a low degree of advantage. The classification of "low hit" is not particularly limited. For example, high hits and low hits may be classified based on other conditions regarding the game state after the hit game (whether or not the time-saving game is given, the number of times the time-saving game is given, etc.). When making such a classification regarding "high hit" and "low hit", it is advantageous based on the expected value of the privilege (for example, payout) that the player can obtain through a series of advantageous states controlled based on the big hit. It can be considered that the degree is divided into high and low.

Further, as another example of the classification of "high hit" and "low hit", the classification may be based on the difference in opening / closing control of the big winning opening 2103 in the big hit game. Specifically, for example, it can be classified based on the number of rounds in the big hit game (whether it is a 16R big hit or a big hit less than 16R, etc.). Further, for example, it can be classified into a jackpot with a relatively long opening time and a jackpot with a relatively short opening time in each round during the jackpot. Further, for example, it can be classified based on the difference in the number of rounds (effective number of rounds) in which the opening control is performed so that the game medium can easily enter the ball during the big hit. When making such a classification regarding "high hit" and "low hit", the high and low of the degree of advantage are classified based on the amount of game balls that the player can acquire by the big hit (expected value of winning the ball). It can be understood that it is.

Then, "high hit" and "low hit" may be classified by combining the above-mentioned classification criteria. To give an example, the so-called "high hit" can be used as a criterion for classifying "a probable variable jackpot" and "the expected value of the actual winning of a ball exceeding a predetermined amount by the jackpot" as a "high hit". It is also possible to exclude big hits, such as "hidden hits", from which you cannot expect to get a substantial amount of balls from high hits. That is, taking the jackpot type shown in FIG. 173 (C) as an example, only "specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot", "specific 4 8R probability variation jackpot", and "specific 5 16R probability variation jackpot" are "high hits". It is also possible to classify "specific 1 4R latent probability change big hit" and "specific 3 16R sudden probability change big hit" into "low hit" together with "non-specific 4R normal big hit". In such a case, if the expectation of a big hit to a "high hit" can be raised by the appearance of a "specific production" while the battle history is being recorded, it is a probable change big hit and a substantial ball is released. Since it is possible to improve the degree of expectation for the jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage, it is possible to further raise the expectation of the player.

Further, the classification based on the difference in the degree of advantage does not have to be two types of high and low, and three or more types may be performed. Further, "high hit" and "low hit" may be determined according to the type of hit. By doing so, the effect of shortening the development period and shortening the development cost can be expected. Specifically, for example, in a certain model, it is assumed that the types A and B, which are low-advantage hits, are classified as "low hits", and the types C, which are high-advantage hits, are classified as "high hits". .. Here, when developing another model and trying to change the type A to a hit with a high degree of advantage, the type A may be changed to the "high hit" category according to the change, so that it is easy. It can be changed. In other words, if "high hit" and "low hit" are determined by the type of hit, it is not necessary to change the settings for each individual hit included in each type, and it is expected that the burden on development will be reduced. can.

Further, it is preferable that the classification of "high hit" and "low hit" is set by the peripheral control board 4010 (may be other than the main control board 4100). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect can be changed in different modes between "high hit" and "low hit", but the processing related to such an effect pattern is peripheral control. Since it is controlled by the board 4010 (particularly the peripheral control MPU4140a), when the classification setting of "high hit" and "low hit" is performed on the same peripheral control board 4010, the processing load on the main control board 4100 side is reduced. In addition to the above, the amount of communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010 can be reduced, and further, the processing efficiency in the peripheral control board 4010 can be expected to be improved.

As described above, "high hit" and "low hit" are tentative names used for facilitating explanation, and it is not necessary to use such terms in the internal design. For example, a plurality of types of hits are used. Each of the above may be managed so as to be classified into "high hit" or "low hit". As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the characteristics different for each gaming machine are set by consciously classifying the high and low of the degree of advantage based on various criteria and setting the characteristic distribution of the winning effect. It is possible to realize a change in the degree of expectation for the appearance of a specific winning effect while reflecting the specifications and specifications.

[6-7. Effect on winning production]
Mainly as described in [6-1] to [6-3], in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect pattern including the specific winning effect (specific effect) appears in an out-of-order manner. , The result of this game is memorized (record of battle history), and after that, the game is produced while teaching the record of the battle history, and the production pattern including the winning effect is selected from a plurality of production patterns. By varying, it is possible to facilitate the selection of an effect pattern including the specific winning effect when a big hit is won in a subsequent game. Therefore, even if a specific winning effect does not become a big hit, the player's expectation (reliability) for the big hit will be increased when the specific winning effect appears next time in the subsequent games. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3], a specific winning is performed in a state where the battle history related to the specific winning effect is recorded. When the effect is presented, the expectation for the advantageous game (that is, the high hit) having a high advantage among the advantageous games (low hit and high hit) having different degrees of advantage is increased. Specifically, the battle A reach is set as a specific winning effect, and the battle history is recorded and taught based on the fact that the battle A reach appears in an out-of-order manner, and the distribution destination of the winning effect is changed (battle history). (For example, refer to the distribution table 1A in FIG. 186), so that the distribution number of the battle A reach in the high hit pattern increases in the subsequent games, so that the expectation for the high hit when the battle A reach appears. The degree (reliability) is increased.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning effect is displayed using the distribution table 1A and the distribution table 1B of FIG. When is appeared, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a highly advantageous advantageous game (high hit). Then, when the battle history is recorded and taught (even if the specific winning effect is a production in which the expectation for a big hit (or high hit) is not relatively high in the initial state), the specific winning effect is performed. When the winning effect appears, the degree of expectation for a high hit can be increased, so that the effect of suppressing the player's interest from deteriorating with respect to the appearance of the specific winning effect is achieved.

In addition, by showing the player a teaching based on the record of the loss due to such a specific winning effect (record of battle history), when the specific winning effect appears again, a big hit (especially a high hit) is reached. It will be easier for the player to recognize that the winning production with high expectations is being performed, and it will be easier to enhance the interest of the player. Furthermore, since such teaching suggests the existence of a winning effect that is highly reliable when it appears, it is necessary to make the player want the appearance of a specific winning effect stronger than usual. Can be expected, and new enjoyment in the game can be provided.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation level of a specific winning effect is changed according to the game situation by changing the distribution related to the winning effect of the hit pattern (particularly the high hit pattern) as described above. Therefore, even if the reliability of the "specific winning effect" is relatively low at the time of initial setting, even if it is a low-reliability reach effect, the expectation level when the specific winning effect appears again is higher than before. Can be expected to increase the player's expectation. In the first place, in a conventional gaming machine, a low-reliability reach effect is a winning effect that has a relatively high chance of occurring compared to other term-reliability reach effects. There was a risk that the player's motivation to play would decrease, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, despite the low-reliability reach effect, it appears as a specific winning effect. When it is done, it is not a low reliability but a highly reliable winning effect, so it is possible not only to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play as described above, but also to expect a big hit (especially a high hit). It has a special effect of creating a feeling.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described mainly in [6-4-1], the record and teaching of the battle history are based on the fact that the "specific effect" appears in an out-of-order manner. Is performed, and the battle history is transferred with respect to the distribution of the winning effect to be executed, so that a variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern that can cause the "specific effect" to appear is selected. However, it is possible to make a "specific production" appear.

Explaining with a specific example, if the battle A reach is a "specific effect", the "predetermined variation pattern that can cause the" specific effect "appear" is a variation time of 30 seconds that can cause the battle A reach to appear. The special symbol variation pattern, which is a "variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern", is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the fact that the battle A reach appears in an out-of-order manner, and the battle history of the selected destination is changed to "battle history Q" or "battle history R" in the distribution table 2A of FIG. By changing (shifting the battle history), the "alternative effect" regarding the battle A reach at the time of a big hit, that is, the amount of distribution to the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'reach at the time of a big hit is increased. Then, when a big hit result is obtained in a special lottery and a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected after such a transition of battle history is performed, the distribution amount is increased "alternative production". Is selected, and by making the "alternative effect" appear, the effect of Battle A reach (that is, "specific effect") can be displayed in the middle of the effect.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history regarding a specific effect, an alternative effect is present using the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193 at the time of a big hit in which a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected. Since it is easy for the specific effect to appear when it is issued, the player's expectation for the jackpot is increased when the specific effect appears while the battle history related to the specific effect is being remembered. be able to. Since such an effect can be applied even if a specific effect is a low-reliability effect in which the expectation for a big hit is not relatively high by default, such a low-reliability effect appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem that the player's interest may be lowered when the game is played.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A of FIG. Although the number of distributions has been increased, the number of distributions for the alternative effect in the deviation pattern is also set to the extent that it is less than the number of distributions in the jackpot pattern. By preparing the distribution with the deviation pattern in this way, even if a specific production (battle A reach production) appears as an alternative production, there is a possibility that it will not lead to a big hit with a low probability. In this way, it can be expected that the player will not get bored until the final stop mode is determined. It should be noted that the distribution of the alternative effect in such an out-of-order pattern is not always necessary, and by intentionally not performing the distribution, a specific effect appears in the alternative effect when the battle history is memorized and taught. It may be a special winning effect in which the big hit is confirmed at the time when it is done.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described mainly in [6-4-2], the record and teaching of the battle history are based on the fact that the "specific effect" appears in an out-of-order manner. Is performed, and the battle history is transferred with respect to the distribution of the winning effect to be executed, so that a variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern that can cause the "specific effect" to appear is selected. However, it is possible to make a "specific production" appear.

Explaining with a specific example, if the battle A reach is a "specific effect", the "predetermined variation pattern that can cause the" specific effect "appear" is a variation time of 30 seconds that can cause the battle A reach to appear. The special symbol variation pattern, which is a "variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern", is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the fact that the battle A reach appears in an out-of-order manner, and the battle history of the selected destination is changed to "battle history Q" or "battle history R" in the distribution table 2B of FIG. By changing (shifting the battle history), the "alternative effect" regarding the battle A reach at the time of high hit, that is, the distribution amount to the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'reach at the time of high hit is increased. Then, when the result of the advantageous game (high hit) with high advantage is obtained in the special lottery after such a transition of the battle history is performed and the special symbol variation pattern with the variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the swing is performed. Since the ratio of selecting the "alternative effect" with the increased amount increases, by making the "alternative effect" appear, the effect of Battle A reach (that is, "specific effect") is performed during the effect. It can be made to appear.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history related to a specific effect, when a high hit in which a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, an alternative effect is performed using the distribution table 2B of FIG. Since the specific effect is likely to appear when it appears, when the specific effect appears and the game shifts to the big hit game when the battle history related to the specific effect is stored, the big hit is given. Expectations for being a high hit can be raised. That is, when a specific effect appears while the battle history is being remembered, the player can have a feeling of expectation for a high hit. Since such an effect can be applied even if a specific effect is a low-reliability effect in which the expectation for a big hit is not relatively high by default, such a low-reliability effect appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem that the player's interest may be lowered when the game is played.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194 is used, each battle history (battle history Q, R) to be transferred is lower than the distribution number of the alternative effect in the high hit pattern. Although the distribution number of the alternative effect in the hit pattern and the out-of-order pattern is set, the distribution of the alternative effect in such a low hit pattern or the out-of-order pattern does not necessarily have to be set. For example, if the alternative effect is not distributed in the out-of-order pattern, it will be a big hit when a specific effect appears in the alternative effect while the battle history is memorized and taught. Furthermore, it is possible to realize a special effect in which the jackpot has a high probability of being a high hit. In addition, if the alternative effect is not distributed in the low hit pattern, there is no possibility of low hit when a specific effect appears in the alternative effect while the battle history is memorized and taught. , You can realize the effect that if you hit, you will definitely get a big hit. Furthermore, if the alternative effects are not distributed for either the off-field pattern or the low-hit pattern, the high-hits will occur when a specific effect appears in the alternative effects while the battle history is being memorized and taught. It is possible to realize a special production that confirms.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the battle history is recorded in the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186, the distribution table 1B of FIG. 188, the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, and the distribution table 2B of FIG. The battle history is transferred based on the above, but after such a battle history transition is performed, the expectation for a big hit or a high hit when a specific production (winning production) appears is raised, and the battle history is increased. The more the transition is made, the higher the expectation. Therefore, for example, if Battle A Reach is a specific production, the player has a disappointing feeling that he could not get a big hit so that Battle A Reach appears in an out-of-order manner, but the battle history is recorded and the battle history. Since it can be expected that the transition stage of the battle A will progress, the expectation that the battle A reach will appear in the subsequent games will be raised. Then, when a big hit is obtained by the appearance of the battle A reach (or the appearance of the production of the battle A reach by the alternative production), the player feels a sense of accomplishment that can dispel the background of the loss due to the battle A reach up to that point. Furthermore, when the distribution tables 1A, 1B, and 2B are used, it is highly expected that such a big hit is a high hit, so that a greater sense of accomplishment can be given to the player. can.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined effect that can cause the specific effect to appear by an "alternative effect" that can be executed when the battle history related to the specific effect is recorded. Even if a variation pattern different from the variation pattern is selected, it is characterized in that a specific effect based on the record of the battle history can be displayed as an alternative, and such an "alternative effect" is used in the record of the battle history. It also has the feature that the expectation for a big hit (or a high hit) increases as the battle history shifts. According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the original display time (battle A effect is 22 seconds, and the battle A reach as a whole is 30 seconds) for a specific effect (for example, battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history. ), Even if a display time longer than (for example, 60 seconds) is selected, the specific effect can be made to appear by the alternative effect. In general, the longer the display time, the easier it is for the player's expectation that the game result will be a big hit (or a high hit). Therefore, a specific display time longer than the original display time is specified. By making the effect appear, the effect of making the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special effects described in [6-5-1] to [6-5-4] are specified according to each effect pattern (first to fourth effect patterns) of the alternative effect. Each of these effects is achieved.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU4100a) has the gaming medium launched toward the gaming area passing through the predetermined area. This is an example of a lottery means for drawing any one of a plurality of types of lottery results including at least advantageous games having different degrees of advantage and loss. The predetermined area corresponds to, for example, the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of the effect display means capable of displaying the effect based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control RAM 4140e) can produce a specific effect when the lottery result of the advantageous game is not obtained even though the lottery is performed by the lottery means. It is an example of an effect storage means that can memorize the appearance of the specific effect based on the appearance in the effect display means, and as a specific processing example, SP2 type battle A reach. When (specific effect) is executed in an out-of-order manner, the peripheral control MPU 4140a corresponds to recording the battle history in the peripheral control RAM 4140e. Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly peripheral control MPU4140a, liquid crystal control MPU4150a, and VDP4150c) and the liquid crystal display device 1900 are examples of information teaching means for teaching information related to the specific effect stored in the effect storage means. The information regarding the specific effect corresponds to, for example, "image data used for teaching the battle history" stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b or the character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150. A specific teaching example is the display in the teaching regions 1900a to 1900c shown in FIG. 192.

Further, in the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly, the peripheral control MPU4140a), when the storage by the effect storage means is performed, a variable time capable of producing a special effect longer than the specific effect is selected. However, it is an example of a special effect control means capable of causing the special effect to appear in a mode including the specific effect, and it is difficult to recall the specific effect in the first half of the display period of the special effect. Is an example of a different effect executing means for causing the effect display means to appear, and a specific effect executing means for causing the specific effect to appear in the effect display means in the latter half of the display period of the special effect. Here, the "special effect" corresponds to an alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern, and the different effect displayed by the different effect executing means corresponds to, for example, battle B (different effect A) in FIG. 202. However, the specific effect displayed by the specific effect executing means corresponds to the battle A in FIG. 202. Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly, the peripheral control MPU4140a) can display the specific effect by the special effect control means, so that the specific effect can be displayed when the memory is stored by the effect storage means. This is an example of a high privilege expectation increasing means that can raise the expectation that the advantageous game to be transferred is the advantageous game having a high degree of advantage when the effect is manifested and shifts to the advantageous game. Specifically, when the battle history related to the battle A production is being recorded, the high hit is won with the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds instead of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds that can make the battle A reach appear. In that case, it is easy to select a special effect, that is, "alternative effect (long battle B'reach or long battle C'reach)" by the distribution based on the battle history Q or battle history R of the distribution table 2B. When the battle history related to the battle A production is recorded, when the battle A production (specific production) appears and shifts to the big hit game, it corresponds to the high expectation that the big hit is a high hit. do.

[7. Continuous defeat effect using induction decoration member (object detection sensor)]
In the present embodiment, an image effect using an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a combined effect using the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212) in the table unit 2000. As a result, the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 detect the player's operation on the guided decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213, thereby producing a continuous defeat effect capable of defeating the enemy character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Running. In this continuous defeat effect, which will be described in detail later, as an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, 3 corresponding to each of the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 3 A human enemy character appears, and an instruction is given in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated (in which order the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 should be operated). Further, after operating the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 in the instructed order (the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 detect in the instructed order), the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 The player is instructed to operate once. Then, when the enemy character is defeated by operating the pressing operation unit 405, the pseudo continuous fluctuation is continued (all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the out-of-reach mode, which is not the reach mode in the variation display of the decorative symbols. After that, control to start the variable display of the decorative pattern again), and if the enemy character remains, the reach effect is developed without continuing the pseudo continuous variation by forming the reach mode. is doing.

As shown in FIG. 110, the middle object detection sensor 2116 and the middle guidance decorative member 2117 are both provided in the first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the middle guidance decoration member 2117 is inside. It is arranged so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the object detection sensor 2116. Further, the medium object detection sensor 2116 is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through a transparent glass unit 590. It is possible to detect whether or not the hand touches the middle guide decorative member 2117.

Further, the middle guide decorative member 2117 is arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the first starting port 2101, and is a peripheral portion (out port 1115) below the gaming area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player. (Except for the position close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100). Further, the middle guide decorative member 2117 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the lateral direction, and is arranged below the right guide decorative member 2144 and the left guide decorative member 2213, and the player is seated. In order to touch the right guide decorative member 2144 with the left hand while rotating the handle device 500 with the right hand in this state, it is not necessary to lift the arm more than the right guide decorative member 2144 and the left guide decorative member 2213, and the three guide decorative members 2117. , 214, 2213, it is easy to operate. It should be noted that the middle guide decorative member 2117 faces downward in a circle on the front surface in response to being arranged on the lower side of the three guide decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 visually as seen by the player. It is decorated with the arrow of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the right object detection sensor 2143 and the right guide decorative member 2144 are both provided in the fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the right guide decorative member 2144. Is arranged adjacent to the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143. Further, the right object detection sensor 2143 is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through a transparent glass unit 590. It is possible to detect whether or not the hand touches the right guide decorative member 2144.

Further, the right guidance decorative member 2144 is arranged on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is a peripheral portion slightly below the right side of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player (inner circumference of the game area 1100). It is located in a position close to). Further, the right guide decorative member 2144 is arranged on the right side in the lateral direction of the game area 1100, and while the player is seated, the handle device 500 is rotated with the right hand while touching the right guide decorative member 2144 with the left hand. Since the distance from the left hand is farther than that of the middle guide decorative member 2117 and the left guide decorative member 2213, it is difficult to operate among the three guide decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213. It should be noted that the right guide decorative member 2144 is arranged on the right side of the three guide decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 so as to be visually recognized by the player and is arranged on the right side in a circle on the front surface. It is decorated with arrows.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the left object detection sensor 2212 and the left guide decorative member 2213 are both provided on the front side unit 2200 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the left guide decorative member 2213 detects the left object. It is arranged adjacent to the left side of the sensor 2212. Further, the left object detection sensor 2212 is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through a transparent glass unit 590. It is possible to detect whether or not the hand touches the left guide decorative member 2213.

Further, the left guide decorative member 2213 is arranged on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is a peripheral portion slightly below the left side of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player (on the inner circumference of the game area 1100). It is located in a close position). Further, the left guide decorative member 2213 is arranged on the left side in the lateral direction of the game area 1100, and is arranged at the same height as the right guide decorative member 2144, but the handle device 500 is placed in a state where the player is seated. To touch the left guide decorative member 2213 with the left hand while rotating with the right hand, the distance from the left hand is closer than the right guide decorative member 2144, so the operation is performed among the three guide decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213. It's getting easier. Since the left guide decorative member 2213 is arranged on the left side of the three guide decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 as seen from the player, a left-pointing arrow is provided in a circle on the front surface. The arrangement is decorated.

In this example, the three induction decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are all arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the object detection sensor is arranged around the liquid crystal display device (for example, in the center accessory) as in the conventional case, when the player operates the object detection sensor to detect it, his / her own hand It is located in front of the liquid crystal display device, which hinders the visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and there is a risk that the effect content may not be fully understood. However, by arranging all three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 below the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. Even if it is operated, its own hand is not located in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and does not prevent the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from being visually recognized. Further, even if the player operates to detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, it is not necessary to lift the arm to a height of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or higher, and the three induction decorative members 2117, It is easy to operate each of 2144 and 2213.

Further, a transparent glass unit 590 is provided on the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. May touch the surface of the glass unit 590 and stain the surface when operating. At this time, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is soiled, it may be difficult to visually recognize the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Even if the player operates to detect any of them, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the induction decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213, and visually recognizes the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. There is no problem.

Further, in this example, the three guide decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are all peripheral portions (game area) of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player. It is located near the inner circumference of 1100). That is, the three guide decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) can roll the game ball in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player. Even if the player operates to detect any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, his / her own hand is on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Not only is it not located, but it is not located in front of the rolling region, especially the area around whether or not the game ball wins in the first starting port 2101, and the game ball wins in the first starting port 2101. It does not prevent you from visually recognizing whether or not it is. Further, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the rolling region is soiled, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether or not the game ball wins the first starting port 2101, but the object detection sensor 2116, 2143, Even if the player operates to detect any of 2212, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the induction decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2101. There is no problem in visually recognizing whether or not it is present.

Further, in this example, the induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, and the effect using the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is executed. At that time, instead of the player touching the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, the effect of guiding the player to touch the guided decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (for example, the guided decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213). Of 2213, only the designated guide decoration member is light-emitting and decorated) is being executed. Therefore, even if the player operates to detect any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the induction decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213, and is an object. The surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the detection sensors 2116, 2143 and 2212 will not be soiled. That is, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212 is soiled, it becomes difficult to detect the hand of the player who touches the induction decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213, but the object detection sensor 2116 , 2143, 2212 does not stain the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface, and the player's hand touching the induction decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213 can be reliably detected.

Further, in this example, during the control in the non-time saving state, the game is performed in which the game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start port 2101, but it can be visually recognized by the player. On the side of the rolling area where the game ball can roll from the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116) Of the 2143 and 2212), the middle guide decorative member 2117 and the left guide decorative member 2213 (middle object detection sensor 2116 and left object detection sensor 2212) are arranged. On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, the game is performed in which the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2102, but the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player is performed. Of these, on the side of the rolling region where the game ball can roll from the right side of the center accessory 2500, there are three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212). Among them, the right guide decorative member 2144 (right object detection sensor 2143) is arranged. As described above, as the rolling region, only one of the left and right sides of the center accessory 2500 is used depending on the gaming state, and the gaming region 1100 may give a cramped impression, but the three induction decorative members. When the effect using 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212) is executed, both the left and right sides of the center accessory 2500, that is, the entire game area 1100 is used, and a spacious game can be played. It can give the impression that it is being done.

Further, in this example, the guide decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are all arranged at the peripheral portion of the game area 1100 (position close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100), which can be visually recognized by the player. , It plays a role as a decorative part (for example, light emitting decoration) of the game area 1100 during the period when the effect using the induction decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212) is not executed. .. As described above, since the guiding decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 also serve as the decorative portion of the game area 1100, the area for arranging the guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 is referred to as the decorative portion. It is not necessary to provide them separately, and although the area of the game area 1100 is limited, it is possible to sufficiently secure a rolling area in which the game ball can roll.

In this example, the three induction decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are all below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the peripheral portion of the game area 1100 (game). Although it is located near the inner circumference of the area 1100), it is displayed on at least the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the player operates to detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. Any position may be used as long as it does not interfere with the visual recognition of the effect image to be produced. In addition to the liquid crystal display device 1900, information display related to the starting port (the area around the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and other effects) as to whether or not the game ball wins a prize (for the player). Areas for displaying information that can be useful information (for example, front right middle effect unit 2600, front right outside effect unit 2700, back top effect unit 3300, back bottom effect unit 3500, etc.) are provided at the peripheral edge of the game area. When the player operates to detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 even for a simple decorative area (not including a lamp, etc.), the player visually recognizes the area. It is desirable that the position does not interfere with.

Next, a specific production example of the continuous defeating effect using the guided decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212) will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. In this effect example, in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process processed by the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, "pseudo continuous variation" is performed before the reach effect is executed. (A variation pattern that is set to execute a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) of temporary stop display of an outlier symbol that does not become a reach mode) is determined (a variation pattern that does not execute pseudo continuous variation may be used). ), Based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, in the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, it is determined to execute the continuous defeat effect. show.

As shown in FIG. 203 (A), in the continuous defeat effect executed after starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, the instruction "touch the sensor to attack the enemy!" Is given at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. At the same time, three enemy characters are displayed side by side in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, any number 1 to 3 is assigned to the front of each of the three enemy characters, and an instruction is given in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated (in this example, middle). The order of the enemy character → left enemy character → right enemy character is specified). In this example, it is displayed so that the earlier the order of the three enemy characters is, the larger the size is, and it becomes easier to recognize in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated. ing.

Further, at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, member displays 1900a to 1900c that imitate each of the three guide decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 are shown, and arrows pointing to the left corresponding to the left guide decorative member 2213 in order from the left. Left member display 1900a on which is drawn, middle member display 1900b on which a downward arrow is drawn corresponding to the middle guide decorative member 2117, right member display 1900c on which a right arrow is drawn corresponding to the right guide decorative member 2144 Is displayed. These member displays 1900a to 1900c are displayed below each of the three enemy characters, and in order to defeat the three enemy characters in a specified order, the three guided decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 are displayed. You are instructed which one to operate. That is, in this example, it is instructed to defeat the enemy character in the order of the enemy character in the middle → the enemy character on the left → the enemy character on the right. It is possible for the player to recognize that the player should touch in the order of 2213 → right guide decorative member 2144. However, in this example, the player is required to touch in the order of the middle guide decorative member 2117 → the left guide decorative member 2213 → the right guide decorative member 2144, but the three guide decorative members 2117, 214, 2213 are required to touch. The player may be required to touch in any order. In this way, each time the continuous defeat effect is executed, the order instructed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the order of the guide decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 to be touched by the player is changed, so that the game area 1100 is executed. The trajectory drawn by the player's hand changes above, and the continuous defeating effect using the guided decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 can be made into an effect that does not get tired.

Further, slightly below the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the remaining time of the effective time permitted to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is displayed. In this example, while starting the effective time, first, only the detection by the middle object detection sensor 2116 is permitted among the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, and only the middle member display 1900b displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is specified. By lighting only the middle guide decorative member 2117 corresponding to the middle member display 1900b in the same color, the player is instructed to touch the middle guide decorative member 2117. In this example, the effective time is set to 5 seconds, and it is required that the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213, which are separated from each other, are touched in a short time. As described above, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 clearly shows the remaining effective time, so that the player's touch to the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 must be completed. Can be reliably recognized.

As shown in FIG. 203 (B), when the player touches the middle guidance decorative member 2117 and the middle object detection sensor 2116 detects it, the number 1 assigned to the enemy character inside is erased and the number 1 is erased. By attacking the enemy character inside and displaying the characters "HIT!", It is possible to reliably recognize that the player's hand has been detected by the medium object detection sensor 2116. Then, of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, only the detection by the left object detection sensor 2212 is permitted, and only the left member display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit in a predetermined color, and the left member display 1900a is lit. By lighting only the left-guided decorative member 2213 corresponding to the above in the same color, the player is instructed to touch the left-guided decorative member 2213.

As shown in FIG. 203 (C), when the player touches the left guidance decorative member 2213 and the left object detection sensor 2212 detects it, the number 2 assigned to the enemy character on the left is erased and the number 2 is erased. By attacking the enemy character on the left and displaying the characters "HIT!", It is possible to reliably recognize that the player's hand has been detected by the left object detection sensor 2212. Then, of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, only the detection by the right object detection sensor 2143 is permitted, and only the right member display 1900c displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit in a predetermined color, and the right member display 1900c is lit. By lighting only the right-guided decorative member 2144 corresponding to the above in the same color, the player is instructed to touch the right-guided decorative member 2144.

As shown in FIG. 203 (D), when the player touches the right guidance decorative member 2144 and the right object detection sensor 2143 detects it, the number 3 assigned to the right enemy character is deleted and the number 3 is deleted. By attacking the enemy character on the right and displaying the characters "HIT!", It is possible to reliably recognize that the player's hand has been detected by the right object detection sensor 2143. Then, after attacking all three enemy characters, the effective time for which detection by the press detection sensor 432c is permitted is started, and the permission for detection by the press detection sensor 432c is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 204 (E), the characters "Blow away!" Are displayed in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and an image imitating the pressing operation unit 405 is displayed for pressing. The player is instructed to operate the operation unit 405.

As shown in FIG. 204 (F), after the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 and the pressing detection sensor 432c detects it within the valid period of the pressing detection sensor 432c, an explosion occurs in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. If it happens and the three enemy characters can be defeated, it is judged that the continuous defeat production was successful. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (G), the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol, and the combination of the decorative symbols that continues the pseudo continuous variation (in this example, “ By displaying the temporary stop so as to be the temporary stop symbol of "7. Pseudo-ream. 8"), the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is continued. That is, when three enemy characters can be defeated, it can be recognized that the continuous defeat effect is successful and the pseudo continuous fluctuation is continued. In this example, as a combination of decorative symbols that continue pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the left and right decorative symbols are out-of-order symbols that do not have a reach mode, and the middle decorative symbols are drawn as "pseudo-ream". Then, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is continued, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the continuous defeat effect as shown in FIGS. 203 and 204 is executed again.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204 (H), after the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 and the pressing detection sensor 432c detects it within the valid period of the pressing detection sensor 432c, it is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. If the explosion does not occur and the three enemy characters cannot be defeated, it is determined that the continuous defeat effect has failed. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (I), the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped so as to form a reach mode (in this example, the reach symbol of "7") in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol. By displaying it, the reach effect is executed after that. That is, if the three enemy characters cannot be defeated, it can be recognized that the continuous defeat effect fails and the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not continued as in the case of the success of the continuous defeat effect.

In this example, the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 are adjacent to each of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, and are separated from each other on the front surface of the game area 1100, which can be visually recognized by the player. By sequentially touching the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 as instructed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the player when executing the continuous defeat effect, the player can move the separated positions to the player. The hand must be moved, and it is possible to make a dynamic movement within the area of the game area 1100. Further, by using the game area 1100 as an area for the player to operate, not only the game ball rolls or the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but also a wide area of the game area 1100 is effective. At the same time, it can give the player a sense of unity with the game.

Further, in this example, three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 and three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 are located at separated positions on the front surface of the game area 1100, which can be visually recognized by the player, respectively. It is provided adjacent to. For example, if only three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 are provided in the game area 1100, the positions detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 cannot be clearly recognized, but three. By providing the guide decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213, it is possible to clearly recognize where the player touches to detect the object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212. Therefore, while the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are provided at distant positions on the front surface of the game area 1100, the player does not have to worry about where to touch, and the continuous defeat effect is executed. At that time, the player can quickly touch the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 so as to detect them in order. Therefore, in the continuous defeat effect, the remaining effective time that is permitted to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set short (5 seconds in this example). ), It is possible for the player to complete the touch to the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 within the effective time without panicking.

Further, in this example, in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, not only is it instructed which of the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 the player should touch, but also the instructed induction decoration member 2117 is instructed. By lighting only 2,214,221, it is possible for the player to quickly touch the guide decorative member 2117, 2144, 221 that the player should touch without hesitation.

Further, in this example, optical sensors are used as the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through the transparent glass unit 590. It is detected whether the hand touches the induction decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213. As the detection range of these object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, it is possible to detect not only the front region of the guide decorative member 2117, 2144, 221 but also the region around the front region. The player does not necessarily have to touch the induction decorative member 2117, 214, 221 through the transparent glass unit 590, and passes through the area including the front region of the induction decoration member 2117, 2144, 221 (the glass unit 590 and the game). It is possible to detect even if the person's hand is slightly separated from the person's hand. That is, it is possible to detect the player's hand in a wider range than the area of the guiding decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213 while making the player clearly recognize the guiding decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213. .. Therefore, when the player quickly operates the guide decoration member 2117, 2144, 2213, the object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212 can detect even if the player operates the guide decorative member 2117, 2144, 2213 vaguely. Therefore, in the continuous defeat effect, the remaining effective time that is permitted to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set short (5 seconds in this example). ), It is possible for the player to complete the touch to the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 within the effective time without panicking.

When an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 405 that can be directly operated by the player is provided on the game area 1100, the vibration when the player operates (presses) is a game. Although it is transmitted to the area 1100 and may affect the rolling of the game ball on the game area 1100, the player can directly use the guide decorative member 2117, 2144, 221 and the object detection sensor 2116, 2143, 2212. There is no need to operate the device, and such a problem does not occur.

Further, in this example, the three induction decorative members 2117, 214, 221 are provided on the game area 1100 which is parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, whereas the pressing operation unit 405 is the game window. It is provided in the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300 having an upper plate 301 projecting forward and storing a game ball under the 101 so as to be perpendicular to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In other words, the target to be touched by the player in the induction decorative member 2117, 214, 221 should be operated by the player in the pressing operation unit 405 while the object to be touched is parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The object forms a vertical plane with the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when a plurality of pressing operation units are provided on the plate unit 300, the player who is visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces downward in order to recognize the pressing operation unit to be operated by the player. There was a risk of overlooking the effect content displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. On the other hand, when the three induction decorative members 2117, 214, 221 are provided on the game area 1100, the player who is visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not look down and the player touches. It is possible to recognize the guidance decorative members 2117, 214, 221 to be performed, and the effect content displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not overlooked. The three induction decorative members 2117, 214, 221 are provided closer to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 than the pressing operation unit 405, and are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to further direct the player. It can make you feel like you are participating in the production).

Further, in this example, the three induction decorative members 2117, 214, 221 are provided on the game area 1100, that is, in an area where the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be visually recognized and put into the player's field of view. On the other hand, the pressing operation unit 405 is provided on the dish unit 300, that is, in an area where it is difficult to enter the player's field of view while visually observing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, the three induction decorative members 2117, 214, 221 are not only on the game area 1100 but also, for example, as areas that can be put into the player's view while visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It may be provided in an area on the game board 4 that can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 formed in the door frame 5 (a region other than the game area 1100 in the game board 4), or from the lower end of the game area 1100. If it is above, it may be provided on the side of the door frame base main body 110 that is the periphery of the game area 1100.

Further, in this example, the player does not touch all of the three induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 within the effective time permitted to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. If all of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 are not detected, or without the player touching the last designated guide decorative member among the three guide decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213, 3 When only one or two object detection sensors out of the two object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 are detected, all three enemy characters are not attacked. In such a case, after the effective time (5 seconds in this example) ends, as shown in FIG. 204 (E), the player instructs the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405, and three enemies. The same effect as after attacking all of the characters is performed.

Further, in this example, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated by the player and the pressing detection sensor 432c does not detect the pressing within the effective time permitted to be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c, the pressing is performed. Whether or not three enemy characters can be defeated based on the explosion occurring in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 after the end of the detection sensor 432c within the valid period, that is, whether or not the continuous defeat effect is successful. Can be judged. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation is continued until after the end of the valid period of the press detection sensor 432c, and the player operates the press operation unit 405 (continuous defeat effect). To participate in).

Further, the "pseudo-continuous variation" in this example is similar to the "normal variation" (variation in which the display is stopped and displayed with a missed symbol without a reach mode), and all the decorative symbols are reached in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Temporary stop display (for example, a state in which the middle decorative symbol is drawn as "pseudo-ream" in this example) and is not completely stopped (for example, shaking up and down in small steps: shaking fluctuation display) ), The variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the temporary stop display is performed with the off-target symbol that does not become the reach mode continuously (repeatedly) for a predetermined number of times (the number of times set in the variable pattern). In addition, as long as the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a temporary stop display that does not become the reach mode in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and on the other hand, when the reach mode is formed, the reach effect is performed thereafter. The reach effect set in the fluctuation pattern) is executed. Further, in this example, the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation" is executed before the reach effect is executed, but in the "pseudo-continuous fluctuation", the number of times of one to three out-of-bounds symbols that do not correspond to the reach mode is performed. Only the temporary stop can be displayed.

Further, in this example, in the variation pattern table referred to in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern for executing "pseudo continuous variation" is not a reach mode. A variation pattern is set in which the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed only one to three times. Then, in the fluctuation pattern table, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, the larger the number of times that the outlier symbols that are not in the reach mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation (big hit expectation = appearance rate at jackpot / total appearance). Judgment values are distributed to fluctuation patterns so that the rate) is high. That is, when the determination result is a big hit, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, the number of times that the outlier symbol that does not have the reach mode is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result is out of order. For this reason, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, the more times the out-of-order symbols that are not in the reach mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, the higher the rate at which the determination result becomes a big hit, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state. Is increasing.

Further, in this example, when the variation pattern of "pseudo continuous variation" is determined in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process processed by the main control MPU4100a of the control board 4100. , A fluctuation pattern command capable of specifying the fluctuation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, in the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, when the variation pattern of "pseudo continuous variation" is specified from the variation pattern command, the continuous defeat effect is performed based on the variation pattern. If it is decided whether or not to execute it, and if it is decided to execute the continuous defeat effect, the continuous defeat effect is successful according to the number of times that the outlier symbol that does not become the reach mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in "pseudo continuous fluctuation". Determine the number of times to do. For example, in the case of temporarily stopping and displaying an outlier symbol that does not have a reach mode in "pseudo continuous fluctuation" only three times, the continuous defeat effect is successful only three times as in the case of that number of times. In addition, when executing "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the more times the out-of-order symbols that are not in the reach mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, that is, the more times the continuous defeat effect succeeds, the larger the judgment result becomes. The percentage is high. For this reason, in the continuous defeat effect, it is hoped that the effect will be successful and the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" will continue, and the player will touch the induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 and the player will operate the pressing operation unit 405. You will be able to participate in the continuous defeat production.

Further, in this example, not only when the fluctuation pattern that executes "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is determined, but also when the fluctuation pattern that does not execute "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is determined, the continuous defeat effect is produced based on the fluctuation pattern. May be decided whether or not to execute. At this time, even if it is decided to execute the continuous defeat effect, the outlier symbol that does not have the reach mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed as in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", and the first continuous defeat effect fails. It has become.

Further, in this example, when the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed, the out-of-bounds symbol (in this example, the temporary stop symbol of "7, pseudo-ream, 8") that does not reach the reach mode is temporarily stopped, but "pseudo" is displayed. The same temporary stop symbol is repeatedly displayed as a temporary stop regardless of the number of times the temporary stop display of the out-of-bounds symbol that does not become the reach mode in "continuous fluctuation" is performed. Further, the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is the symbol of the reach mode formed after the execution of the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" as it is (in this example, the reach symbol of "7"). It is controlled to be. That is, in the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, first, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the determination result notification command transmitted from the main control board 4100, and then the stop symbol is determined. When the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is the first stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol. It is determined that the symbol is the same as the displayed left decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped next to the left decorative symbol in "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is different from the temporary stop symbol of the left decorative symbol. It is determined to be a symbol (in this example, the symbol of the left decorative symbol + 1), and the medium decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed at the end by "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is the symbol drawn as "pseudo-ream". It is supposed to be decided.

Further, in this example, when the fluctuation pattern for executing the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is determined, the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 after the player touches the guided decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 in order. Although the continuous defeat effect instructed in is being executed, the continuous defeat effect using only one of them may be executed, and the game is played on the guide decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 as instructed in the continuous defeat effect. Even if it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous defeat effect is successful and recognize whether or not to continue the pseudo continuous fluctuation when the player touches them in order or when the player operates the pressing operation unit 405. good.

In this example, in addition to the continuous defeating effect, an effect using the pressing operation unit 405 was executed, and the pressing operation unit 405 was used at a higher rate than the effect using the induction decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213. I try to perform the production. For example, in the "normal variation" (the period from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the decorative symbol as to whether or not the reach mode is formed) before the reach effect is executed, the liquid crystal display device. A "box" is displayed on the screen of the 1900, and the player is instructed to operate the pressing operation unit 405. At this time, the effective time for which detection is permitted by the pressure detection sensor 432c is started, and the permission for detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is started. When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 and the pressing detection sensor 432c detects it within the valid period of the pressing detection sensor 432c, the character A is displayed from the "box" displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The effect that any of ~ C appears is executed. In such an effect, the characters to appear are determined so that the jackpot expectation (big hit expectation = appearance rate at the time of jackpot / total appearance rate) increases in the order of character A → character B → character C. For example, when the character C appears, the rate at which the determination result becomes a big hit increases, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state increases.

[8. Game in high probability time saving state]
The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can provide a characteristic game when the game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state. In this chapter, the game in such a high-probability time-saving state will be described in detail. In this chapter, for the sake of brevity of explanation, numerical values and the like different from the setting contents used in the explanations so far may be newly set, but unless otherwise specified, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is used. The machine 1 inherits the setting contents and the configuration used in the above description.

Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to a high probability time saving state will be described in detail. First, in [8-1], a game method in a time-saving state (including a high-probability time-saving state) will be described, and in [8-2] and thereafter, game progress in a high-probability time-saving state will be described.

In this chapter, regarding the type of jackpot exemplified in FIG. 173 (C), if the specific 1 is won, the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to the high probability non-time saving state, and the specific 2 to specific. If 5 is won, the gaming state after the big hit game is controlled to the high probability non-time saving state, and if the non-specific winning is won, the gaming state after the big hit game is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state. That is, the specific 2 to the specific 5 are jackpots to which a game state advantageous for the player, which is a high probability time saving state after the jackpot game, is given, and are also referred to as "advantageous jackpot" below. On the other hand, Specified 1 or Non-Specified is a jackpot controlled in a non-time saving state after the jackpot game, and is less advantageous to the player than the "advantageous jackpot". Therefore, it is also referred to as a "disadvantageous jackpot" below.

[8-1. Right-handed game]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game board 4 hits the game ball to the right side of the center bonus 2500 (hits with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game board 4 passes through the outer periphery of the right side of the center bonus 2500 and is an attacker unit. It flows down to the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the 2100, is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142, and is discharged from directly above the gate portion 2105 to the lower side, and the game ball hits the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability. It is designed to pass through. That is, the game ball can be easily entered into the gate portion 2105 by performing a so-called right-handed strike.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state, the game by right-handed is recommended, and the right-handed game is performed, so that the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 is extremely. It is possible to enter the ball into the second starting port 2102 with a high probability.

Specifically, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 100% (for example, 251/251) so that the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a hit. Further, regarding the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 80 ms, the stop display time is 500 ms, and the interval period from the closing of the movable piece 2106 to the start of the next normal symbol fluctuation is 464 ms. The time during which the variable display control is performed is set to an extremely short predetermined time as compared with the conventional gaming machine. Further, when a hit is obtained by lottery of a normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 2102 by the movable piece 2106 is set to a predetermined time of 5800 ms, so that the second starting port 2102 can be easily opened. I try to keep it for a long time.

That is, by being controlled by the above settings, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit is extremely high (all wins) in the time saving state, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short. Since the second starting port 2102 is in the open state for a long time, it is much easier to make the second starting port 2102 win the game ball, and the second starting port 2101 is more than the first starting port 2101. If you hit the right side aiming at the mouth 2102, you can win the game ball more efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to a constant short time in the time saving state, and the opening time of the movable piece 2106 accompanying the winning of the normal symbol (second starting port 2102). By setting the opening time (which may be read as the opening time) to a fixed long time, a series of operations from the start of the normal lottery based on the passage of the game ball of the gate portion 2105 to the opening and closing of the movable piece 2106 are executed in a fixed time. Can be made to. Then, by setting a short time from the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2105 to the opening of the movable piece 2106 and a long time from the opening to the closing, the game passing through the gate portion 2105. The ball is easily accepted by the second starting port 2102 as it is. Further, since the time when the movable piece 2106 is in the closed state is short even including the interval period, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the game balls heading for the out opening 1151 without being accepted by any winning opening. .. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the opening of the movable piece 2106 at the set time as described above, substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 in a short time can be displayed. It can be accepted by the second starting port 2102.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to realizing a situation in which substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 are received by the second starting port 2102 as described above, the second starting port 2102 is used. The average time required for the variation processing of the second special symbol performed based on the entry into 2102 is one cycle when the game ball is continuously launched (for example, one shot if 100 shots per minute). By making it longer than 60 ms), it is possible to have a tendency to maintain or increase the number of reserved second special symbols when right-handed games are continuously performed in a short time state, and the second special lottery can be held. It can be executed continuously without interruption.

In the present embodiment, by setting the number of game balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 2102 to "1", the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is frequently performed. Even if it happens, it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of game balls held by the player, enhance the interest of the player, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is recommended to hit the game ball to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called left-handed) in the non-time-saving game state (for example, low-probability non-time-saving state). When a left-handed strike is performed in such a game state, the game ball is guided in the direction of the front side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of planted obstacle nails, so that the front side unit 2200 is generally used. It is possible to win a game ball through the winning opening 2201, the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning opening 2104, and the like. Further, when the game ball is guided to the warp entrance 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500 and the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. The game ball supplied to the 2510 rolls left and right on the stage 2510, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement caused by the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, it is possible to win a prize in the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with a high probability.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when right-handed hitting is performed in the non-time saving state, the ball is controlled in the non-time saving state so that the ball does not easily enter the second starting port 2102. , The winning probability of a normal symbol is set to 0% (for example, 0/251). By doing so, it is possible to make the lottery result of the normal symbol not a hit, so even if a right-handed hit aimed at the second starting opening 2102 is performed, the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 2102. You can prevent it from being balled.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time is controlled to be shortened, it is possible to more efficiently win the game ball by aiming at the second starting port 2102 than at the first starting port 2101. , The player will perform a right-handed game aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball wins at the second starting port 2102. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second starting port 2102 is opened, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2102, the game ball passing through the gate portion 2105 is released. , The second starting port 2102 is designed to win a prize with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and is the first during the control of the non-time saving state. Compared to the starting port 2101, the game ball will win the second starting opening 2102 extremely efficiently.

[8-2. Outline of game progress (high probability time saving state)]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special lottery or the second special lottery is performed to win a predetermined jackpot, and after the jackpot game of the jackpot is completed, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability time saving state. .. Such a predetermined jackpot is the above-mentioned "advantageous jackpot" in [8], and corresponds to the jackpot of specific 2 to specific 5 in the type of jackpot exemplified in FIG. 173 (C).

FIG. 205 is a diagram for explaining the game progress when the advantageous jackpot is won. In FIG. 205, as the progress stages of the game after winning the advantageous big hit, "big hit in progress", "big hit ED (ending)", "manufacturer guidance", "PC (prepaid card) alert", "mode selection", "mode". "Decision" and "Mode-only production" are shown. The numbers attached to each progress stage in FIG. 205 show an example of the dwell time assigned to each progress stage. In addition, each progress stage other than "big hit" is also called "directing mode". Further, FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of effect display accompanying the progress of the game shown in FIG. 205. FIG. 206 shows a representative example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at each progress stage. In the following, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, the game progress when the advantageous jackpot is won will be described in the order of the effect modes that appear.

The various effects described below are mainly displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and are controlled by the peripheral control board 4010.

First, "during big hit" is an effect mode indicating that the big hit game is being digested (during the big hit game state). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time of a big hit with a ball (specific 2, specific 4, specific 5), the big hit game is digested by the right-handed game. After the big hit game, all of them are controlled to a high probability time saving state, so that the recommendation of the right-handed game continues at least until the next big hit winning.

FIG. 206 (A) is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the “big hit”. In the display screen of FIG. 206 (A), "Final" on the upper left means that the final round (for example, the 16th round) is being executed, and "V" in the central part means that a big hit is being made. There is. Further, "333" shown in the lower right display area 1900p indicates a set of decorative patterns corresponding to the jackpot during digestion. Further, in the display area 1900q, a display (right-handed display) for instructing the digestion of the jackpot game to be performed by right-handed is displayed.

It should be noted that these display positions on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. 206A are only examples, and an arbitrary image or the like can be displayed at an arbitrary place at the time of designing. The degree of freedom is the same in FIGS. 206 (B) to 206 (G), which will be described later.

Next, the "big hit ED (ending)" is an effect mode that transitions after the final round of the big hit game among the "big hits", and according to FIG. 205, the staying time of 6780 ms (500 + 6280) is assigned. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, from the middle of the "big hit ED", the lottery process for winning the special symbol (if there is no hold for the second special lottery, the first special lottery and the second special lottery). (If there is a hold, the second special lottery) is started, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is set within the variation time of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Is determined, and the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started according to each of the determined variation patterns. In the following, the series of steps will be broadly understood, and the notation such as "the variation pattern of the design (special design, decorative design) will be determined based on the result of the lottery process (special lottery)" will be used. There is.

Regarding the start of such a special lottery, FIG. 205 shows that the lottery process is started when 500 ms has elapsed (point P) after the transition to the “big hit ED”. In other words, the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU4100a) controls the gaming state to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state) from the timing of the P point of "big hit medium" to "big hit ED", and during this period. , No lottery processing or variable processing related to winning of special symbols will be performed. Then, at the timing of the P point, the main control board 4100 (particularly, the main control MPU4100a) shifts the gaming state to the high-probability time-saving state, and makes it possible to execute the lottery process for the high-probability time regarding the winning of the special symbol.

As for the lottery of ordinary symbols (ordinary lottery), the lottery is performed in a normal low probability state at the timing until the P point is reached, including during the big hit. If the normal symbol fluctuates when the P point is reached, the fluctuation is confirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, after that, a normal lottery is performed in a high probability state for shortening the time. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the case of winning in the normal lottery in the low probability state (normal) and the case of winning in the normal lottery in the high probability state (for shortening the time) are extremely short. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is selected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is hit to the right in a short time state, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with a high probability, and then the game ball is passed through the game ball with an extremely high probability of the second starting port 2102. If a right-handed hit is made just before reaching the P point, the second special lottery will be started immediately after the start of the high-probability gaming state, even if there is no reservation for the special symbol change. At the same time, by continuing right-handed hitting after that, it becomes possible to continuously hold the second special lottery.

FIG. 206 (B) is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the “big hit ED”. In FIG. 206 (B), a predetermined image indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed on the display screen, and by displaying such an image, it is possible to teach the player that the jackpot game has ended. The display in the display area 1900r and the display area 1900s in FIG. 206 (B) will be described in the same display in the “manufacturer guide” exemplified in FIG. 206 (C).

Next, the "manufacturer guide" is an effect mode that transitions after the stay time assigned to the "big hit ED" has elapsed, and according to FIG. 205, the stay time of 6280 ms is assigned.

FIG. 206 (C) is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the “Manufacturer's Guide”. In FIG. 206 (C), a predetermined image showing the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Further, in the display area 1900s at the upper center of FIG. 206 (C), a display (right-handed display) for instructing right-handed digestion in the time-saving state is shown. The right-handed display of the display area 1900s in FIG. 206 (C) is more emphasized than the right-handed display of the display area 1900q in FIGS. 206 (A) and 206 (G), and is right-handed. It is a display that can appeal to the player more strongly to do.

Further, one number is shown in each of the display areas 1900r provided at the three corners of the display screen of FIG. 206 (C). This display area 1900r is a display area for variable display of decorative symbols, and a decorative symbol row is formed by combining the displays of the three display areas 1900r (for example, provided at three corners). When "7" is displayed in all of the display areas 1900r, it is a combination of the odd number of the same decorative symbols described above). The display of the decorative symbol in such a display area 1900r appears in a specific effect mode (specifically, an effect mode included from points P to Q in FIG. 205) in a high probability time saving state, and other It is a mode in which it is more difficult for the player to recognize the decorative symbol sequence than the display of the decorative symbol in the game situation. For example, compared to the decorative symbol row (“arrow” means the changing decorative symbol) displayed large near the center of the display screen in FIG. 206 (G), three decorative symbols are displayed in FIG. 206 (G). The decorative symbol rows are displayed side by side in one place (near the center of the display screen), and the display area 1900r in which a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed at independent positions is less recognized by the player. It is clear that it will be.

The display mode of the decorative symbol in the above-mentioned "specific effect mode in the high probability time saving state" is not limited to the display example of the display area 1900r in FIG. 206 (C), and the decorative symbol is changed (stopped). Any aspect can be used as long as it can suppress the degree of recognition of (including). For example, the display area per decorative symbol may be reduced or the display brightness may be lowered to reduce the recognition degree of the decorative symbol sequence (or the decorative symbol itself), or a combination thereof. You may. By suppressing the degree of recognition of the decorative symbol sequence (or the decorative symbol itself) in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the fluctuation of the decorative symbol. Since many players play games while looking mainly at the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a special lottery is internally executed by realizing a game situation in which it is difficult to notice the variable display of the decorative pattern. It can be expected that the player will not notice.

As described above, an example of the display screen in the effect mode of the "manufacturer's guide" has been described with reference to FIG. 206 (C). The "decorative symbol display" is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from a predetermined timing after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the display is started from the timing of transition to the "big hit ED" (see FIG. 206 (B)). In addition, when "right-handed display by emphasis mode" or "decorative pattern display with reduced recognition degree" is displayed in addition to other display images, the display method is superimposed display by a plurality of transparent layers. It may be a switching display in which a plurality of display images are periodically replaced and displayed.

Next, "PC alert" is an effect mode that transitions after "manufacturer guidance", and according to FIG. 205, a stay time of 12560 ms is assigned. In "PC alert", useful information is provided so that the player does not suffer any disadvantage, such as being careful not to forget the prepaid card (PC) required for lending the game ball in the ball lending machine. The provided "attention effect" is performed. Such a caution effect is a functional effect (or a function effect) in that it provides a player with predetermined useful information regardless of whether or not a lottery related to a game such as a special symbol lottery or a normal symbol lottery is executed. It can be called (functional production). As the functional effect, in addition to the above-mentioned caution effect, there is a "setting effect" that makes it possible to adjust the volume, the amount of light, and the like in the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 206 (D) is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in "PC attention". In FIG. 206 (D), a warning message "Please be careful not to forget or steal the prepaid card" is displayed on the display screen, and a warning image instructing the player to remove the prepaid card (PC) from the ball lending machine is displayed. ing. By displaying such a display, the player is reminded again in a situation where the player's interest in the prepaid card in the ball lending machine has diminished after the big hit game, and the disadvantage of the player is suppressed. be able to.

As in the case of FIG. 206 (C), on the display screen of FIG. 206 (D), "right-handed display by emphasizing mode" and "decorative symbol display with reduced recognition degree" are displayed. It should be noted that the right-handed display of the display area 1900t is slightly less noticeable than the right-handed display in the display area 1900r of FIG. 206 (C), but is still emphasized compared to the right-handed display of the display area 1900q. , Can be called "right-handed display by emphasis mode". Such "right-handed display by emphasis mode" and "decorative pattern display with reduced recognition degree" are displayed in "mode selection (FIG. 206 (E))" and "mode determination (FIG. 206 (F))" described later. The same is true for.

Next, the "mode selection" is an effect mode in which the transition is made after the staying time assigned to the "PC alert" has elapsed, and according to FIG. 205, the staying time of 12560 ms is assigned.

FIG. 206 (E) is an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in "mode selection". In FIG. 206 (E), two types of characters are selectably displayed in the center of the display screen, and an instruction to "select a character" is displayed in the lower part. The mode selection screen is a screen for selecting a character to be used in the subsequent mode-dedicated effect (FIG. 206 (G)), and the selection method is, for example, a player operating a jog dial or the like for a predetermined time. The character displayed in the foreground (desired to be selected) may be determined when the lapse of time has elapsed, or a button for determination can be made by the player at a desired timing so that different characters can be selected periodically. You may press. Further, although the character is selected as an example here, it is possible to prepare an arbitrary selection mode such as a story type selection or an effect type selection.

Next, the "mode determination" is an effect mode in which the transition is made after the stay time assigned to the "mode selection" has elapsed, and according to FIG. 205, the stay time of 14444 ms is assigned.

FIG. 206F is an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the "mode determination", and shows that the selection of the character selected in the "mode selection" is confirmed. However, the effect mode in the "mode determination" indicates that the selection result of the "mode selection" has been confirmed, and the effect for which the selection result is valid is from the next "mode-only effect" stage. Will be executed. In the display screen example of FIG. 206 (F), a screen in which the selected character speaks a predetermined line is displayed in the center of the display screen, and an effect corresponding to the character is performed in the "mode-only effect" that is transitioned thereafter. It shows that it will be done.

The "mode-only effect" is an effect mode that transitions after the staying time assigned to the "mode determination" has elapsed, and continues until the next big hit is won. In the "mode-only effect", a dedicated effect prepared in advance is performed based on the mode determined in the "mode determination".

FIG. 206 (G) is an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the “mode-dedicated effect”, and shows how the “dedicated effect” based on the character shown in the “mode determination” is started. ing. Specifically, in the display screen example of FIG. 206 (G), an image in which the selected character is walking toward the destination is displayed, thereby showing a dedicated effect centered on the character. Has been done. The dedicated effect referred to here is one of the effects in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and for example, the background and display characters of the screen display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are regarded as "dedicated effects". It can be assumed.

Further, in the display area 1900u at the lower part of the display screen example of FIG. 206 (G), the variable hold status of the decorative symbol (three are held with four as the maximum number of holds) is displayed. Further, in the display area 1900p, variable display of the decorative symbol sequence is performed, and such display of the decorative symbol sequence is "decorative symbol with suppressed recognition degree" from points P to Q in FIG. 205. Unlike the "display", the display is a decorative pattern that is easy for the player to recognize. In this way, after shifting to the effect mode of the "mode-only effect" (after the Q point), the player can easily recognize or be aware of the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the effect mode up to the "mode determination". The effect display according to the mode is performed, and the player can be given the impression that the symbol change is started from the timing of the Q point.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to a high probability time saving state after the big hit game indicated by "big hit medium", the "big hit ED" (FIG. 206 (B)) is changed to the "mode". Each effect mode up to "dedicated effect" (FIG. 206 (G)) transitions in a predetermined order. Of these, the "big hit ED" to the "mode-only effect" are effect modes that transition in a fixed order, and the effect content of each effect mode is not related to the execution result of the special lottery. .. Hereinafter, the effect mode group from the "big hit ED" to the "mode-only effect" displayed regardless of the special lottery will be referred to as a "series of effect mode groups". When the transition is determined by the staying time as illustrated in FIG. 205, each effect mode of the "series of effect mode groups" is also an effect mode that appears regardless of the execution of the special lottery. I can say.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the game progress when an advantageous big hit (a big hit controlled to a high probability time saving state after the big hit game) is won, the game progresses from the middle of the "big hit ED" (point P in FIG. 205). The special lottery (the first special lottery if there is no hold for the second special lottery, the second special lottery if there is a hold for the second special lottery) is started, and until the "mode decision" ( (Up to point Q in FIG. 205) is a display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol performed in association with the special lottery. Then, after the "mode-only effect" is adopted, the variable display of the decorative pattern is easily recognized by the player. By doing so, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the execution of a series of production mode groups up to the "mode determination", the execution of the special lottery and the design (mainly) in a situation that is difficult for the player to recognize. Since it is possible to advance the variable display of the decorative symbol), it is possible to suppress the prolongation of the gaming situation in which the winning result cannot be obtained while the variable display of the symbol accompanying the execution of the second special lottery is displayed. ..

In this example, the "mode-only effect" is an effect that can appear only when the game is controlled to a high-probability gaming state. That is, when the effect mode of the "mode-only effect" is displayed, it is suggested (or taught) to the player that the game is in a high-probability gaming state. Since there are "mode selection" and "mode determination" before the "mode-only effect" as the effect mode for determining the character in such "mode-only effect", "mode selection" and "mode determination" The "mode determination" is "a production indicating the start of the high-probability gaming state" to the player apparently, although it is already controlled to the high-probability gaming state internally.

[8-3. Fluctuation pattern in high probability time saving state]
In the following, the determination of the fluctuation pattern in each effect mode in the high-probability time-saving state described in [8-2], the special effect when a big hit is won in the high-probability time-saving state, and the like will be described.

First, as described above, in the high probability time saving state, the second special lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 2102 becomes the center of the special lottery, and according to the jackpot determination table used in the second special lottery. The second special random number that becomes a big hit is selected with a winning probability of 1/120 (FIG. 173 (A)). Further, according to the reach determination table at the time of loss, the reach effect is not selected at the time of loss in the high probability time saving state (probability change). Further, when the big hit is won, the reach effect is always selected, and therefore, when the reach effect appears in the high probability time saving state (probability change), the big hit is always obtained (FIG. 173 (B)). Then, the type of jackpot that can be won by the second special lottery in a high probability time saving state (probability change) is one of specific 1, specific 2, specific 5, and non-specific.

In addition, regarding the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol selected in the high probability time saving state, the fluctuation time when there is no reach (that is, when the time is off) is the total of the fluctuation state of 128 ms and the stop state of 500 ms in the state where the hold exists. It is assumed that the fluctuation time of 628 ms is selected, and in the state where there is no hold, the fluctuation time of 1920 ms in the fluctuation state and 500 ms in the stop state is selected, for a total fluctuation time of 2420 ms. In this example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol are assumed to be the same.

[8-3-1. Fluctuation pattern according to the number of rotations after the big hit]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern of a high-probability time-saving state. In FIG. 207, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU4100a) has a variation pattern (until the symbol is determined) according to the rotation speed of the special symbol after the end of the advantageous jackpot, the winning lottery result, and the winning type. Fluctuation time) is determined. Then, it is shown that the peripheral control board 4010 (peripheral control unit 4140, liquid crystal control unit 4150) determines which effect is to be executed based on those conditions determined by the main control board 4100. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right-handed game is continued from the "big hit" to each subsequent production mode, so that the ball enters the second starting port 2102 continuously. The special lottery (mainly the second special lottery) can be started from the middle of the "big hit ED", and the variable display of the symbols (special symbols, decorative symbols) based on the result of the special lottery is continuously displayed. Can be executed. Then, at the time of disconnection, a fixed time fluctuation time of 628 ms is selected, and as shown in FIG. 205, the staying time of each effect mode is set in advance. It can be associated with the stay status of each production mode after that. The correspondence between the "rotational speed after the end of the big hit" and the "effect mode" in FIG. 207 is established from such a background.

The variation pattern shown in FIG. 207 is a variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected based on the result of the special lottery. The variation time of the decorative symbol is equal to the variation time of the special symbol determined based on the result of the special lottery. According to FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is out of order, normal variation is selected for the effect of the variation pattern, and the variation time is fixed at 628 ms. Since the fluctuation time of 628 ms is a short time of less than 1 second, the display mode may be such that the decorative symbol is stopped almost immediately in the effect of normal fluctuation.

Further, according to FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the number of rotations after the end of the big hit at the time of winning the big hit (hereinafter, may be simply abbreviated as "rotational speed") and the type of the big hit are used. Based on this, the variation pattern is selected.

When the type of jackpot is not specified (4R normal hit without a ball), "forced battle" is selected for the effect of the fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of rotations, and the fluctuation time is fixed at 30,000 ms. "Forced battle" is one of the reach effects, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209.

If the type of jackpot is Specified 1 (4R probability variation without ball output), Specified 2 (4R probability variation with ball output), and Specified 5 (16R probability variation with ball output), the following is based on the number of revolutions. The fluctuation pattern is selected as follows.

First, when the number of rotations is from 1 to 10 times (the production mode corresponds to "big hit ED"), or when the number of rotations is from 11 to 20 times (the production mode corresponds to "manufacturer guidance"), "Forced battle" is selected for the effect of the fluctuation pattern, and 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms is selected for the fluctuation time. The fluctuation time of the "forced battle" when the jackpot is probable is selected from 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms depending on the type of jackpot, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 208.

Next, when the number of rotations is from 21 to 40 (the production mode corresponds to "PC attention"), either "forced battle" or "special PC image" is 1: 1 for the production of the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation time is selected in 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms in the case of "forced battle" and 2000 ms in the case of "special PC image". The "special PC image" is one of the special effects in which a specific jackpot is confirmed, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 210.

Next, when the number of rotations is from 41 to 60 (the effect mode corresponds to "mode selection"), the effect of the fluctuation pattern is 1: 1 for either "forced battle" or "special selection mode". The fluctuation time is selected to be 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms in the case of "forced battle" and 6000 ms in the case of "special selection mode". The "special selection mode" is one of the special effects in which a specific jackpot is determined, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 211.

Next, when the number of rotations is from 61 to 83 (the production mode corresponds to "mode determination"), either "forced battle" or "special dialogue" is selected 1: 1 for the production of the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation time is selected to be 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms in the case of "forced battle" and 10,000 ms in the case of "special dialogue". "Special dialogue" is one of the special effects in which a specific jackpot is confirmed, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

Finally, when the rotation speed is 84 times or more (the effect mode corresponds to the "mode-only effect"), "forced battle" is selected for the effect of the variation pattern, and 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms is selected for the variation time. When the rotation speed is 84 times or more (“mode-only effect”), other variation patterns and effects not exemplified in this example may be prepared. In addition, since the specific 1 is controlled to the high probability non-time saving state after the big hit game, the degree of advantage is lower than the "advantageous big hit" controlled to the high probability time saving state after the big hit game, and as described above, " Since it can be included in the "disadvantageous jackpot", the same fluctuation pattern as the normal hit may be selected in FIG. 207.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, it is based on the number of rotations after the big hit at the time of the big hit and the type of the big hit. A variation pattern is selected, and the selection of such a variation pattern has the following characteristics. That is, when the jackpot is won when the number of rotations is from 1 to 20 (“Big hit ED” or “Manufacturer's guide”), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern indicating the jackpot is 30,000 ms at the shortest, and the symbol variation. At least 30,000 ms will elapse before the jackpot is shown by the stop. Here, considering that the staying time of each of the "big hit ED" and the "manufacturer guide" after the start of the special lottery is allowed is 6280 ms (12560 ms in total), the production mode is "big hit ED" or "big hit ED". Even if the jackpot is won in the "Manufacturer's guide", when the variable display of the symbol is finished and the jackpot is taught, the effect mode is changed to "PC attention".

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special lottery can be executed from the middle of the "big hit ED", but the fact that the big hit is won in the special lottery is during the production mode of the "big hit ED" or the "maker guide". It is not taught to the player, and is controlled to be taught at least in the effect mode after "PC attention".

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the period of a series of effect mode groups appearing in an effect mode not related to the execution result of the special lottery (more strictly, the number of rotations after the big hit corresponding to the period). If you win a big hit in the period), "forced battle" will be prepared as an option for display production. Furthermore, if you win an advantageous jackpot in a specific production mode ("PC attention", "mode selection", "mode determination") in the above series of production modes, a special other than "forced battle" Display effects (“special PC image”, “special selection mode”, “special dialogue”) are also available as options.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect of the effect mode included in the "series of effect mode groups" is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the variation pattern according to FIG. 207 ( For example, even if (referred to as “forced battle” described in detail later) is selected, it is not always necessary to display all the effects of the selected forced battle on the display screen. For example, while displaying the effect display of the effect mode being executed on the display screen, proceed without displaying the effect of the forced battle on the display screen (without showing it to the player), and proceed with a specific part in the effect of the forced battle (for example). , An important part that changes the expected ratio to the big hit), the specific part may be displayed on the display screen, and then the display showing the winning result may be displayed at the end. In addition, regarding the effect display of the effect mode and the effect display of the forced battle, both are displayed so that the player can see them (superimposed display), and the display that can be seen by the player is switched to one by one. May be good.

[8-3-2. Forced battle]
The "forced battle" will be described in detail below. The "forced battle" is a display effect in which a predetermined battle effect (reach effect) is forcibly interrupted regardless of the effect mode in which the player is staying.

FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern of the forced battle based on the type of jackpot. As shown in FIG. 208, the "forced battle" effect that can be selected when the jackpot is won has different fluctuation patterns depending on the type of jackpot. Then, if the result of the "forced battle" production is a defeat, a relatively disadvantageous jackpot (substantially no balls can be obtained in the jackpot game, and after the jackpot is not controlled to a high probability time saving state) is won. If the result of the "forced battle" production is a victory, a relatively advantageous jackpot (a ball can be obtained in a jackpot game, and after the jackpot, it is continuously controlled in a high probability time saving state). Means winning. However, even if it is a relatively unfavorable jackpot, there is a possibility that the jackpot is specific 1, so it can be expected that it will be in a high probability state even if it is not controlled to a time saving state after the jackpot. , It is possible to prevent the player's expectations from being completely impaired by the defeat result.

When the jackpot is specified 1, the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is selected as the fluctuation pattern A, and the production content in which the result of the battle is defeated is selected. The progress and results of the battle will be described later with reference to FIG. 209.

When the jackpot is specified 2, the fluctuation time of 40,000 ms is selected as the fluctuation pattern B, and the production content in which the result of the battle is a victory is selected.

When the jackpot is specified 5, the fluctuation pattern C or the fluctuation pattern D with a fluctuation time of 40,000 ms is selected at a ratio of 1: 1. In the fluctuation pattern C, after the result of the battle is defeated, the effect content in which "7" symbols are displayed after being revived from the defeat is selected. In the production of the fluctuation pattern C, the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is used until the result of the battle is defeated, and then the fluctuation time of 10,000 ms is used to perform the recovery production from the defeat. In the variation pattern D, after the result of the battle is a victory, the symbol alignment is re-variable and the effect content in which "7" symbol alignment is displayed is selected. In the effect of the variation pattern D, the variation time of 40,000 ms is used in the entire effect until the “7” symbol alignment is displayed. In this example, the display of "7" symbols is a special display indicating the winning of the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage, "16R probability variation jackpot with balls (specific 5)".

When the jackpot is not specified, the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is selected as the fluctuation pattern E, and the production content in which the result of the battle is defeated is selected.

Next, a concrete display production example by forced battle will be described. FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining a display effect by forced battle. FIGS. 209 (A) to 209 (I) show the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the forced battle progresses. In a forced battle, for example, a battle between a friendly character and an enemy character is unfolded. In this example, if the battle result by the forced battle is the victory of the ally character, it means the winning of the advantageous big hit (the big hit in which the high probability time saving state continues again after the big hit game), and the battle result is the defeat of the ally character. If it is, it means that a disadvantageous jackpot (a jackpot that ends the high-probability time-saving state and is controlled to a non-time-saving state after the big hit game) is won.

First, FIG. 209 (A) shows an example of an effect image when a forced battle occurs. When forced battle is selected as the variation pattern, the effect image when the forced battle occurs is displayed in a manner of interrupting the display of the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, in FIG. 209 (A), the changing decorative symbols are collectively displayed at the lower right of the display screen, but the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the forced battle is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 206 (C). It may be displayed in the display area 1900r divided into the corners of.

Then, as shown in FIG. 209 (B), the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is started. Before the result of the match is displayed, a cut-in or the like that raises the degree of expectation may be displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (C). It should be noted that the effect of improving the degree of expectation as shown in FIG. 209 (C) is different depending on the type of variation pattern (for example, variation patterns A to E shown in FIG. 208). The effect of improving the degree of expectation of the type may be displayed.

After that, the result of the match is displayed. First, an example of the production transition when the battle result is a victory will be described. FIG. 209 (D) is an example of a display screen showing that the ally character has won, and according to the distribution of the fluctuation pattern of the forced battle described with reference to FIG. 208, when the fluctuation pattern B or the fluctuation pattern D is selected ( It is displayed in the jackpot of specific 2 or specific 5). In this example, when the winning result is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (D), the winning of the advantageous jackpot is confirmed. For example, in the display area 1900p of FIG. 209 (D), the decorative symbols of "333" are shown. Has been done. Then, when the variation pattern B (specific 2) is selected, the result of the forced battle is confirmed by the effect display of FIG. 209 (D), and then the big hit game (4R probability change) of the specific 2 is started.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern D, as described with reference to FIG. 208, after the winning result is displayed, the symbols are re-variated and the “7” symbol alignment is displayed. FIGS. 209 (E) and 209 (F) show examples of such transitions of the effect display, and FIG. 209 (E) suggests a change from the display result of FIG. 209 (D). The phrase "CHARGE!" Is displayed, and in FIG. 209 (F) thereafter, a set of decorative patterns of "777" is shown. At this time, the symbol display column in the display area 1900p also changes again, and "777" is stopped and displayed. In the variation pattern D, the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (“16R probability variable jackpot with ball output (specific 5)”) is taught to the player by finally displaying the “7” symbol alignment. Then, after that, the big hit game (16R probability change) of the specific 5 is started.

Next, an example of the production transition when the battle result is defeat will be described. FIG. 209 (G) is an example of a display screen showing that the ally character has been defeated, and according to the distribution of the fluctuation pattern of the forced battle described with reference to FIG. 208, the fluctuation pattern A, the fluctuation pattern C, or the fluctuation pattern E is It is displayed when it is selected (specific 1, specific 5, non-specific jackpot). Of these, in the case of fluctuation pattern A (specific 1) or fluctuation pattern E (non-specific), the result of the forced battle is confirmed by the effect display in FIG. 209 (G), and then the jackpot game (4R in the case of specific 1). Latent, 4R normal in the case of non-specific) is started.

However, in this example, even if the defeat result is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (G), there is a possibility of a revival pattern from a disadvantageous jackpot to an advantageous jackpot due to further changes in the production. There is. Specifically, when the variation pattern C is selected, as shown in FIG. 209 (H), it suggests that the effect display in FIG. 209 (G) is not the final form, "not yet!". Is displayed, and in FIG. 209 (H) thereafter, a set of decorative patterns of "777" is shown. At this time, the symbol display column in the display area 1900p also changes again, and "777" is stopped and displayed. In the variation pattern C, the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (“16R probability variable jackpot with ball output (specific 5)”) is taught to the player by finally displaying the “7” symbol alignment. Then, after that, the big hit game (16R probability change) of the specific 5 is started.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the forced battle is performed even during the period in which the "series of production mode groups" appearing in the production mode not related to the execution result of the special lottery is displayed. When it occurs, the result of the big hit (advantageous big hit or unfavorable big hit) is taught to the player by performing the effect as shown in FIGS. 209 (A) to 209 (I).

[8-3-3. Special display effect]
Among the "series of production mode groups" that appear in the production mode that is not related to the execution result of the special lottery, a specific production mode ("PC attention", "mode selection", "mode determination") is an advantageous jackpot. A special display effect ("special PC image", "special selection mode", "special dialogue") other than "forced battle" that can be executed when a winner is won will be described. In this example, when the special display effect appears, the winning of the advantageous jackpot is confirmed.

In the following, the above-mentioned special display effect will be described with a specific example. In these specific examples, a special display effect is realized by changing a part of the display content of the effect mode currently staying to a special display content.

First, the "special PC image" will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 207, the "special PC image" is a case where the next big hit is won between the 21st and 40th rotation speeds after the big hit is completed in the high probability time saving state. This is an effect of a fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the selected jackpot is an advantageous jackpot. In such a case, it is presumed that the user is staying in the "PC alert" effect mode, but if the "special PC image" effect is selected, the "special PC image" display screen is used. The production of "PC alert" is performed.

FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining a display effect using a special PC image. FIG. 210 shows an example of a display screen using a “special PC image”. Compared with the display screen example in "PC alerting" of FIG. 206 (D), the display mode of the prepaid card (PC) is more conspicuous (specifically, for example, the prepaid card). Increase the size or change the color of the prepaid card to golden or iridescent). In this way, by using an image of a PC different from a normal image (an image of a PC alert), the player is made aware that he / she is in a special gaming situation, and it is expected that an advantageous result will be provided. It can make you feel. In addition, it is possible to alert the player to forget to remove the prepaid card without using the "PC alert" display screen, and the functional role assigned to the "PC alert" production mode. Can also be fulfilled.

The display screen of FIG. 210 is only an example, and for example, another image may be displayed instead of the prepaid card, or the warning text in the PC warning may be changed. However, even in such a case, it is preferable to leave an image of the original display image that calls attention to the prepaid card so that the above-mentioned functional role can be fulfilled.

Next, the "special selection mode" will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 207, in the "special selection mode", in the high probability time saving state, when the number of rotations after the end of the big hit is between 41 and 60 times, the next big hit is won. This is an effect of a fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the selected jackpot is an advantageous jackpot. In such a case, it is presumed that the user is staying in the effect mode of "mode selection", but when the effect of "special selection mode" is selected, the display screen of "special selection mode" is used. The production of "mode selection" is performed.

FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining a display effect by the special selection mode. FIG. 211 shows an example of a display screen in the “special selection mode”. Comparing the display screen example of FIG. 211 with the display screen example of the "mode selection" of FIG. 206 (E), the selectable targets in the "mode selection" are two characters, whereas the "special selection mode" is used. In addition to the above two characters, a plate with the phrase "WIN" can be selected. The phrase "WIN" means victory, that is, a special indication of a jackpot. On the display screen of the "special selection mode", by performing such a special display, it is possible to make the player select the "WIN" plate and teach that it is a big hit. Also, even if the player selects any character without selecting the "WIN" plate, if the display is changed to "WIN" when the determination operation is performed, it is a big hit. It can be taught to the player.

The display screen of FIG. 211 is only an example. For example, instead of the "WIN" plate, characters that are not displayed as options in the normal "mode selection" can be displayed in a selectable manner, or the number of characters that can be selected. May be displayed differently than usual. However, even in such a case, it is preferable that the display screen is such that the display effect is based on the "mode selection", and the player is made to recognize that the display effect is similar to the "mode selection". Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority that a special production has appeared.

Next, the "special dialogue" will be described. As explained with reference to FIG. 207, the "special dialogue" is the case where the next big hit is won between 61 and 83 rotations after the end of the big hit in the high probability time saving state. It is a production of a fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the winning jackpot is an advantageous jackpot. In such a case, it is presumed that you are staying in the production mode of "mode determination", but if the production of "special dialogue" is selected, the display screen of "special dialogue" is used to "special". "Dialogue" is directed.

FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining the display effect by the special dialogue. FIG. 212 shows an example of a display screen using "special dialogue". Comparing the display screen example of FIG. 212 with the display screen example of the "mode determination" of FIG. 206 (F), the dialogue by the character selected in the "mode selection" of the previous stage is changed from "Leave it!" To "Big hit!". Has been changed to. In this way, by making the dialogue of the character different from the normal image (image of mode selection), the player is made aware that he / she is in a special gaming situation, and an advantageous result is provided. You can have a sense of expectation.

Note that the display screen of FIG. 212 is only an example, for example, displaying another line, changing the display mode (color, size, drawing touch, etc.) of the character or line, or selecting by mode selection. A special character different from the character may be displayed. In either case, the player can be given a sense of superiority that a special effect has appeared by performing the effect in a manner different from the normal effect (mode determination).

The above is a specific production mode ("PC attention", among the "series of production mode groups (" big hit ED "to" mode determination ")" that appears in a production mode that is not related to the execution result of the special lottery. This is a special display effect that can be executed when an advantageous jackpot is won in "mode selection" and "mode determination"). When these special display effects are executed, it is preferable to display a set of symbols that teach the big hit at the end so that the player can easily recognize that the big hit has been won. If the staying time of the corresponding normal effect mode is exceeded during the execution of the special display effect, for example, the special display effect being executed is displayed as it is (the next effect mode to be transitioned is displayed). After displaying the set of symbols that teach the big hit at the end, the big hit game may be started.

[8-4. Characteristic effect of game control in high probability time saving state]
So far, the features of the game control in the high-probability time-saving state have been explained mainly in Chapter [8], but according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, the game machine that realizes the following characteristic effects. Can be realized.

[8-4-1. First characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, while the lottery (mainly a special lottery) is executed and the variable display of the symbol is displayed, the prolongation of the gaming situation in which the winning result by the lottery cannot be obtained is suppressed. It is possible to realize a gaming machine to obtain. According to such a gaming machine, as the first characteristic effect, the so-called addictive gaming period can be suppressed, so that the disgust that the player tends to hold in the addicted state can be suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205, a series of production mode groups (big hit ED to mode determination) that transition in a predetermined order in a high probability time saving state controlled after a big hit are present. Although it is issued, the special lottery and the variable display of the symbol (particularly the variable display of the decorative symbol) are controlled so as to be feasible even during the stay in these effect modes. On the other hand, the display screen in these effect modes is an effect mode that is not related to the execution result of the special lottery, and as described with reference to the example of FIG. 206, it is difficult for the player to recognize the decorative pattern sequence. Since it is an aspect, it is difficult for the player to recognize the special lottery and the variable display of the symbol executed during the stay of the series of effect mode groups.

That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel that the variable display of the symbol is started after the display of the series of effect mode groups is completed, so that the series of effect mode groups can be started. Even if the result of the special lottery is out of order during the period in which is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the out of place result and not feeling the so-called "addicted" state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an effect mode (mode selection and mode determination) indicating that the high-probability gaming state is started after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Furthermore, when an effect mode (big hit ED-mode determination) that is not related to the execution result of the special lottery including these is displayed, it is possible to execute the variation of the symbol in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the prolongation of the gaming situation in which the winning result by the special lottery cannot be obtained while the special lottery is executed and the variable display of the symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which exhibits the above-mentioned first characteristic effect, will be described with specific numerical values by using examples such as FIGS. 173, 205, and 207. First, the jackpot winning probability of the special lottery in the high probability time saving state is 1/120, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is selected to be 628 ms, and the reach effect is not selected. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the right-handed game is continued from the big hit game, it is extremely easy to enter the second starting port 2102, so that the special lottery can be executed. The special lottery is continuously executed from the timing (point P in FIG. 205). Here, referring to FIG. 205, the time during which the special lottery can be executed during the period in which the series of effect mode groups appear in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the decorative symbol sequence is Q from point P. It becomes 52124 ms to the point. As described above, since the time required for one symbol change executed based on the result of one special lottery is 628 ms, 83 special lottery and symbol change are possible between 52124 ms (). 52124/628 = 83). Considering that the probability of winning a big hit in a special lottery is 1/120, the ratio of winning a big hit while the special lottery is performed 83 times is about 50.07% (details of calculation are omitted). ). The fluctuation time of 628 ms at the time of deviation in this example is extremely short compared to the fluctuation time of a general symbol, and by setting the fluctuation time at the time of deviation to be short in this way, within a predetermined period. It has been devised to increase the number of feasible special lottery trials.

Then, according to the calculation based on the above specific example, even if the result of the special lottery is out of order in the high probability time saving state, it is difficult for the player to recognize the result of the out of order. Within the period of time, it is possible to win the next big hit with a probability of exceeding 50%, and by obtaining such a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling addicted. In addition, even if the next big hit cannot be won even if the display period of the "series of production modes" exceeds 83 times, it is difficult for the player to recognize the execution period of the special lottery for 83 times. After all, it is possible to suppress the prolongation of the gaming situation in which the winning result by the special lottery cannot be obtained for the player. That is, in a high-probability time-saving state, a jackpot of half (50%) or less will be a jackpot more than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (83 times), but even in such a case, the predetermined number of times (83 times) will be hit. Is made to recognize that the lottery has not been done, so even if a big hit is made at 100 rotations, for example, the player will recognize that he / she won the big hit at 17 rotations (100-83 = 17), which is addictive. It is difficult to recognize the state.

It should be noted that the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern in the high probability state, the setting of the time value (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern, the production time of the series of production modes, etc. are not drawn by the player as in the above example. It is not limited to the above numerical values as long as it is designed based on the design concept of winning a big hit by half (50%) or more in the production period of a series of production modes to be recognized by the player.

In addition, such a configuration by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment realizes the next big hit by a special random number held until the end of the big hit game when it is controlled to the high probability gaming state (so-called). It is not intended to realize the next big hit immediately after the end of the big hit game (so-called immediate consecutive), but in the process of the game progress where it is not decided when to win the next big hit. One of the features is that the purpose is to suppress the prolongation of the gaming situation in which the winning result by the special lottery cannot be obtained from the player's point of view.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following configurations may be appropriately provided in order to further ensure the first characteristic effect described above.

For example, an effect mode (“mode selection” or “mode determination”) indicating the start of a high-probability gaming state in a “series of effect mode groups” and an effect mode (“mode-only effect”) indicating a high-probability gaming state. ”), The display position of the decorative pattern on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be different. Specifically, for example, comparing FIG. 206 (E) exemplifying the display screen of mode selection with FIG. 206 (G) exemplifying the display screen of the mode-dedicated effect, in the former, the decorative design is divided into three places. It is displayed in the display area 1900r, and in the latter, the decorative symbol is displayed as a symbol string in one display area 1900p. Furthermore, the size of the display area allocated to each decorative symbol (the size of the displayed decorative symbol) is larger in the latter than in the former. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to recognize the variation display of the decorative symbol in the effect mode indicating the start of the game by the high probability gaming state, but it is in the high probability gaming state. Not only is it possible to make it easier to recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol in the effect mode shown, but the player can easily determine that the game is in a high-probability gaming state depending on the appearance (size and display position) of the decorative symbol. It can be made recognizable.

Further, for example, in the explanation so far, since it is displayed regardless of the special lottery and the transition order of each production mode is determined in advance, "big hit ED", "manufacturer guidance", "PC attention", "PC attention", " Although it is said that a "series of effect mode groups" is formed by "mode selection" and "mode determination", these effect modes can be classified differently based on the display contents.

Specifically, first, the "big hit ED" indicates the end of the big hit game that has been executed so far, so it can be said to be a part of the big hit effect. Not only are the "Manufacturer Information" and "PC Alert" displayed regardless of the special lottery, but the displayed content is also less relevant to the special lottery (be careful not to display the manufacturer name or forget to remove the prepaid card). It is hard to say that the display of is related to the special lottery), so it can be said that it is a fixed production mode. Then, as described above, the "mode selection" and the "mode determination" are the production modes before the "mode-only effect" indicating that the game is in the high-probability gaming state, and indicate the start of the high-probability gaming state. It can be said that it is a production mode. However, as described above, the game in the high-probability gaming state has started internally at that time point, and it is an apparent production mode for the player.

When classifying the effect modes in this way, the effect mode indicating the start of the high-probability gaming state is not a series of effects from the jackpot effect, but the fixed effect mode is sandwiched between them. At this time, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the effect mode indicating that the high-probability gaming state is started as an effect different from the effect related to the big hit is displayed after the effect related to the big hit is completed. By changing the symbol, it is possible to prevent the period during which the jackpot cannot be won from being prolonged when the effect mode indicating that the game is in a high-probability gaming state is displayed.

[8-4-2. Second characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when a functional effect unrelated to the effect indicating the result of the lottery (mainly a special lottery) is displayed, a special effect for teaching the result of the lottery is provided. It is possible to realize a game machine that can be displayed. Then, according to such a gaming machine, as a second characteristic effect, even when a functional effect irrelevant to whether or not a privilege is obtained is displayed, the player is interested in the functional effect. Can be embraced. Further, according to such a gaming machine, it is possible to teach the player without delaying the result of the special lottery while displaying the functional effect. This will be described in detail below.

First, the above-mentioned functional effect is an effect that provides useful information to the player regardless of whether or not the lottery (mainly a special lottery) is executed. For example, "PC attention" corresponds to the functional effect. .. As described with reference to examples such as FIG. 207, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special lottery is continuously executed from a predetermined timing (point P in FIG. 205) during the jackpot ED, after the jackpot ends. When the number of rotations of is from 21 to 40, the production mode of "PC attention" is set. As illustrated in FIG. 206 (D), the display screen in the effect mode of "PC alert" is displayed regardless of whether or not the special lottery is executed and the execution result, and "Forgetting to remove the prepaid card". It provides useful information to the player by calling attention to the situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as "or theft". Then, even when staying in such a PC alerting production mode, if a big hit is won in the special lottery, the fluctuation pattern of the "forced battle" or the "special PC image" as shown in FIG. 207. By selecting, the jackpot is taught.

Here, as illustrated in FIG. 210, the "special PC image" has a display mode similar to the display screen of the "PC alert" as a whole, but a part (for example, a drawing part of a prepaid card) is displayed. By making the mode different, it is made to be a special production corresponding to "PC attention". When such a "special PC image" effect is selected as a variable pattern, it is an advantageous jackpot while continuously calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card (maintaining the functional effect). The jackpot can be taught to the player (teaching the result of the lottery).

That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when a functional effect such as "PC attention" is displayed, a special effect such as a "special PC image" that teaches the result of the lottery is displayed. Is prepared, the result of the lottery can be taught to the player without delay (after the variation time of the selected variation pattern) while maintaining the effect of the above-mentioned function effect. As a result, even when a function effect that is not originally related to whether or not the privilege can be obtained is displayed, the player can be interested in the function effect. Further, especially when the functional effect is a caution effect, the effect of impressing the player with the attention content can be expected.

The effect of the "PC special image" illustrated in FIG. 210 has a role as a function effect in that it alerts the user to forgetting to take the prepaid card or theft, and it is a big hit (advantageous) depending on the display mode of the prepaid card. The "PC special image" itself has a role as a winning effect in that it teaches or suggests winning (big hit). That is, by adopting the "PC special image" as shown in FIG. 210, it is possible to simultaneously display the functional effect and the display effect related to the result of the lottery.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following configurations may be appropriately provided in order to further ensure the second characteristic effect described above.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to display the function effect while teaching the result of the lottery (for example, a big hit) without delay, but the type of the result of the lottery and the result of the lottery can be displayed. Depending on the obtained timing and the like, the functional effect may not be displayed.

For example, if the winning of the jackpot (advantageous jackpot) controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game is determined before the function effect is displayed, the function is concerned. It is also possible to stop the display by the effect and replace it with another effect that does not have a role as a functional effect without displaying the effect appearing on the display screen. This is because even if the display by the function effect is canceled, the opportunity to display the function effect again is secured after the subsequent big hit game, and the opportunity for the function effect to appear in this way is available. If it is secured, it can play a role of functional production of providing useful information to the player.

More specifically, in FIG. 207, when the number of rotations after the end of the big hit is 1 to 20 times and the advantageous big hit is won, the fluctuation stop timing of the symbol indicating the winning is the effect mode of calling the PC. However, it may be controlled so that the effect of the forced battle selected as the fluctuation pattern at this time is "performed without displaying the effect of alerting the PC".

Further, for example, when the winning of the advantageous jackpot is confirmed due to the symbol change stopped during the period when the function effect is displayed, the display by the function effect is interrupted and the effect displayed on the display screen is displayed. It may be replaced with another production that does not have a role as a production. Even in this control, the opportunity for the functional effect to appear is secured, and the role of the functional effect can be fulfilled.

More specifically, in FIG. 207, when the number of rotations after the big hit is between 21 and 40 and the advantageous big hit is won, it is assumed that the forced battle is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and the forced battle is performed. The effect may be controlled so as to be "switched from the effect of alerting the PC". Further, assuming that a special effect different from the special PC image is prepared, the special effect may be selected as the effect of the variable pattern and controlled so as to be "switched from the effect of alerting the PC".

On the other hand, for example, the winning of a jackpot (disadvantageous jackpot) controlled by a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state (for example, a low probability state or a non-time saving state) after the jackpot game is determined before the functional effect is displayed. If this is the case, in order to secure a display opportunity for the functional effect and fulfill its role, it is preferable to perform the functional effect together with the effect indicating the winning by superimposing the display.

Furthermore, for example, even if the result of the lottery is decided by a loss or a disadvantageous jackpot due to a symbol change that is stopped during the period when the function effect is displayed, the display opportunity of the function effect is secured and the role is fulfilled. In addition, it is preferable to execute a functional effect together with an effect showing the result of the lottery, such as by performing a superimposed display.

As described above in [8-2], in addition to the caution effect such as "PC alert", the function effect is a "setting effect" that makes it possible to adjust the volume, the amount of light, etc. in the pachinko machine 1. Is also included. The "functional effect" described with respect to the second characteristic effect can be appropriately replaced with such a "setting effect".

Specifically, for example, on a screen (so-called demo screen) that is automatically displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed when the lottery is not performed, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted in the "setting effect". Is displayed. In a conventional gaming machine, even if such a setting effect is displayed, if there is a ball entering the starting port, the display is immediately turned off and the display is switched to the display related to the game. It sometimes made me uncomfortable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, while the volume and the amount of light are being adjusted in the setting effect, the adjustment in the setting effect is confirmed even if the ball is entered into the starting port and a lottery is performed. Until this is done, control may be performed to continue the display without turning it off. However, even in such a case, in order to display the result of the lottery without delay, it is preferable to superimpose and display the effect mode of the setting effect and the effect mode related to the result of the lottery. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such control, the result of the lottery is displayed without delay, and the function effect is displayed until it is completed (adjustment of the volume etc. is confirmed). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction and discomfort that the player may have.

[8-4-3. Third characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal effect executed within a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the lottery is executed, and the execution based on the result of the lottery, the result of the lottery is a hit. In a gaming machine that controls to display a specific effect that can change the expected ratio to, and a game machine that is configured to display a specific effect at a specific timing, the expected effect is executed when the normal effect is displayed. To realize a gaming machine that can display the specific effect in the expected effect with priority over the normal effect when a specific timing arrives, while continuing the effect of the normal effect when is determined. Can be done. Then, according to such a gaming machine, as a third characteristic effect, the gaming machine is shown by showing an effect that gives the player unexpectedness even during the execution of a fixed effect such as the above-mentioned normal effect. It is possible to suppress a person's boredom. This will be described in detail below.

The third characteristic effect is realized by controlling the game control in the high-probability time-saving state in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as follows. That is, when the effect mode included in the "series of effect mode groups" is "normal effect executed within a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the lottery is executed", and the effect mode is displayed, Make lottery and pattern changes feasible. Then, as a variation pattern of the decorative pattern, a specific effect such as the cut-in effect illustrated in FIG. 209 (C), which is executed based on the result of the lottery and can change the expected ratio of the result of the lottery being a hit. Prepare an "expected production" in which "" appears at a specific timing. As for the production mode of the expected production, for example, as in the forced battle shown in FIG. 209, if a predetermined production is performed while sandwiching the "expected production" and the winning or losing of the big hit is shown by the final victory or defeat. good.

In such a pachinko machine 1, when the variation pattern of "expected effect" is selected while the effect mode is displayed on the display screen, the "expected effect" is displayed while the effect mode is displayed on the display screen. Is not displayed and is internally advanced, and when the timing of the cut-in effect (specific effect) is reached, only the cut-in effect is controlled to be displayed on the display screen. By performing such control, it is possible to display the specific effect in the expected effect with priority over the normal effect. In addition, the display regarding the final winning due to the expected effect shall be displayed on the display screen at the end.

In such a pachinko machine 1, even if the result of the special lottery is not a big hit but a miss, the expected effect can be selected as the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, so that the specific effect in the expected effect can be displayed on the display screen. You may make it appear suddenly.

Further, it is preferable not to notify the player that the expected effect is being executed internally until the specific timing at which the specific effect appears, and by controlling in this way, it is preferable. A specific effect suddenly appears, and the effect of making the player feel unexpected is enhanced.

Further, the specific effect included in the expected effect is not limited to the cut-in effect as long as the effect can change the expected ratio of the result of the lottery being a hit. In other words, the specific effect may be a specific effect part in the expected effect, in which the degree of expectation for the hit result can be changed before and after the specific effect. Specifically, for example, it may be a premier production in which a big hit is confirmed, or a production suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, when a plurality of specific effects are included in the expected effects, all the specific effects may be suddenly displayed at each specific timing, or only any important specific effects may be suddenly displayed. You may let it. The important specific effect may be, for example, a cut-in effect that can be displayed at the final stage of the expected effect, or an effect part that displays the hands and feet that the character draws out before the conclusion.

Further, as a display control for causing a specific effect to suddenly appear while internally executing the expected effect while the effect mode (normal effect) is being displayed as described above, the normal effect and the expected effect are executed in parallel. However, each display priority may be changed as appropriate. When performing such display control, it is not possible to change the display position, display size, etc. of each effect in the effect mode and specific effect, but since it is only necessary to change the display priority at a specific timing, peripheral control The processing load on the substrate 4010 can be reduced.

Further, as another display control, the display control may be performed by combining the effect mode (normal effect) and the expected effect on the display screen. At this time, the expected effect is displayed except at the specific timing at which the specific effect is displayed. The concentration may be made extremely thin to make it difficult for the player to recognize. When such display control is performed, in addition to emphasizing the specific effect at the specific timing, it is possible to display the effect with high importance at an arbitrary timing with priority on the display screen. Further, when the display timing of the highly important effect is affected by the normal effect and the expected effect, fine display control such as shifting the display position or adjusting the display size can be performed.

[8-4-4. Fourth characteristic effect]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select an effect from a plurality of effect candidates for at least a part of the effect that can be displayed on the display means, and the selected effect is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means for making the game, the result of the lottery is displayed while suppressing the selection of the above effect until the number of times the lottery is executed by the lottery means reaches a specific number of times after being controlled to the high probability gaming state. On the other hand, when the number of times the lottery is executed exceeds a specific number of times, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of displaying the result of the lottery on the display means while allowing the selection of the above-mentioned effect. Then, according to such a gaming machine, as a fourth characteristic effect, when the gaming situation in which the jackpot is not won can be prolonged beyond a specific number of fluctuations, the display means (for example, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900). By making it possible for the player to select the type of effect that appears in), it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored due to the prolonged game situation in which the jackpot is not won, and to suppress the decline in interest. This will be described in detail below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability time saving state controlled after the big hit, the effect to be executed cannot be selected if the number of fluctuations is less than the specific number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game, but the selected effect is selected if the number of fluctuations is more than the specific number of fluctuations. Can be executed. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 207, when the number of rotations after the end of the big hit exceeds 83 times, the mode-dedicated effect is executed. In this mode-dedicated effect, the player The effect according to the character selected through the mode selection and mode determination effect modes is performed, and the result of the special lottery is displayed. Further, the result of the special lottery (for example, the big hit) can be displayed also in the production of a series of production modes (big hit ED to mode determination) executed before the mode-dedicated production.

Therefore, the effect by the mode-only effect executed after the number of rotations after the end of the big hit is 84 times can be regarded as "the effect that the player is allowed to select from a plurality of effect candidates", and the big hit before that. The production by a series of production mode groups in which the rotation speed after the end is executed up to 83 times can be regarded as "the production in which the player is not allowed to select from a plurality of production candidates". By performing such display control of the effect, until the number of times the lottery is executed reaches a specific number of times (for example, 83 times), the effect is performed by a series of effect mode groups, so that the selection of the above effect is suppressed. The result of the winning is displayed. Then, when the number of times the lottery is executed exceeds a specific number of times (for example, 83 times), the result of the lottery can be displayed while allowing the selection of the above-mentioned effect.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, in a game in which the number of times the special lottery is executed is up to a specific number of times (83 times), an effect that the player does not have the right to select is displayed. Since the elapsed time from the end of the big hit game is a relatively short period, it is assumed that the player can enjoy the production even if the player is not given the right to select the production (end of the big hit game). If it is in the state immediately after, it is assumed that the expectation for the big hit is maintained). On the other hand, when the specified number of times is exceeded, at least a certain amount of time has passed since the end of the big hit game, but by enabling the player to display a selectable effect at such a timing, the big hit is won. It can be expected to prevent the player's boredom (sickness due to the inability to maintain the expectation for the big hit) due to the continuation of the impossible period, and to suppress the decline in the interest.

In particular, in the specific example shown in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 207, a jackpot result can be obtained with a probability of exceeding 50% by the time the special lottery is performed 83 times. Therefore, by setting the specific number of times to 83 times, the jackpot result is displayed during the effect display by the transition of a series of effect mode groups planned in advance in more than half of the cases, while in the remaining cases, it is in a slightly addicted state. By allowing the player to select the production during the period when the player is expected to start feeling, it can be expected to give the player a new interest at an effective timing.

It should be noted that such a specific number of times can be arbitrarily set at the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine, but the specific number of times allows the player to select the effect in the gaming situation where the player is expected to feel addicted. Is preferably set. Here, a specific definition for the addictive game situation can be arbitrarily defined, but for example, as the number of lottery (or the number of fluctuations) in which the expected winning value of the jackpot exceeds 50% as in the above-mentioned "83 times". Alternatively, it may be the number of lottery (or the number of fluctuations) indicating the probability denominator of the winning probability of the big hit (for example, "128" when the winning probability is 1/128). The rationale for these definitions is that it is easy to feel addicted when the period expected to win a big hit is exceeded in more than half of the cases, or when the number of lottery exceeds the probability denominator of the winning probability.

Further, the specific number of times does not have to be fixed to a fixed number of times, and may be appropriately changed. For example, if the number of consecutive big hits is less than the set number of times, it becomes difficult for the player to have an opportunity to select the effect. You may set it again.

In addition, when a winning result with a high degree of advantage (for example, an advantageous jackpot) is obtained while the effect selected by the player is executed, such as a mode-only effect based on the character selected by the player, the effect is concerned. Is an impressive production for the player, so from the time when the next big hit game is finished, it is controlled so that it is possible to select so that the production continues to appear without waiting for the passage of a specific number of times. (In this case, the effects of the above-mentioned "series of effect modes" may be displayed on the display screen, or may be displayed in duplicate). In such a case, it may be possible to select another effect, but by setting the effect when an advantageous jackpot is obtained as the default effect, the player does not have to perform the operation of selecting again. However, since it is possible to continuously produce a production that gives a good impression to the player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player without taking the trouble of the player.

In addition, when a winning result with a high degree of advantage (for example, an advantageous jackpot) is won while the effect selected by the player is executed, an effect based on the effect is displayed during the jackpot game of the advantageous jackpot. It may be controlled to. For example, if an advantageous jackpot is won when a mode-only effect by character A is selected and executed, a predetermined episode effect related to character A is executed as a display effect of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. Control should be performed. By performing such control, it is possible to make an impression that the effect selected by the player and the winning result with a high degree of advantage are deeply related to each other, so that the player feels that the player's selection was correct. You can increase your satisfaction.

[8-5. Synchronization between the number of fluctuations and the production mode]
So far, in [8-1] to [8-3], when the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is controlled to a high probability time saving state after a big hit game, it is continuous from the timing when the special lottery can be started. It has been explained that by executing the special lottery, the variable display of the symbol (variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol) based on the result of the special lottery is continuously performed without delay from the above timing. rice field. Hereinafter, for the sake of brevity, such a game situation will be referred to as a “continuously fluctuating game situation”.

In order to realize such a continuously fluctuating gaming situation, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an extremely high probability of playing a game (specifically, right-handed) by a recommended gaming method in a time-saving state. A device has been devised so that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 is allowed to enter the second starting port 2102 with an extremely high probability (details are [8-1]]. As a result, as shown in FIG. 207, the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game and the effect timing of each exercise mode included in the "series of effect mode groups" displayed after the end of the big hit game. , Was able to be associated (see [8-3-1] for details).

However, in [8-1] to [8-3], the transition schedule of each of the above-mentioned production modes is set based on the realization of the continuous variation game situation (see FIG. 207), so that the continuous variation is assumed. If the game situation is not realized (for example, if the player stops launching due to various reasons such as meal breaks and toilets), the number of rotations after the big hit game and each production There is a gap with the effect timing of the mode (for example, if 20000 ms has passed when the launch is stopped after the big hit game ends, the number of rotations after the big hit game ends is 0 (when there is no hold). ) However, as an effect, the effect has transitioned to the PC alert in Fig. 205), and the effect according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern selected based on the above rotation speed is displayed. There is a possibility that the production mode will be uncomfortable.

Specifically, for example, even though the right-handed game is temporarily stopped and the effect mode of "mode selection" is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, after the big hit game is completed. It is assumed that the game situation is such that the number of rotations is less than 30 times. At this time, assuming that the result of the special lottery becomes an advantageous jackpot and the variation pattern of the "special PC image" is selected (see FIG. 207), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 shows the effect mode of "mode selection" (see FIG. 207). (See FIG. 206 (E)), the display is suddenly switched to the effect mode (see FIG. 210) of the “special PC image”.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following control is performed in order to suppress such a situation that "a deviation occurs between the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the production timing of each production mode". You may do it. First, in [8-5-1], control for maintaining a continuously fluctuating gaming state will be described. Then, in [8-5-2] and [8-5-3], even when the continuously fluctuating game state is not realized, the number of rotations after the big hit game is completed and the effect timing of the series of effect modes are set. The control (control for discontinuous fluctuation) that does not give a sense of discomfort due to the deviation of the rotation speed will be described. In the following [8-5-1] to [8-5-3], the "recommended game method" is right-handed in the big hit game state and the subsequent high-probability time-saving state, as described above. It will be explained as a game.

The control described in [8-5-1] can be executed in combination with either the control described in [8-5-2] or the control described in [8-5-3]. However, the control described in [8-5-2] and the control described in [8-5-3] cannot be combined because the settings related to the transition of the effect mode are different.

[8-5-1. Promotion of continuous fluctuation]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, control for maintaining a continuously fluctuating gaming state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the continuously fluctuating gaming state is maintained in a high-probability time-saving state. Even in a conventional gaming machine, when teaching a right-handed game as an advantageous game method for a player, a right-handed display is performed on a liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, but in a big hit game, the right-handed display is performed according to the right-handed display. Even if a pachinko game is played, when the time is controlled to a high probability, the launch of the game ball may be temporarily stopped due to a meal break or a toilet.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to maintain continuous fluctuation in the high-probability time-saving state after the end of the big-hit game, the right-handed display in the high-probability time-saving state is displayed differently from that during the big-hit game. It is possible to control the display according to the mode. By such a change in the display mode, it is possible to alert the player to the right-handed display.

Specifically, for example, FIG. 206 (B) shows an example of a display screen in the effect mode of the jackpot ED, but shows an example of a right-handed display that can promote continuous fluctuation in the display area 1900s. .. The right-handed display in the display area 1900s has a larger size of the "right-handed" decorative character and the right-pointing arrow than the right-handed display displayed during the jackpot game (display area 1900q in FIG. 206 (A)). Since it is displayed in a display mode, it is possible to strongly recommend the player to hit right. In addition, the display position of the right-handed display is also near the center of the display screen in the jackpot ED (display area 1900s), whereas it is in the upper right part of the display screen in the jackpot game (display area 1900q), and is displayed on the liquid crystal display. By displaying the display in a position that is easier for the player who sees the display screen of the device 1900 to notice, it is possible to strongly appeal the right-handed game to the player.

Further, FIGS. 206 (D) to 206 (F) show examples of display screens in the effect modes of PC attention, mode selection, and mode determination, respectively, which are shown in the display area 1900t on these display screens. The right-handed display is also an example of the right-handed display that can promote continuous fluctuation. The right-handed display shown in the display area 1900t has a lower degree of emphasis than the right-handed display in the manufacturer guide (display area 1900s), but is more "right-handed" than the right-handed display in the jackpot game (display area 1900q). Since the size of the characters and the right-pointing arrow is large, the effect of recommending the player to hit right can be expected more strongly than during the big hit game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the "series of production mode groups" that can be executed after the big hit game, each production mode in which the execution of the special lottery is permitted is emphasized more than during the big hit game. It is possible to perform right-handed display in the displayed mode, and by doing so, it appeals to the player to continuously play the right-handed game without interrupting or stopping the right-handed game in each of the above-mentioned production modes. be able to. Then, by performing a continuous right-handed game, continuous fluctuation of the symbol can be realized.

Note that FIG. 206 (G) shows an example of a display screen in a mode-dedicated effect that transitions after a series of effect mode groups, but the right-handed display shown in the display area 1900q is the right side during the jackpot game. The display mode is the same as that of the striking display (display area 1900q in FIG. 206 (A)). This is because it is not necessary to maintain continuous fluctuation in the mode-dedicated effect after the effect by the series of effect mode groups is completed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment causes the right-handed display to be displayed in a display mode different from the right-handed display during the big hit game only for a predetermined period in which it is preferable to maintain continuous fluctuation after the end of the big hit game. In this way, after the predetermined period has elapsed, it may be controlled so that the right-handed display is performed in the same display mode as the right-handed display during the big hit game. At this time, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a display mode (right-handed display) for teaching a predetermined game method according to a game situation, and a display mode of a specific game state (big hit game). It can be displayed in a different manner. It should be noted that the right-handed display during the big hit game and the right-handed display in the mode-only effect do not have to be performed in exactly the same display mode, but at least, the degree of emphasis is higher than the display mode of the right-handed display in the above predetermined period. Is low.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the above control, the following control may be performed in order to promote continuous fluctuation.

Not only the predetermined period of the high probability time saving state described above, but also a specific period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the special lottery in the high probability time saving state (that is, the big hit game is not performed and the special lottery is not executed. Also in the period), control may be performed to perform a right-handed display different from the jackpot game.

As the display mode of the right-handed display displayed in a specific period, the display mode of the "emphasized right-handed display" displayed in a predetermined period of the high probability time saving state is preferable. Then, as another example of changing the display mode including before and after a specific period, the following display control may be performed.

For example, in a specific period, the display density of the right-handed display displayed during the jackpot game is gradually reduced or blinked. Such a display mode is an example of a display mode that presages that the right-handed display will end. By showing a display mode that presages the end of the right-handed display, it gives the impression that the right-handed display will continue or be restored by the right-handed game, and motivates the player to continue the right-handed game. can. It should be noted that such a change in the display mode may be started from the final round of the jackpot game, or may be performed only during the production of the jackpot ED.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned changes in the display mode such as the decrease in display density and the blinking display are activated when the right-handed game is not performed or when it can be estimated that the right-handed game is not performed. May be good. Specifically, for example, it corresponds to the case where the player's hand is separated from the handle device 500 or the game other than right-handed is performed, and such a situation corresponds to the case where the handle device 500 or the hit ball launching device 650 is used. It can be judged based on the operating condition and the like. In this way, by dynamically changing the display mode when the right-handed game is not performed, it is strongly recommended that the player who sees the right-handed display of the changed display mode perform the right-handed game. The recommended effect can be expected.

In addition, immediately before the right-handed display for a specific period is performed, that is, in the final round of the big hit game, the display mode is changed to the right-handed display that is particularly emphasized as compared with the display mode during the big hit game up to that point. In this way, the right-handed game may not be stopped at the end of the big hit game. Specifically, for example, a right-handed display using an oversized size or a special pattern is performed on the display screen of the final round of the big hit game. In addition, decorative characters such as "DANGER" and "WARNING" may be additionally displayed to further emphasize the need to perform a right-handed game. By performing the right-handed display in such a display mode, it is possible to instigate the need to play the right-handed game before reaching a specific period (the final round of the big hit game), and the big hit game The effect of inducing the continuation of the right-handed game can be expected even after the end. In addition, the "display mode of the right-handed display particularly emphasized" may be continuously displayed even in the "specific period" after the final round of the jackpot game, but the visibility of other production displays is ensured. Therefore, only the final round may be displayed.

Further, it is possible to promote continuous fluctuation by shortening the effect time allocated to the period during which the special lottery cannot be executed in the jackpot ED (for example, in FIG. 205, the place of 500 ms can be shortened to 8 ms at the shortest).

In the above, in order to promote continuous fluctuation in the high probability time saving state, various right-handed displays different from the display mode in the jackpot game have been described. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the jackpot game is different. By controlling so that these different right-handed displays are performed, it is possible to recommend a game method (right-handed game) that does not give a disadvantage to the player, and to continue the game according to the game method.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine in which more lottery can be performed within a limited gaming time by controlling for maintaining the continuously fluctuating gaming state as described above. Can be provided. Conventionally, the winning result of a big hit in a pachinko / pachislot machine is taught after a predetermined elapsed time by displaying a variation of a symbol after a special lottery is performed. There was a limit to the number of times a person could receive a special lottery within the time that a person could spend on a game. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above in a specific example, any one of the predetermined periods from the jackpot gaming state to immediately after the end of the jackpot gaming state (for example, point P in FIG. 205). By controlling the display of the "emphasized right-handed display" (see the display area 1900s in FIG. 206 (B)) at the timing (for example, at the start of the display of the jackpot ED), the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends. In, the special lottery can be started immediately at the timing when the special lottery can be executed (point P in FIG. 205), so that continuous fluctuation of the symbol can be promoted. Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effective game method for executing a special lottery is taught to the player, and many lottery can be performed in a limited game time.

[8-5-2. Control for discontinuous fluctuations (1)]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the continuously fluctuating gaming state is not realized, the pachinko machine 1 does not give a sense of discomfort due to the difference between the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the effect timing of the series of effect modes. The first control for discontinuous fluctuation will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first control for discontinuous fluctuation, when a series of effect mode groups in which the display contents change based on the passage of time after the end of the big hit game is displayed on the display screen, it is special. When the lottery is executed, control is performed to determine the variable effect of the symbol based on the result of the special lottery and the effect mode (display stage of a series of effect mode groups) displayed on the display screen. Since the display stage of the series of effect mode groups changes based on the lapse of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game, the effect mode displayed on the display screen (the effect mode currently being executed) is the end of the big hit game. It can be determined based on the elapsed time afterwards.

By performing the first control in preparation for this discontinuous variation, the variation effect of the symbol (the effect of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) is determined so as to correspond to the effect mode currently being executed. , The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a display screen and decorative symbols in the effect mode even if there is a period in which continuous fluctuation of the symbols is not maintained without the recommended game (for example, continuous right-handed games). It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from being generated between the display screen and the display screen of the variable effect of, and it is possible to provide a comfortable game effect to the player.

The first control for discontinuous fluctuation will be described with a specific example. First, in FIG. 207 described above, based on the result of the special lottery, a variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected from a set of variation patterns different depending on the zone of the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game. In FIG. 207, on the premise that the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is maintained, the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, and based on the association. Candidates for fluctuation patterns were prepared. Specifically, for example, when the number of rotations after the big hit game is 21 to 40 times, it is assumed that the effect mode of PC attention is executed, and when the advantageous big hit is won in the special lottery, it is assumed. , The fluctuation pattern of the special PC image (variation time 2000 ms) was selected at a rate of 50%. However, when the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is interrupted, only the effect mode that transitions with the passage of time precedes the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game, so the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed There was a risk that the correspondence with and would be broken. Specifically, when the effect mode of mode determination is executed when only 30 rotations have elapsed after the end of the big hit game due to discontinuous fluctuation, in this case, the main control board 4100 fluctuates. Although there is a possibility of selecting a variation time of 2000 ms as a pattern, the peripheral control unit 4140 does not prepare 2000 ms as a time for directing (see FIG. 207).

Therefore, in the first control for discontinuous fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol is used as a control that can cope with the case where the correspondence between the rotation speed after the end of the above-mentioned jackpot game and the effect mode being executed is broken. In the selection of, even if different fluctuation times are selected based on the zone of the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game, the control is performed so that the effect is selected from the effect candidates based on the effect mode being executed. It should be noted that FIGS. 173 and 205 to 212 (excluding FIG. 207) used in the explanations of [8-1] to [8-3] are used as they are for the first control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation. do.

With reference to FIG. 207, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol by the first control in preparation for the discontinuous variation will be specifically described. In addition, in FIG. 207, when the result of the special lottery is a miss or a disadvantageous big hit (normal hit), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the candidates of the same fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of rotations after the big hit game is completed. In such a case, even if the correspondence between the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed is broken, the deviation on the effect display does not occur. Therefore, in the following description, only the case where different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the zone of the number of rotations after the big hit game, that is, the result of the special lottery is an advantageous big hit (probability change hit in the figure) will be described. To proceed.

In the following description, regarding the transition control of the effect mode, a control that does not shift to the "mode-only effect" is added until the number of rotations after the big hit game reaches 84 times. That is, the series of production mode groups from "big hit ED" to "mode determination" transitions with the passage of time even if the special lottery is not executed, but the "mode-only production" is after the big hit game is completed. The transition is prevented until the symbol change at the 84th rotation is started. At this time, for example, when the player resumes the game after taking a meal break for 30 minutes after the end of the big hit, as illustrated in FIG. 206 (F), until the symbol variation of 83 rotations is digested. The determined image of the character is continuously displayed. By performing such a transition control regarding the "mode-only effect", the "mode-only effect" is not executed in each zone where the number of rotations after the big hit game is 1 to 83 times.

First, in the zone where the number of rotations after the big hit game is from 1 to 10 times, considering the case where the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is interrupted, not only the production mode of the jackpot ED but also the mode-only production from the subsequent manufacturer guidance. Each effect mode up to may be displayed. In addition, in the zone where the number of rotations after the big hit game is 11 to 20 times, not only the effect mode of the manufacturer's guidance but also each effect mode from the subsequent PC alert to the mode determination may be displayed. .. However, in these rotation speed zones, the only fluctuation pattern selected when winning the advantageous jackpot is forced battle (variation time is 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms), and when the advantageous jackpot is won in other rotation speed zones. Since there is no discrepancy with the variable pattern of the forced battle that can be selected, it is not necessary to prepare candidates for the variable pattern other than those illustrated in FIG. 207.

On the other hand, in the zone where the number of rotations after the big hit game is 21 to 40 times, considering the case where the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is interrupted, not only the effect mode of calling the PC but also the subsequent mode selection to the mode determination. Each effect mode of may be displayed. In FIG. 207, a special PC image (variation time 2000 ms) is selected as the “special effect” in 50% of the cases where the advantageous jackpot is won in the zone, but the effect mode is the effect mode after the PC alert. If the effect of such a fluctuation pattern is performed when the above is executed, a deviation occurs.

In order to deal with such a deviation, in the first control for discontinuous fluctuation, when the fluctuation pattern of "special effect" is selected in 50% of the cases where the advantageous jackpot is won, the "special effect" is selected. The content of the production is the production corresponding to the production mode currently being executed. For example, when the effect mode currently being executed is "PC attention", the fluctuation pattern of the special PC image (variation time 2000 ms) is selected as in FIG. 207. However, if the currently executing effect mode is "mode selection", the variation pattern of the special selection mode (variation time 2000 ms) is selected, and the currently executing effect mode is "mode determination". If there is, the fluctuation pattern of the special dialogue (variation time 2000ms) is selected.

Further, even when the variation effect of the decorative symbol is different based on the effect mode being executed, the variation time of the decorative symbol is not changed (for example, fixed at 2000 ms). This is because the variation time of the special symbol is determined based on the zone due to the number of rotations after the jackpot game is completed, and the variation time of the decorative symbol is determined based on the variation time of the special symbol. That is, the effect is executed in a form corresponding to the fluctuation time determined by the main control board 4100, and the execution of the effect is controlled by the peripheral control board 4010.

Summarizing the candidates for fluctuation patterns in the zone where the number of rotations after the big hit game is 21 to 40 times, 50% of the cases where the advantageous big hit is won, based on the running production mode, "special PC image (variable time) One of the fluctuation patterns of "2000ms)", "special selection mode (variation time 2000ms)", and "special dialogue (variation time 2000ms)" is selected. In the remaining 50%, "forced battle (variation time 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms)" is selected as in the case of FIG. 207.

In the zones where the number of rotations after the jackpot game is 41 to 83, candidates for fluctuation patterns are similarly prepared according to each zone.

In the zone where the number of rotations after the big hit game is 41 to 60 times, each effect mode after the mode selection may be displayed, so when the advantageous jackpot is won and "special effect" is selected. Is selected as the variation pattern of the effect corresponding to the effect mode being executed. Summarizing the fluctuation pattern candidates in the zone, 50% of the cases where the advantageous jackpot is won, "special selection mode (variation time 6000ms)" or "special dialogue (variation time 6000ms)" based on the running production mode. "Any variation pattern is selected. In the remaining 50%, "forced battle (variation time 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms)" is selected as in the case of FIG. 207.

In the zone where the number of rotations after the big hit game is 61 to 83 times, there is a possibility that only the effect mode of mode determination is displayed (additional control so that the mode-dedicated effect is not executed until the 84th time), which is advantageous. At 50 when the jackpot is won, the fluctuation pattern of "special dialogue (variation time 10000 ms)" is selected as the "special effect". For the remaining 50%, "forced battle (variation time 30,000 ms or 40,000 ms)" is selected. These selections are the same as in FIG. 207.

In the zone where the number of rotations after the jackpot game is 84 times or later, only the mode-dedicated effect is executed, so no particular explanation will be given.

When the candidates for the fluctuation pattern related to the "special effect" are summarized for each effect, as a difference from the variation pattern shown in FIG. 207, two types of variation times of 6000 ms and 10000 ms are prepared in the "special selection mode". In the "special dialogue", three types of variable times of 2000 ms, 6000 ms, and 10000 ms are prepared.

In the above specific example, it has been described that the transition to the "mode-only effect" is not performed until the number of rotations after the big hit game reaches 84 times, but the time is not performed without such control. The transition may be made according to the progress. However, in such a case, when the number of rotations after the big hit game is less than 84 times and the "special effect" is selected in 50% of the cases where the "mode-only effect" is won during the execution of the advantageous big hit. , It is necessary to newly prepare a "special production" corresponding to the "mode-only production".

As described above, when the first control for discontinuous fluctuation is performed, a series of effect mode groups in which the display contents change based on the passage of time after the end of the big hit game is displayed on the display screen, the symbols are continuous. Even if the fluctuation is not maintained, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the symbol based on the result of the special lottery, the effect mode currently being executed is referred to, and the variation effect is selected from the candidates corresponding to the effect mode. Since it is possible to control to select, it is possible to suppress the deviation between the effect mode and the variable effect.

Then, by performing such a first control, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment does not perform the recommended normal game method (for example, continuation of the right-handed game), and the originally assumed game. Even if the situation (for example, continuous fluctuation of the symbol) is not realized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in the progress of the game such as the deviation of the production. That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a follow-up that has not been performed in the past even for a game method different from the normal game method. Speaking of the above-mentioned specific example, it is assumed that continuous fluctuation of the symbol cannot be maintained when a game method different from the recommended normal game method (right-handed game) is performed in a high-probability time-saving state. However, even in such a discontinuous fluctuation situation, the above is different by making it possible to select an appropriate effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control board 4100. This corresponds to preventing a problem (mismatch between the fluctuation pattern and the effect) that may occur when the game method is performed.

Further, when the first control for discontinuous fluctuation is performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the effect at the time of discontinuous fluctuation of the symbol as described above can be realized, but also the continuous variation of the symbol can be realized. The effect when maintained (see, for example, [8-4]) can also be realized.

Further, in order to perform the first control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation, it is necessary to prepare more fluctuation pattern candidates than the fluctuation pattern candidates exemplified in FIG. 207, so that the storage area of the peripheral control board 4010 (For example, the amount of data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b) increases. However, the increase in the amount of data is suppressed by keeping the candidates of the fluctuation pattern to the minimum necessary in consideration of the effect mode that can be executed for each zone of the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game. In the above-mentioned specific example, only a total of three fluctuation pattern candidates of the special selection mode (2000 ms) and the special dialogue (2000 ms, 6000 ms) are added. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize a comfortable game effect for the player while suppressing an increase in the amount of data to be stored by performing the first control in preparation for the discontinuous fluctuation. ..

[8-5-3. Control for discontinuous fluctuation (Part 2)]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the continuously fluctuating gaming state is not realized, the pachinko machine 1 does not give a sense of discomfort due to the difference between the rotation speed after the end of the big hit game and the effect timing of the series of effect modes. A second control for discontinuous fluctuation will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a second control for discontinuous fluctuation, when a series of effect mode groups formed from a plurality of effect modes whose transition order is determined after the end of the big hit game is displayed, A variation pattern candidate is prepared so that a variation pattern is selected from different candidates according to the zone of the rotation speed after the big hit game, and the effect mode is controlled to be changed based on the rotation speed after the big hit game. can do.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment corresponds to the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game (that is, the number of times the special lottery is executed or the number of times the symbol changes) by performing the second control for discontinuous fluctuation. Since the effect mode to be executed is determined based on the accumulation status of), the zone of the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game is maintained without breaking the correspondence between the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game and the effect mode being executed. It is possible to select and execute a fluctuation pattern according to the above. Thus, even if the recommended game (for example, continuous right-handed game) is not performed and the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is not maintained, the effect mode and the variation display of the symbol may be uncomfortable. It is possible to provide a comfortable game effect to the player without causing it to occur.

A second control for discontinuous fluctuation will be described with a specific example. First, in FIG. 205 described above, a series of effect mode groups in which the effect modes executed with the passage of time after the end of the big hit game are changed are shown. When the transition control of the effect mode is performed, if the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is interrupted due to the interruption of the game, the effect mode advances without increasing the rotation speed after the big hit game ends. There was a case of deviation.

Therefore, when performing the second control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation, instead of the transition control of the effect mode shown in FIG. 205, it is based on the accumulated state of the rotation speed (rotation speed mode) after the end of the big hit game. Then, each effect mode of the series of effect modes is changed. FIG. 213 is a diagram for explaining a second control example prepared for discontinuous fluctuation. FIG. 213 shows an example of the progress stage of the game after winning the advantageous jackpot, and the configuration of the series of effect mode groups is the same as that of FIG. 206. Further, the point that the execution of the special lottery is started from the middle of the jackpot ED (point P) is the same as in FIG. 206. Comparing FIG. 213 with FIG. 206, in FIG. 206, the staying time is preset for each effect mode, whereas in FIG. 213, in the game progress after the P point, the number of rotations after the big hit game is completed (in the figure). The stay in each production mode is determined based on (corresponding to the "rotation speed"). It should be noted that FIGS. 173 and 206 to 212 used in the explanations of [8-1] to [8-3] are used as they are for the second control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation.

At this time, by controlling the transition of the effect mode as shown in FIG. 213, there is a one-to-one relationship between the effect modes executed at the same time for each of the plurality of zones depending on the number of rotations after the big hit game is completed. Can be made to correspond with. Therefore, as the variation pattern of the symbol determined based on the result of the special lottery, the example of FIG. 207 can be diverted even when the continuous variation of the symbol is not maintained.

For example, it is assumed that the right-handed game is stopped and the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is interrupted after the number of rotations of 30 times is exhausted after the end of the big hit game. At this time, according to FIG. 213, since the effect mode of the PC alert is executed, the effect screen of the PC alert as illustrated in FIG. 206 (D) is displayed on the display screen. After that, when the right-handed game is restarted again, regardless of the passage of time during that time, until the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game reaches 40 times, the design is in the state where the PC attention effect mode is executed. Fluctuation display is performed. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at this time is executed on the display screen because it is selected from the fluctuation pattern candidates shown in the row of "21 to 40 times" in the number of rotations after the end of the big hit in FIG. 207. There is no discrepancy between the effect mode and the selected variation pattern.

If the continuous fluctuation of the symbol is maintained when the second control for discontinuous fluctuation is performed, the transition of the effect mode as shown in FIG. 213 is continuously performed. Since the transition is the same as that shown in FIG. 205 from the viewpoint of the passage of time, the above-mentioned effects can be realized in [8-1] to [8-4]. That is, when the second control for discontinuous fluctuation is performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the effect at the time of discontinuous fluctuation of the symbol as described above can be realized, but also the continuous variation of the symbol can be realized. The effect when maintained can also be realized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case of performing the second control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation, the suggestion (or teaching) regarding the transition of the effect mode is given on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. A predetermined effect display may be superimposed and displayed. Specifically, for example, an empty gauge is displayed when a new effect mode is displayed, and an effect display is performed so as to increase the index of the gauge each time the number of rotations after the big hit game is accumulated. The next effect mode may be displayed when the index of is reached the upper limit. According to such an effect display, the gauge is filled according to the number of times the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is executed, so that a series of effect mode groups can be displayed in a manner linked to the progress of the game. , It is possible to enhance the presence of the game progress and enjoy the display of each production mode.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the second control for discontinuous fluctuation, the game progress in a predetermined gaming state (high probability time saving state) is recommended (continuous fluctuation of the symbol). Even if it is different from (maintenance), it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect mode executed on the display screen and the effect (variation pattern) related to the variation display. Further, since the zone of the number of rotations after the big hit game and the effect mode to be executed can be associated with each other in a one-to-one relationship, it is not necessary to prepare a set of a plurality of fluctuation patterns for each zone, and peripheral control is performed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data stored in the storage area of the substrate 4010 (for example, the peripheral control ROM 4140b). Thus, by performing the second control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation, the lottery (mainly the second special lottery) can be performed while maintaining the display transition of the expected production mode without preparing an excessive fluctuation pattern. It is possible to appropriately and naturally appear the variable display of the design based on the result.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high probability time saving state, the right-handed game is recommended, so that the game progresses mainly by the execution of the second special lottery and the change of the second special symbol. Due to various circumstances (such as when a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 due to a launch other than right-handed, or when the launch itself is not performed and the hold for the first special lottery remains). , The first special lottery may be executed and the first special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special lottery is more advantageous than the first special lottery (see FIG. 173 (C)), so that the second special lottery is executed in a high probability time saving state. Is desirable. In order to solve such problems, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the high-probability time-saving state has a long fluctuation time (for example, 10) that can be expected to secure a hold for the second special lottery regardless of whether or not it is held. Seconds) is desirable.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the second control in preparation for discontinuous fluctuation, a high-ratio lottery (special lottery at the time of probability change) in which a big hit is won at a higher rate than in the normal time is performed. Only in the game state (for example, high probability time saving state), based on the number of executions of the winning effect based on the result of the above-mentioned high percentage lottery performed after the end of the big hit game (the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game), It is possible to control the display transition of the effects included in the series of effect modes.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, while the big hit lottery is performed in a high probability state, it is only possible to change the effect mode to be executed based on the number of rotations after the big hit game is completed. However, even with such a change in the effect mode, the high probability state can be maintained without changing the degree of expectation for the big hit.

Therefore, even if it is difficult to maintain the interest of the player only by executing the big hit lottery in a high probability state as in the conventional game machine, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player By enabling different production modes to appear based on the progress of the game (the number of rotations after the end of the big hit game) while maintaining the game state in which the degree of expectation for the big hit is high, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Can be done.

[8-6. Other special productions]
So far, in Chapter [8], the characteristic game in the high-probability time-saving state has been described, but in the following, the takeover effect will be described as a special effect in which the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can be executed in other game states. do.

As the takeover effect of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a demo effect in which a part of a specific effect (highly expected effect) of the variable pattern effect is displayed on the display screen in the pachinko machine 1 even if the special lottery is not performed. At that time, if a special lottery is performed during the execution of the demo effect, it is an effect that appears in an effect mode using the high expectation effect displayed in the demo effect and teaches the result of the special lottery. .. It is assumed that the takeover effect is mainly executed by the control of the peripheral control board 4010 when the game state is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state, for example.

The execution conditions of the demonstration effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may be the same as those of the conventional general gaming machine. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed) in a game situation in which all the reservations have been exhausted and the change display of the symbol has not been performed (special lottery has not been executed), or for the operation unit. It is conceivable that a specific operation is performed (for example, pressing the pressing operation unit 405). When such an execution condition is satisfied in the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined demo screen is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (demo effect).

Further, the effect pattern of the demo effect may be one, but a plurality of patterns may be prepared. When a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared, the effect patterns to be executed may be randomly selected, or the effect patterns may be selected in a predetermined order based on the past execution history. Then, in the demo production, a high expectation production with a relatively high degree of expectation for the big hit result will be introduced.

Originally, the high-expected production has a high expectation for the jackpot result, so the appearance rate during the game is low compared to other productions with a low expectation, providing an opportunity for the player to experience the high-expected production. It's hard to be done. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to teach the player the existence of such a high-expected effect and expect the appearance of the high-expected effect, at least a part of the high-expected effect is introduced in the demo production. I am doing it. Details will be described later as an introduction to high-expected actions.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102) and a special lottery is performed during the execution of the demonstration effect as described above. , The takeover effect can be selected as the variation effect of the symbol (variation pattern of the decorative symbol) that teaches the result of the special lottery. The conditions for making the takeover effect selectable can be arbitrarily set in advance. Specifically, for example, a specific gaming state, winning a predetermined execution lottery, and a special symbol It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern time is relatively short. Then, when the takeover effect is selected, the result of the special lottery is taught after displaying the effect mode using the high-expected effect being introduced in the demo effect.

In the following, the takeover effect will be described more specifically. FIG. 214 is a diagram for explaining the transition from the demo effect to the takeover effect. In FIG. 214, a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102) in a state where the display screen (demo screen) by the demonstration effect is displayed on the display screen, and the ball enters. An example of the transition of the screen display when the execution of the takeover effect is selected based on is shown.

In FIG. 214, when the demonstration effect is being performed, the decorative characters of "DEMO" are displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as not to be confused with the display screen related to the game based on the special lottery. I have to. That is, in the case of FIG. 214, FIGS. 214 (A) to 214 (D) are examples of display screens by demo production, and FIGS. 214 (E) to 214 (F) are displays related to a game based on a special lottery. This is an example of the screen.

In FIG. 214 (A), first, as an example of the start screen of the demonstration effect, the decorative character "Introduction of high-expected action" is displayed. This introduces a part of the high-expected effects (high-expected actions) in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot result is relatively high among the effects prepared for the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that the demonstration effect introduced in the high-expected action introduction does not have to display all of the corresponding variation pattern effects, and may be any form in which some characteristic effects are extracted. That is, it may be in a mode in which a production display of a scene in which a rare character appears in the production or a production display of a scene in which a rare cut-in appears is introduced, or an intermediate part of the production is introduced. It may be an embodiment as introduced. In addition, since the high-expected production including the high-expected action is a production in which the degree of expectation for the big hit result is relatively high, the appearance rate in the normal game is considered to be significantly lower than the other productions.

In FIG. 214 (B), the decorative design before the high-expected action starts is displayed. Next, in FIG. 214 (C), a cut-in effect screen in which a ally character shouts a deciding line is shown. The cut-in effect shown in FIG. 214 (C) is one of the high-expected actions, and when the cut-in effect is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is significantly increased.

Next, FIG. 214 (D) shows how the technique “final mystery” by the ally character is performed in a manner following the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 214 (C). The "final mystery" effect screen shown in FIG. 214 (D) is also one of the high-expected actions, and when the effect screen is displayed, there is a high probability (for example, 80% or more) of a big hit. It will lead to results.

As described above, a series of demonstration effects from FIGS. 214 (B) to 214 (D) show an example of a high-expected action as a part of the high-expected effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. , It is assumed that the game ball is launched and enters the starting port (for example, the first starting port 2101).

When the game ball enters the starting opening, a special lottery is executed, a variation pattern of the symbol is selected, and the variation display of the symbol is started. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned "conditions for enabling the selection of the takeover effect" are satisfied, it is possible to select the execution of the takeover effect from the demo screen.

FIG. 214 (E) shows an example of an effect screen at the start of the takeover effect. In the takeover effect, the effect display is performed in such a manner that at least a part of the effect content of the high-expected action displayed in the immediately preceding demo effect is inherited.

It should be noted that the production mode in the succession production does not have to completely match the production mode of the high-expected action displayed in the immediately preceding demo production, and at least the production mode having a high-expected action or a production mode similar to the high-expected effect. Just do it. By performing the takeover effect in such an effect mode, it is possible to bring out an effect mode including a highly expected effect. However, even if the takeover effect is executed and an effect mode including a high-expected effect appears, the winning result of the special lottery taught by the takeover effect does not change, and the high-expected action in the takeover effect does not change. The appearance of is not changing the actual degree of expectation for the jackpot.

Further, in the takeover effect, at least one of the high-expected actions displayed in the immediately preceding demo effect is displayed, but the "high-expected action displayed in the immediately preceding demo effect" does not necessarily mean the takeover effect. It is not limited to high-expected actions that have been displayed by the start. For example, when four high-expected actions A, B, C, and D are displayed in order in one demo production, the takeover production is performed at the timing when only the high-expected action B is displayed in the "previous demo production". Is performed, in the takeover effect, it may be displayed from the displayed high expectation action A or B (for example, in the case of FIG. 214), or may be displayed from the undisplayed high expectation action C or D. .. In particular, if the high-expected action (in this case, high-expected action C) that was scheduled to be displayed next in the interrupted "immediately before demo production" starts the production display of the takeover production. , It is preferable because it is more natural as a mode to be inherited from the demonstration production.

In FIG. 214 (E), the cut-in effect introduced in the demo effect of FIG. 214 (C) is displayed as an example of the effect screen at the start of the takeover effect. However, since the display screen of FIG. 214 (E) is not a demo effect but a variable effect of the symbol determined based on the result of the special lottery, "DEMO" is not displayed on the display screen and the display area 1900u is used. Shows a pending state, and the display area 1900p shows a changing decorative symbol. The takeover effect is started in a manner linked to the immediately preceding demo effect. For example, in the transition of the effect screen from FIG. 214 (D) to FIG. 214 (E), the display content seems to be repeated, but a part of the immediately preceding demo effect (cut-in effect) is redisplayed. As a result, the production mode is linked from the demo production.

Next, in FIG. 214 (F), as an example of the effect screen of the takeover effect following FIG. 214 (E), the effect of "final mystery" introduced in the demo effect of FIG. 214 (D) is displayed. In FIGS. 214 (E) and 214 (F), a part of the demo effect is reproduced and displayed, so that a highly expected action appears as the takeover effect, so that the degree of expectation for the big hit by the takeover effect is high. Can make the player feel.

As an effect mode following FIG. 214 (F), the big hit winning result may be displayed as it is, or the big hit winning result may be finally displayed after performing another effect. You may do it. The mode of production for the entire succession effect may be appropriately determined based on the variation time and effect of the selected variation pattern.

As described above, as illustrated in FIG. 214, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the high-expected effect (high-expected action) can be displayed by the demonstration effect even if the special lottery is not performed. If a special lottery is executed during the execution of the demo effect, the takeover effect can display an effect using the high-expected action displayed in the demo effect and teach the result of the special lottery.

In order for the peripheral control board 4010 to execute the takeover effect, for example, a plurality of types of variation effects including high-expected actions are prepared in advance, and when the takeover effect is executed, the variation effect that matches the variation pattern in the variation is executed. You may select, or prepare a partial effect that finishes in a relatively short time in a mode that includes a high-expected action, and when the takeover effect is executed, after displaying the partial effect, the remaining fluctuations. It is also possible to display a normal effect indicating a win or loss in time.

Then, according to such a hand-over effect, at least a part of the high-expected effect, which originally has a low appearance rate, appears, so that the appearance rate of the high-expected effect can be increased. If there are few opportunities for high-expected effects to appear, the player's interest may decline, but the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment enables the takeover effect to be executed, thereby reducing the player's interest as described above. Expected to have a suppressive effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the takeover effect executed in a manner linked with the demo effect is not always executable when the special lottery during the demo effect is executed, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is preferable to control it in a feasible manner. Hereinafter, specific examples of predetermined conditions will be given.

As a first example, when a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time that determines the passage of a reach effect is selected, the execution of the takeover effect is not permitted, and the effect of the selected variation pattern is executed. You may control it.

In the takeover production, at least a part of the high-expected effect (high-expected action) is displayed in a manner linked from the demo production, but the entire high-expected effect is not displayed, and the display of the high-expected action is so long. It doesn't take long. Here, since the fluctuation time in which the passage of the reach effect is determined is relatively long, for example, 60 seconds or more, let's execute the takeover effect when such a variation pattern of the variation time is selected. Then, it is expected that the production time will be left over. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time as described above is selected, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect in the production by not selecting the execution of the takeover effect.

In addition, when a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is selected so that the passage of the reach effect is confirmed, the reach effect appears in the first place even if the takeover effect is not executed and the high-expected effect is not displayed. Therefore, it has a certain degree of expectation for a big hit, and can give the player an interest. Further, by not executing the takeover effect, it is possible to provide an opportunity to enjoy the original reach effect.

As a second example, when the selected fluctuation time is a predetermined short time (specifically, the fluctuation time is so short that the passage of the reach effect cannot be determined), the takeover effect is controlled to be executed. You may. The fluctuation pattern due to a predetermined short-time fluctuation time is, for example, a "normal fluctuation pattern (for example, selection in a low-probability non-time-saving state without hold)" which is selected at a frequency higher than a predetermined frequency during normal time (off time). It corresponds to "the most frequent fluctuation pattern)", and the fluctuation time is, for example, about 10 seconds.

At this time, according to the fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) of the normal fluctuation pattern, the takeover effect displayed in an interlocking manner from the demo effect being displayed is prepared with the effect content starting from a plurality of timings during the demo effect. If this is done, the takeover effect can be selected according to the effect content at an appropriate timing based on the display stage of the demo effect at the start of the takeover effect, and the takeover effect from the demo effect can be smoothly realized. ..

In addition, by making it possible to execute the takeover effect when a normal fluctuation pattern that is easy to select from the normal time is selected, the execution frequency of the takeover effect can be increased, so that the high-expected effect that appears by the takeover effect can be increased. It is possible to increase the chances of showing the player at least a part (highly expected action), and it is possible to increase the chance of the appearance of the production that can improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the takeover effect, at least a part of the high-expected effect can be displayed, but only a specific part such as the most important effect scene may not be displayed in the takeover effect. In this way, when a specific part is concealed so that at least a part of the high-expected effect is shown, the player can be given a certain degree of satisfaction by being able to grasp the outline of the high-expected effect by the takeover effect, but the high. It has the effect of increasing the motivation to play to create a high-expected production with a low appearance rate, which makes you want to know the whole picture of the expected production.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. However, even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1150 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2600 Table right middle production unit 2601 Table right middle movable decorative body 2620A Fixed Decorative body 2623 Light-shielding member 2623a Section 2625 Front cover (cover)
2626 Production sheet (picture film, smoke sheet)
2626a Black part (picture film)
2626b Blue part (picture film)
2626c Red part (picture film)
2626d Uncolored part (smoke sheet)
2627 Diffusing lens sheet 2628 Holding member 2640 Table right Middle decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board 4100a Main control MPU
4140 Peripheral control unit 4140a Peripheral control MPU
4140b Peripheral control ROM
4140e Peripheral control RAM
4150 LCD control unit 4150a LCD control MPU
4150c VDP

Claims (1)

A lottery means to execute a lottery for winning when certain conditions are met, and
A display means that can display an image in a predetermined display area,
A lottery result display control means that changes a symbol using a decorative symbol and displays the result of a lottery by the lottery means on the display means by the decorative symbol.
A gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
A hold display means that stores a predetermined number as an upper limit based on the fact that the game medium wins a prize at a specific starting port and acquires the right of lottery by the lottery means, and holds and displays the hold display on condition that the stored number is stored.
It is provided with an instruction display execution means capable of executing an instruction display prompting the player to perform a specific operation to the operation means for launching the game medium.
It is possible to display on the display means a first effect indicating that the advantageous gaming state is in effect and a second effect in which a suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is performed .
The symbol change is performed when the second effect of suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is displayed on the display means.
The hold display, which was not displayed while the second effect display in which the suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is performed, is displayed by the hold display means. Can be displayed after the end of
The display of the instruction display when the first effect indicating that the advantageous gaming state is displayed and the display of the second effect in which the suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is performed have ended. It is the same as the instruction display when the hold display is displayed later.
The predetermined display displayed in the second effect before the end of the predetermined display not suggesting the result of the lottery, or the predetermined display displayed in the second effect, in which the suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is performed . It is possible to suggest the result of the lottery by the lottery means instead of the special effect of a type different from the second effect.
When the second effect in which the symbol is changed is displayed, the symbol change is displayed by the display means in a manner corresponding to the display of the second effect.
When the second effect in which the suggestion display suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is displayed is displayed, the first effect indicating that the advantageous gaming state is displayed is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the display area of the symbol variation displayed by the display means is reduced so that the symbol variation is difficult to recognize.

Images